# Full text of "The Elements of Algebra Preliminary to the Differential Calculus: And Fit for the Higher Classes ..."

## See other formats

Google This is a digital copy of a book that was preserved for generations on library shelves before it was carefully scanned by Google as part of a project to make the world's books discoverable online. It has survived long enough for the copyright to expire and the book to enter the public domain. A public domain book is one that was never subject to copyright or whose legal copyright term has expired. Whether a book is in the public domain may vary country to country. Public domain books are our gateways to the past, representing a wealth of history, culture and knowledge that's often difficult to discover. Marks, notations and other maiginalia present in the original volume will appear in this file - a reminder of this book's long journey from the publisher to a library and finally to you. Usage guidelines Google is proud to partner with libraries to digitize public domain materials and make them widely accessible. Public domain books belong to the public and we are merely their custodians. Nevertheless, this work is expensive, so in order to keep providing tliis resource, we liave taken steps to prevent abuse by commercial parties, including placing technical restrictions on automated querying. We also ask that you: + Make non-commercial use of the files We designed Google Book Search for use by individuals, and we request that you use these files for personal, non-commercial purposes. + Refrain fivm automated querying Do not send automated queries of any sort to Google's system: If you are conducting research on machine translation, optical character recognition or other areas where access to a large amount of text is helpful, please contact us. We encourage the use of public domain materials for these purposes and may be able to help. + Maintain attributionTht GoogXt "watermark" you see on each file is essential for in forming people about this project and helping them find additional materials through Google Book Search. Please do not remove it. + Keep it legal Whatever your use, remember that you are responsible for ensuring that what you are doing is legal. Do not assume that just because we believe a book is in the public domain for users in the United States, that the work is also in the public domain for users in other countries. Whether a book is still in copyright varies from country to country, and we can't offer guidance on whether any specific use of any specific book is allowed. Please do not assume that a book's appearance in Google Book Search means it can be used in any manner anywhere in the world. Copyright infringement liabili^ can be quite severe. About Google Book Search Google's mission is to organize the world's information and to make it universally accessible and useful. Google Book Search helps readers discover the world's books while helping authors and publishers reach new audiences. You can search through the full text of this book on the web at |http: //books .google .com/I -»4r I MATHEMATICS. THE ELEMENTS OF ARITHMETIC. By AuODSTtrs dk Moh- GAK, FraCcBsor of MatheiDBtici in University College, London. Fourth Editiaa. Rajal 12mo, it. cloth. FIRST NOTIONS OF LOGIC, Preparatorj to the Study of Geometry. By Professor De Morgan. Royal 12ma, la. THE ELEMENTS OP ALGEBRA, Preliminary to the Differential ■--■■■■■■'■■ " "-1 — ' — :- nhioh or De l-Jmo, with DumeroDg Diagrams, 6s. cloth. GEOMETRICAL SOLIDS, to illostrate Runsr'- Lbbsons on- FoRU, end other vorks on Geometrr. The Set of 19 in a Boi, yj. LESSONS ON NUMBER, u given in n Peatalozsian School Cheam, Surrey. By C. RBi:{Ea. Second Edition, conusting of — ThkMastkr'h Mas'ual. 12mo,4j.6rf, cloth. ■( Tbb Scholar's Pa axis. I '•cloSils-W-P"-"'!- PRINTED FOR TAYLOR AND WALTON, 38, UPl'ER qoweH BTREET. *• f t ELEMENTS OF ALGEBRA PRELIMINARY TO THE DIFFERENTIAL CALCULUS AND FIT FOR THE HIGHER CLASSES OF SCHOOLS IN WHICH THE PRINCIPLES OF ARITHMETIC ARE TAUGHT. BY AUGUSTUS DE MORGAN, OF TRINITY COLLEGE, CAMBRIDGE, AND PROFESSOR OF MATHEMATICS IN UNIVERSITY COLLEGE, LONDON. SECOND EDITION. ^' WC^ai a htntBtt t]^at onelp ti^png is, to i^anc \^t toiiU toi^cttctr antr sf^arpenct), 1 nta^t not traucU to tieclare, sft]^ all men confesse it to tc as greate as maie te. 1£xcepte any tDttUssc persons t^inkt J)t mai< tee to totse. But ]^e ti^at moste featet]^ t]^at, is leaste in tyannger of it. ^]^erefore to condntle, 3E see moare menne to acbnotDle'Dge t]^e beneftte of nomber, tl^an IE can espte toillpng to stut^ie, to attaine i^c tenefites of it. i^tany praise it, tut fetDe tiooe greatly practise it : onlesse it tec for \^t iiulgare practice, concernpng jj^ercj^aunties tratle. Wi^txtin x^t tiesire ant) ]^ope of gain, ta&iittif many ixiillpng to sustaine some trauell. Jpor aitie of to^om, 3E tfitr sette fortf) t^t firste parte of Arithmetike^ ISut if ti^ei iinetoe f^oto fane t]^is secontfe parte, tiooetf) exccll t]^e 0rste parte, t]^ei tDOult) not accoumptr any tyme loste, t|)at ioerc imploiet) in it. Yea ti^ei tooultf not t]^infu any tyme toell bestotDet), till i^ti l^atr gotten soci^e i^atilitie ty it, t]^at it migl^t te t]^eir aitre in al oti^er stutJies."— robert recorde. LONDON: PRINTED FOR TAYLOR AND WALTON, BOOKSELLERS AND PUBLISHERS TO THE UNIVERSITY OF LONDON, 28 UPPER GOWER STREET. M.DCCC.XXXVII. a At si P3^ K LONDON : PRINTED BY JAM£S MOYBS, CASTLB STllKKT, XJEICBSTBR SQUARB. PREFACE TO THE FIRST EDITION. In the title-page I have endeavoured to make it clear that it will be impossible to teach algebra on the usual plan by means of this work. It is intended only for such students as have that sort of knowledge of the principles of arithmetic which comes by demonstrationy and whose reasoning faculties have therefore already undergone some training. Algebra, as an art, can be of no use to any one in the business of life ; certainly not as taught in schools. I appeal to every man who has been through the school routine whether this be not the case. Taught as an art it is of little use in the higher mathematics, as those are made to feel who attempt to study the differential calculus without knowing more of its principles than is contained in books of rules. The science of algebra, independently of any of its uses, has all the advantages which belong to mathematics in general as an object of study, and which it is not necessary to enumerate. Viewed either as a science of quantity, or as a language of symbols, it may be made of the greatest service to those who are sufficiently acquainted with arith- metic, and have sufficient power of comprehension, to enter fairly upon its difficulties. But if, to meet the argument that boys cannot learn algebra in its widest form, it be proposed to evade the real and efficient part of the science, whether by presenting results only in the form of rules, or by omitting and taking for granted what should be inserted and proved. 4 PREFACE. for the purpose of making it appear that something called algebra has been learned: I reply, that it is by no means necessary, except for show, that the word algebra should find a place in the list of studies of a school ; that, after all, the only question is, whether what is taught under that name be worth the learning ; and that if real algebra, such as will be at once an exercise of reasoning, and a useful preliminary to subsequent studies, be too difficult, it must be deferred. Of this I am quite sure, that the student who has no more knowledge of arithmetic — that is, of the reasoning on which arithmetical notation and processes are built — than usually falls to the lot of those who begin algebra at school — that is, I believe, begin to add positive and negative quantities to- gether, — will sooner find his way barefoot to Jerusalem than understand the greater part of this work. And I may say the same of every work on algebra, containing reasoning and not rules, which I have ever seen ; provided it contained any of the branches of the subject which are of most usual appli- cation in the higher parts of mathematics. The special object to which this work is devoted is the developement of such parts of algebra as are absolutely requisite for the study of the differential calculus, the most important of all its applications. The former science is now so extensive, that some particular line must be marked out by every writer of a small treatise. The very great difficulty of the differential calculus has always been a subject of complaint; and it has frequently been observed that no one knows exactly what he is doing in that science until he has made considerable progress in the mechanism of its operations. I have long believed the reason of this to be that the fundamental notions of the differential calculus are conventionally, and with difficulty, excluded from algebra, in which I think they ought to occupy an early and prominent place. 1 have, therefore, without any attention to the agree- ment by which the theory of limits is never suffered to make PREFACE. 5 its appearance in form until the commencement of the dif- ferential calculus, introduced limits throughout my work : and I can certainly assure the student, that, though I have perhaps thereby increased the difficulty of the subject, the additional quantity of thought and trouble is but a small dividend upon that which he would afterwards have had to encounter, if he had been permitted to defer the considera- tions alluded to till a later period of his mathematical course. On those who offer theoretical objections to the introduction of limits in a work on algebra lies the (mus of shewing that they are not already introduced, even in arithmetic. What is k2, supposing geometry and limits both excluded ? I have been sparing of examples for practice in ' the earlier part of the work, and this because I have always found that manufactured instances do not resemble the combinations which actually occur. They are but a sort of parade exercise, which cannot be made to include the means of meeting the thousand contingencies of actual service. The only method of furnishing useful cases is to take some inverse process, and the verification of literal equations (as in the seventh and following pages of this work) is the most obvious. With these the student can furnish himself at pleasure, the test of correctness being the ultimate agreement of the two sides, after the value of the unknown quantity has been substituted. The only remaining caution which he will need is, not to proceed too quickly, especially in the earlier part of the work. He must remember that he is engaged upon a very difficult subject, and that if he does not find it so, it is, most probably, because he does not understand what he is about. Wherever an instance or a process occurs, he should take others as like them as he can, and assure himself, by the reasoning in the work, that he has obtained a true result. It was at first my intention to write a second volume on the higher parts of the subject. But, considering that of 6 PREFACE. these there are s€*veral distinct branches, it has appeared to me that the convenience of different classes of students will be consulted by publishing them in several distinct tracts, which may afterwards be bound together, if desired. AUGUSTUS DE MORGAN. London^ July ZUt, 1835. *^» This Second Edition differs from the first only in verbal amendments. Since the publication of the first edi- tion, I have carried on the consideration of the principles of algebra in two other works. In the first, or Elements of Trigonometry^ besides the consideration of periodic mag- nitudes in general, I have (Chapter IV.) given a view of that extension of the meaning of symbols which must ac- company the complete explanation of the negative square root. In the second, or Connexion of Number and Mctg^ nittuHe, which is an attempt to explain the Fifth Book of Euclid, I have entered upon what is in reality the most difficult part of the application of arithnietic to geometry. Both of the preceding works may be made supplementary to the present one, though the latter is altogether independent of it. Vniversity College, London, October 16,1837. CONTENTS. PREFACE. PAOB INTRODUCTION i CHAPTER r. EQUATIONS OF THE FIRST DEGREE 1 CHAPTER IT. ON THE SYMBOLS OF ALGEBRA, AS DISTINGUISHED FROBI THOSE OF ARITHMETIC 44 CHAPTER III. EQUATIONS OF THE FIRST DEGREE WITH MORE THAN ONE UNKNOWN QUANTITY 67 CHAPTER IV. ON EXPONENTS, AND ON THE CONTINUITY OF ALGEBRAIC EXPRESSIONS 83 CHAPTER V. GENERAL THEORY OF EXPRESSIONS OF THE FIRST AND SECOND degrees; INCLUDING THE NUMERICAL SOLU- TION OF EQUATIONS OF THE SECOND DEGREE . . . 124 CHAPTER VI. ON LIMITS AND VARIABLE QUANTITIES 151 CHAPTER VII. CLASSIFICATION OF ALGEBRAICAL EXPRESSIONS AND CON- SEQUENCES. RULE OF DIVISION 168 8 CONTENTS. CHAPTER VIIL PAGK ON SERIES AND IKDETERMIWATE COEFFICIENTS .... IJO CHAPTER IX. ON IHE MEANING OF EQUALITY IN ALGEBRA^, AS DISTIN- GUISHED FROM ITS MEANING IN ARITHMETIC . . . 194 CHAPTER X. ON THE NOTATION OF FUNCTIONS 203 CHAPTER XL ON THE BINOMIAL THEOREM 207 CHAPTER XIL EXPONENTIAL AND LOGARITHMIC SERIES 222 CHAPTER XIII. ON THE USE OF LOGARITHMS IN FACILITATING COMPU- TATIONS 235 ELEMENTS OF ALGEBRA. INTRODUCTION. It is talcen for granted that the student vfho attempts to read this work has a good knowledge of arithmetic, particularly of common and decimal fractions. Whoever does not know so much had better begin by acquiring it, as the shortest road to algebra.* In arithmetic, we use symbols of number. A symbol is any sign for a quantity which is not the quantity itself. If a man counted his sheep by pebbles, the pebbles would be symbols of the sheep. Our symbols are marks upon paper, of which the meaning of every one is determined so soon as the meaning of 1 is determined. If we are speaking of length, we choose a certain length, any we please, and call it 1. It may have any other name in common life, for instance, a foot or a mile, but in arithmetic, when we are numbering by means of it, it is 1 . We now introduce the sign +, and agree that when we write -f between two symbols of quantity, it shall be the symbol for the quantity made by putting these two quantities together. Thus, if 1 stand for the length ■ 1+1 stands for the length ' 1 + 1 is abbreviated into 2, a new and arbitrary f symbol. Similarly 2 + 1 is abbreviated into 3,3 + 1 into 4, and so on. * The references in this work are to the articles (not pages) of my Treatise on Ariihitietict and serve either for the second or third editions. Arbitrary^ that is, any other would have done as well. It is S that stands for 1 + 1, and not <, 5» OO, or anything else, because certmn Hindoos chose that it should be so. See Penny CycXopsdia^ Art, Arithmetic. 11 INTRODUCTION. When 1,2, 3, Sec., mean 1 mile, 2 miles, 3 miles, &c., or 1 pint, 9 pints, 3 pints, &c., these are called concrete numbers. But when vre shake off all idea of 1, 2, &c., meaning one, two, &c., of any thing in particular, as when we say, *^ six and four make ten,'' then the numbers are called abstract numbers. To the latter the learner is first introduced, in regular treatises on arithmetic, and does not always learn to distinguish rightly between the two. How many of the operations of arithmetic can be performed with concrete numbers, and without speaking of more than one sort of 1 ? Only addition and subtraction. Miles can be added to miles, or taken from miles. Multiplication involves a new sort of 1, 2, 3, &c., standing for repe- titions or times, as they are called. Take 6 miles 5 times. Here are two kinds of units, 1 mile and 1 time. In multiplication, one of the units must be a number of repetitions or times, and to talk of multi- plying 6 feet by Z feet, would be absurd.* What notion can be formed of 6 feet taken " 3 feet " times ? But in solving the following question, " If 1 yard cost 5 shillings^ how much will 12 yards cost?" do we not multiply the twelve yards by the five shillings? Certainly not — the process we go through is the following : Since each yard costs five shillings, the buyer must put down 5 shillings as bflen (as many times) as the seller uses a one>yard measure; that is, 5 shillings is taken 12 times. In division, we must have the idea either of repetition or of partition, that is, of cutting a quantity into a number of equal parts. ** Divide 18 miles by 3 miles,** means, find out how many times 3 miles must be repeated to give 18 miles : but " Divide 18 miles by 3," means, cut 18 miles into three equal parts, and find how many miles are in each part. 18 miles divided by 3 miles gives 6 ; meaning^ that 3 miles must be repeated six times to give 18 miles. 18 miles divided by 3 gives 6 miles ; meaning, that if 18 miles be cut into three equal parts, each part is 6 miles. The answer in ab- stract numbers is the same in both cases; 18 divided by 3 gives 6. But now we ask, How many times does 12 feet contain 8 feet? * In old books the following is sometimes found. " What is ^99. 19s. llfrf. multiplied by ^99. 19s. ll\d.V* The only intelligible meaning of this is as follows : If a stock of money is to be increased at the rate of ^99. 19s. llfd. for every £l in it, how much will that be when the stock itself is „£ 99. 19s. 11 Jd, 1 Let the student answer this. INTRODUCTION. Ill The answer is, more than once and less than twice; which is not complete, because we have not an adequate idea of parts of times, that is, parts of repetitions. In talking of ^imef, we use a figure of speech which we may liken to a machine which works by starts, each start doing, say eight feet of work, and which is so contrived that nothing less than a whole start can be got from it ; either 8 feet or nothing. It is plain that such a machine cannot execute 12 feet of work, or any thing between 8 feet and 16 feet. But, let us now sup- pose the machine to be made to work regularly, at 8 feet a minute. Let us still continue to call 8 feet a start, then 12 feet must be called a start and a half. In the same way we say that 12 feet contains 8 feet a time and a halfy the notion of half a time being equivalent to that of repeating not the whole 8, but its half. When we speak of dividing one fraction by another in arithmetic, 2 5 14 2 this is what is meant; for instance, - divided by ~ gives — ; or ■- 3 7 15 3 5 14 contains => tt of a lime. Let the learner study the following pro- positions. '5 2 If ~ of £1 were gained in a day, then - of a pound would be • o 14 gained in -T-zofn day. 5 If the signification of 1 be changed, so that what was - is now 1, then what was - is now — -. 3 15 5 2 14 If - of the line A be the line B, then - of the line A is -~ of the line B. The want of a proper comprehension of such questions as the preceding is a great source of difficulty to most beginners in algebra. If the preceding pages be not readily understood, it is a sign that the reader Ls not sufficiently acquainted with arithmetic for his purpose in reading this work. The symbols of arithmetic have a determinate connexion; for instance, 4 is always 2 -f- 2 whatever the things mentioned may be, miles, feet, acres, &c. &c. In algebra, we take symbols for num- bers which have no determinate connexion. As in arithmetic we draw conclusions about 1, 2, 3, &c., which are equally true of 1 foot, 2 feet, &C.9 1 minute, 2 minutes, &c. ; so in algebra we reason upon IV INTRODUCTION. numbers in general, and draw conclusions which are equally true of all numbers. This, at least, is one great branch of algebra, and ex- hibits it in a view most proper for a beginner. But this is a definition in a few words, and can only be understood by those who have already studied the subject. No science can be defined in a few words to one who is ignorant of it. We shall begin by giving an instance of a general property of numbers and fractions. Take (8) units,* and the fraction which, taken (8) times, gives a unit, t^ is the (8)th part of a unit. Add 1 to both ; this gives 9 and 1-. o The first contains the second (8) times. Take (^) ^^^ unit, and the (2\ ^ 1 ■xj of a time gives a unit, ti^ 1 n* ^^^ ^ ^^ 2 1 ^2\ both, this gives 1- and 2-. The first contains the second [-) of a time. Try the following, in which it will be found that the blanks may be filled up with any one number or fraction at pleasure. Take ( ) units, and the number or fraction which repeated ( ) times gives a unit. Add 1 to both ; then the first result will con- tain the second ( ) times, or parts of times. The following are instances which should be tried. Number or fraction : ) which repeated ( ) times gives a unit. 7 1 7 1 3 3 2l 4 9 1 20 20 1 1 1 added to the first. 8 ? 1 added to the second. 'J 4 9" " 21 2 9 Number of times which the third contains the fourth. 1 3 2I 4 J^ 20 1 The connexion between the first and second columns is this, that the number or fraction in the second is 1 divided by the number or * By putting 8 in brackets, we wish to call attention to the circum- stance of the numbers in the different brackets being the same. INTRODUCTION. V fraction in the first ; or the number of times or parts of times which 1 contains the first. That is, if we call the number in the first column " the number," then the number in the second column is 1 divided by " the number." And the coincidence of the first and fiflh columns (which constitutes the thing we notice) may be thus expressed : Let one more than " the number" be divided by " 1 more than the times which 1 contains the number," and the result must be ** the number." The above must be still fiirther abbreviated for convenience. As ^* the number" means any number we please, and as ** any number vfe please" will be better expressed by any short symbol which we may choose to make use of, let one of the letters of the alphabet be employed, say a. Let the addition of a number be denoted by + as before, and let the division of a number by a number be denoted, as in arithmetic, by writing the divisor under the dividend with a line between them. Let ^ be the sign that what^goes before is the same number as what comes aftier. Then the preceding property of num- bers is thus expressed : We shall now proceed to lay down the definitions of the first part of the science. I. Algebra is the European corruption of an Arabic phrase, which may be thus written, al jebr e al mokabalah, meaning restor- ation and reduction. The earliest work on the subject is that of Diophantus, a Greek of Alexandria, who lived between a.d. 100 and A.D. 400 ; but when, cannot be well settled, nor whether he invented the science himself, or borrowed it from some Eastern work. It was brought among the Mahometans by Mohammed ben Musa (Mahomet, the son of Moses) between a.d. 800 and a.d. 850, and was certainly derived by him from the Hindoos. The earliest work -which has yet been found among the latter nation, is called the Vija Ganita, written in the Sanscrit language, about a.d. 1150. It was introduced into Italy, from the Arabic work of Mohammed, just b2 VI INTRODUCTION, mentioned, about the beginning of the thirteenth * century, by Leo- nardo Bonacci, called Leonard of Pisa: and into England by a physician, named Robert Recorde, in a book called the Whetstone of WittCf published in the reign of Queen Mary, in 1557. From this vfork the motto in the title-page is taken. II. A letter denotes a number, which may be, according to circumstauces, as will hereafter appear, either any number we please ; or some particular number which is not known, and which, therefore, has a sign to represent it till it is known ; or some number or fraction which is known, and is so often used that it becomes worth while to have an abbreviation for it. Thus the Greek letters ir and e always stand for certain results, which cannot be exactly represented, but which are nearly 3-1415927 and 2*7182818. III. The alphabets used are 1. The Italic small letters; 2. The Roman capitals ; 3. The Greek small letters ; 4. The Roman small letters ; 5. The Greek capitals. They are here placed in the order of their importance on the subject; and as many may wish to learn algebra, who do not know Greek, the Greek alphabet is here given, with the pronunciation of the letters. A tc alpha N y BfiQ beta H | r V gamma O • A ^ delta Tl 7r m E 8 epslloa F ^ Z ^ ^ zeta S (T 5 H n heta T t f 6 theta T v 1 I iota O K K kappa X ^ A A lambda Y 4' M /M mu ft V IV. Under the word number is always included vohjole numbers nu xi 6 micron pi ro Sigma tau upsllon phi chi psi omega * The young reader may need to be told that the thirteenth century does not mean a.d. 1300 and upwards, but^.D. 1200 and upwards. The first century is from the beginning of a.d. 1 to the end of a.d, 100 ; the second from the beginning of a.d. 101 to the end of a.d. 200, and so on. • • INTRODUCTION. Vll ?ixid fractions. Thus, 2^ is not called a number in common language, but in algebra it is called a number; or, if it be necessary to dis- tinguish it from 2, 3, 4, &c., it is called a fractional number, while the latter are called whole numbers. Under the word number the symbol may be frequently in- cluded, which means nothing, or the absence of all magnitude or quantity. If we ask, what number remains when b is taken from a, and if we afterwards find out that b and a must stand for the same number, then the answer is, '' no number whatever remains, or there is nothing left." If we say that remains, we make the symbol an answer to a question beginning, " What number, &c. ? " which is equivalent to including under the general word number, V. The sign + is read plus (Latin for more), means in correct English* <' increased by," and signifies that the second-mentioned number is to be added to the first. Thus a-\-b \s read a plus 6, and means a increased by b, or the number which is made by adding b ijo a. + a by itself can only mean a added to nothing, or 0-\-a, which is a itself. VI. The sign — is read minus (Latin for less), means ^^dimi- nished by," and implies that the second number is to be taken away from the first. Thus a — b is read a minus b, means a diminished by b, and signifies that b is to be taken away from a. When a is less than b, the preceding stands for nothing at all, but a direction to do what cannot be done. Thus 3 — 6 is impossible. We shall hereafter have to investigate what such an answer means, that is, the problem which gave it being of course impossible, what sort of absurdity gives rise to the impossibility. - VII. The sign x is rendered by the English word into, and * Those who have attempted to substitute a short English term have never been able to find one which does not shock the ear. We have seen "a add b," and ** a more b;'* which should be, ''To a add b" or **b more than a." Neither of the last would be convenient, and "a increased by b" is too long. The same remarks may be made on "a less b" and "o take away 6," for ** a diminished by 6;" while *• a save b" used by our oldest writers, is now too uncommon. There is no language in which the simplest relations are expressed by the simplest terms. Vlll INTRODUCTION. means ** is the multiplier of/' meaDing that the second number is to be taken as many times, or parts of times, as there are units, or parts of units, in the first. Thus axb is read a into b, and means 6 taken a times. Thus, 1^x6 is 6 taken a time and a half, or 9. The expression a 6 is called the product of a and b; the two latter are called factors of the product, and coefficients of each other. x a and a X must both mean 0; for a taken no time, nor part of a time whatsoever, cannot give any quantity, and nothing, however often V X/^ repeated, yields nothing. As this is connected with a mistake alwajrs made by beginners, we shall (to impress the results on his memory) give two problems* the answer to which is self-evident, and put the answers in an algebraical form; desiring the learner, of course, to remember that no new information is gained, but only an opportunity of making certain results occupy a space proportional to their importance. There is a number of boxes, none of which contain any thing. How much do all together contain? If CI be the number of boxes, then repeated a times, or a X is 0. There is a box full of gold, of which no part whatsoever belongs to A. How much belongs to A ? If j7 be the number of pounds of gold in the box, then A*s part is X p, or 0. The reason of the mistake is, that the beginner retains the notion that ^* not multiplied*' implies ** not diminished,*' and <' not changed at all." But multiplication in the arithmetic of fractions, and in algebra, means the taking a number of times, or parts of times, A number not multiplied at all yields no number, for no part of it is taken; a number which remains the same is multiplied by l,or taken once. Thus a is 1 x ^'^ When letters are employed, or numbers and letters together, the sign X is dropped. Thus a 6 means b taken a times; 3 a means a taken 3 times. It is only when two numbers are employed that x becomes necessary. Thus 3x6 must not be written 36, which already stands, not for 6 + 6 + 6, but for 3 X ten + 6. It is more common to place points between numbers (thus, 3.6) to signify multiplication. But * Problem, any question in which something is required to be found. INTRODUCTION. IX /• as this may be confounded with 3 + -—, the student should always write the decimal point higher up, thus 3*6. VIII. The bar between the numerator and denominator of a fraction is read '* £»y/' and this is the word for division. Thus -r o is read ^' a by by* and means that it is to be found what number of 3 times and parts of times a contains b. Thus '*-, or 3 by 2, is 1^/' means that 3 contains 2 a time, and half a time. That a half is 1 written -, or ** 1 by 2," is consistent, because it is the part of a time which 1 contains 2. The division of a by 6 will sometimes be denoted by a^b, - (which beginners usually confound with a) has no meaning. How many times does six contain nothing ? The answer is, that the question is not rational, a is -, for by a we mean a number of units and parts of units, so that a itself is the answer to " how many times, and parts of times, does a contain 1 ? '' IX. The following are then synonymes for a, which the student should repeat till he is very familiar with them : o + O axl aXlXl -r- &C. fl X 1 a — IXO IXflXl — T- &c. X. The following abbreviations are used for the connecting words equals and therefore. By a := 6 we mean that a and b are the same numbers : it is read a equals 6. By ,•, we mean therefore, or then, or consequently. Thus, a ^ b and 6 = c Z, o = c is read a equals b, and b equals c, therefore a equals c. XI. Every collection of algebraical symbols is called an expression, and when two expressions are connected by the sign =, the whole is called an equation. An identical equation is one in which the two sides must be always equal, whatever numbers the letters stand for, such as the equation already described (page iv), o + l -+1 = a X INTRODUCTION. which cannot be untrue for any value of a; or is true, whatever number we may suppose a to stand for. The following are very obvious identical equations: a + 6 = 6 + a a + l + l=a + 3— 1 ^a + -a = a 3^ + 3^ + 3^ = ^ 2a + 3a — a + 4a = 8a + 6a + 5a— 11a The following are not obvious, but will be found to be true in every case in which they are tried. 1 1 _ 2 + 3a l+a"*"l + 2a l+3aH-2aa a ax An equation of condition is one which is not dtSBJBitrue for every value of the letters, but only for a certain number of values. Thus i + 1 == 7 and a-3 = 12 cannot be true unless 6 is 6 and a is 15. Again, a ^=i b-^-c cannot be true for every value of a, 6, and c, but requires or lays down the condition that a must be the sum of b and c. When a number may be written for a letter in an equation, and it remains true, that number is said to satisfy the equation. Thus, a — 3 = 12 is satisfied by a = 15. XII. When an algebraical expression is enclosed in brackets, it signifies that the whole result of that expression stands in the same relation to surrounding symbols as if it were one letter only. Thus^ a — (6 — c) means that from a we are to take, not b, or c, but 6 — c, or what is left after taking c from b. It is not, therefore, the same as a — b'-^c. Example. What is a — (b — [c — d]) when a = 20, 6 ^ 12, c = 10, and d = 3. Here c — d is 10 — 3, or 7; b^^^c^d) is 12 — 7, or 5 ; a — (b — {c — d}) is 20 — 5, or 15. Also, (a + ^) (c + (Q means that c -f (/ is to be taken a + 6 times, and p{q +r) that ^ + r is to be taken p times. These are the first outlines of algebraical notation. Others will develope themselves as the work proceeds. We shall now lay down some very evident characters of the four principal processes. INTRODUCTION. xi 1 . Additions may be made in any order, without affecting the result. It is evident that all the following six expressions are the same : 1+2+3 1+3+2 2+3+1 3+2+1 3+1+2 2+1+3 Also a + b + c + d = b+c+d+a = 6+a+rf+c, &c. 2. The order of additions and subtractions may be changed in any way which will not produce an attempt to subtract the greater from the less. Thus, if a man lose £20 and gain £50, he has the same as if he first gained £50 and then lost £20, with this exception, that if his property be less than £20, he may do the second but cannot do* the first. Thus 10—20 + 50 is impossible ; but 10+50 — 20 is possible. Also 8 — 6 + 10 — 11 admits of the following forms : 8- 6 + 10-11 8 + 10-11- 6 10 + 8-11- 6 8 + 10- 6-11 10+ 8- 6-11 10-6+ 8-11; but does not admit of the following : 10-11+8-6 -11+ 8 + 10- 6 &o. 10-11-6 + 8 - 6-11+ 8+10 &c. Question. What are the conditions necessary to the possibility of a — 6 + c — d? Answer. That a be greater than (or at least not less than) b, and that a — 6 + c be not less than d. We shall here- after return to this point. 3. Multiplications and divisions may be performed in any order. For instance, abc means that c is to be taken b times and the result a times : the rules of arithmetic shew that this -is the same as bac ; that is, as c taken a times, and the result taken b times; and this whether the numbers be whole or fractional. The student is supposed to have demonstrated these rules before he commences algebra. It is also shewn in arithmetic that division and multiplication * According to the language of common life a man may lose more than he has, that is, lose all that he has and incur a debt besides. But this is always on the tacit supposition that not only what he has, but what he may get, is liable for his debts. No such supposition exists in arithmetic until the meaning of words is altered 5 10—20 is, in every arithmetical interpretation, impossible. f xil INTRODUCTION. may be changed in the order of operation; that is, a divided by 6 and the quotient multiplied by c, is the same as a multiplied by c and the product divided by h. Or a ca In fact, owing to the extension of the meaning of words by which multiplication includes taking parts of times (page iii), every multi- plication is a division, and every division a multiplication. For instance, to divide a by six is to take the sixth part of a, or to take a one sixth of a time, or to multiply a by -. Similarly, to divide a by - is to ask how many fourths of a unit a contains ; the answer to which is, four times as many times as a contains units, which multiplies a by 4. 2 3 Again, to divide 10 by - is to multiply 10 by -. To divide 2 10 by - is to find how often 10 contains two-thirds of a unit. Now ^ 3 2 1 a unit is made up of - and -, the second of which is half the first; that 1 contains -, a time and a half. Therefore, 10 contains /v ^ 3 two-thirds ten times and ten halves of times, or 15 times. That is, 10 2 1 divided by - is 10 taken once and a half or 10 multiplied by 1~, 3 2 3 that is, by -. 7 2 Similarly, to divide by - is to multiply by -. How often does 10 contain the half of 7 units ? Twice as often as it contains 7 units ; 10 20 20 2 tliat is, twice -^r of a time or -— of a time. But rr- is - of 10, or 10 7 7 7 7' taken — of a time. 7 The learner should practice many different cases of the following general assertions. a multiplied into - is a divided by - 9 P a divided by ~ is a multiplied into - 9 P pa a q 9 i S. p p « INTBODUCTIOIC. Xlli The first operation to which the beginner must be accustomed is the conversion of algebraical expressions into numbers, upon different suppositions as to the value of the letters. For instance, what is 2±* when a=l and 6 = ? • a— 6 2 5 1 +afl aaa , 1« Is —- ; — = - . , true when a s 1 - f ^ l+« 2 + ia 2 3 i/ ; a- -6 = 1 2" 2 "5 = 1 10 9 10 1 = 9 10 339 , . , . 9 13 X aa = ~ Xr = T 2 2 1 ■ 1 . J' *«^ 333 27 1 3o.l 11 aaa =-x— X— = — —a =5— I&H — a ^ — 2^2 2 8 2 4 ^2 4 /o . 1 \ 27 11 27 But (l+tfa)-^(l+a) =H therefore the above equation is not true in this case. What is aa + h(a + I) when a = 4 6 = 3? a + 6 = 7 6(a + i) = 3x7 = 21 aa = 16 aa + &(a + J) = 16 + 21 = 37 But the most instructive exercise is the verification of equations which are asserted to be identical. For instance, aa — hb aaa-\'bbb a — 6 aa-\-bb-~^ab Let a = 4 6=2, then aa = 16 6t = 4. a — b 2 ^ ' flOfl + fe66 __ 64 -t- 8 _ 72 _ /ov «a + 66 — fl6 — 16+4—8 "" 12 "~ ^^ 2 ^ 1 Letfl = - & = -. r XIV INTRODUCTION. fl« — bb a — bb ^^ _9 4_ _ 36 /7\ ;J3T " !._L "" J. - w 6 aaa-f-666 __ 27 ' 8 __ 216 _ /7\ ^"+6S^Z^ — 1'. i_i "■ il ^ VT/ ^ 9 ^4 3 36 The following is a list of identical equations, which the learner should verify; first, by giving whole values to the letters, next, by giving fractional values. It is needless to give instances of each, because the test of correctness is in the two sides shewing the same value, no matter what. The only restriction upon the values of the letters is that no values must be assumed which will produce in the equation an expression for the subtraction of the greater from the less, or which will produce in the denominator of a fraction (pages vii,ix). {a +x +y)(a + x-^y) = aa-{-2ax + xx-^yy (aH-6)(a-fA) = aa + 2ab-\-bb (« — h) {a-^b) = aa — 2a6 + JJ (mm^nn) (rnm-^nn)+4mmnn = (mm-{-nn) (mm-rnn) (a+b) (a + &) + (a— i) (a— J) = 2aa + 2bb (a+b) (a + 6)— (a— J) (a— 6) = 4ab (a+A+c) (a+i— c) (b+c-^a) (c+a— J) = 2aabb+2bbcc+2ccaa--aaaa--bbbb^cccc (a + J) (a+b) (a + ft) = aaa+3aab-^3abb-^bbb 1 1 1 3aa + 2 — 6a a a — 1 a — 2 000-^-20 — 3aa a'\-b a — b 2aa-j-2bb u^b a-^-b aa — 66 4a xxxx — yyyy ^^^'\'^3£y'\-xyy •\-yyy xxx^^yyy ^x-\- xy-\-yy INTRODUCTION. XV \ X-^^ ] x-f- 6 — jrjr + (6+c)jr + 6c The reduction of several terms into one can be performed to as to produce a more simple term, when all the terms are alike as to letters. Thus, 3a + 2a = 5a a + 7a — 4a = 4a 3aJ + 2a6 = 6aft £ + 7? - 4^ = 4^ 9 9 9 9 3xx '{-2xx = 5xx aab + 7aab-^3aab = 5aab a + 12a — 3a — 6a + 2a — a = 6a In the last instance, all the additive terms make up 15 a, from which d is to be subtracted three times, six times, and once, or 10 times in all; that is, 10a is to be subtracted : and 15a — 10a s= 5a. Similarly a-^b — Za + 4 b = 5 b — 2 a. For b and 5b added /y ^ give 6b, which is added to a, after which 3a is subtracted. But, subtracting 3 a where a had previously been added, is the same as subtracting 2 a without previously adding a, which gives a+66 — 3a = 66 — 2a Examples. a-haJ — 2aJ-f 4a4-6a = 11a — aft 2xx + 6x^4x'-'Xx + c = xx + 2x + c 3a;— 16 + Ja:-a;-7 = 2ja:-22 a? + y + a; — y -f 3x = 6x If, upon looking through such an expression as either of the above, we find the following terms containing the simple product xi/ (veith their signs) + 6a;y, — a;y, + 4a:y, +2xy, —Uxy, — 12a:^, the single term which represents the result of all those containing jci/, is found as follows; the whole number of additions oi xy to the rest of the expression amounts to 12, and there are 24 subtractions of it in all. Let all the additions, and as many of the subtractions, be abandoned, there will then remain 12 subtractions uncompensated by any additions, and — 12 xy must be appended to the rest of the expression. When two terms are not exactly the same as to letters and number XVI INTRODUCTION. of letters which enter them, no sach simplification can take place. For example, aa-\-a cannot be reduced. It is not* 2a, nor 2aa, nor aaa; it is a taken a times added to a taken once, and is therefore a taken a + 1 times, or (a + ^* '^^ ^^ ^^ (<* + 1) taken a times, or a(o + 1), page xi. Thus a -^ a is algebraically reducible to the single terra 2 a, but aa -\' a is not so reducible, nor does it admit of any simplification of form, except that which is contained in the formation of its arith- metical value, which cannot be found till we know what number a stands for. How many times is a contained in a -jr b? This question admits of no answer till we know how many times 6 contains a; therefore I L we can only use the algebraical representation , which has been chosen to signify the number of times which a-\-b contains a. But let the student observe that this is not an answer to the question, but a method chosen to represent the answer. How many times is a contained in ma — na? Here, though we cannot completely answer this, till we know what m and n stand for, yet the algebraical meaning of ma and na puts our algebraical answer one step nearer to the arithmetical answer, that is, enables us to answer otherwise than by directly writing down . For it is evident that when n times is taken away from m times, the re- mainder is m — 71 times; that is, ma — na contains a, m — n times. This must be taken notice of in all algebraical operations. The question, "What is 8a + 5a?" cannot be answered until we know what a stands for; but to ** What is the most simple algebraical form of 8fl -f 5 a?" we answer 13 a. And by the algebraical operations of addition, subtraction, multiplication, &c. we mean the methods of changing algebraical expressions into others which are Of more simple character. For instance, " to add a + 6 to a — 6." The following (a + 6) + (a - b) is the first form of the result, derived from representing the thing to be done under algebraical symbols. But its most simple form is 2a; and in the reduction of the preceding expression to 2a, consists what- * These are all mistakes to which the beginner is liable. INTRODUCTION. XVU we shall call algebraical addition. We shall now go through several of these processes. Addition. We wish to add a + 6 to c -f e. It to a -\- b we add Cy giving a + ^ + <^9 we have not added enough, because the quantity to be added is not c, but e more than c. Therefore a + ^ + c-|-e is the result, or* {a + b) + {c + e) = a + b + c + e .... (1) To add c — c to a + 6, we first add c, giving a-j-b + c. But this is adding too much, for e should have been taken from c and the remainder only added. Correct this by taking e from the result, which gives a -f 6 + c — e. (a + J)-f (c — e) = a + b + C'-e .... (2) In the results of (1) and (2) further reduction is impracticable. We shall now try the following. To add a -j- b to a — b, (a-f J) + (a — ft) = a + b-\-a^b = 2a To add 3jr — a to 2a — jt, (3a: — a) + (2a ^x) = 3x'-a + 2a — x = 2x -{- a To add ab — b to 2ab-\-c — 6b, Am. 2ab + c-^6b + ab — b or 3a&+c— 76 From these, and similar operations, we have the following rule of addition : Write + before the first terms of all the expressions but one, and consider the aggregate of all as one expression. Make the reductions which similarity of terms (as to letters) will allow. Examples. <X — J + 3c — ab Aab^ b +2a — a: 4a; + 6a + a J — 7 are to be added. Anmer, 9a — 2i + Aab + 3c + 3ar — 7 • When we wish to refer to an equation afterwards, we place a letter or number opposite to it, as is here done. c 2 XVlll INTRODUCTION. Add. Add. Add. a^h a«2ft a +ma'^4 b^c 6-2c 6— a +2ma c^d c — 2c? 12wa— 12 — 3a d^-x rf — 2a: ;?+ a — J a — x a — J — c — d — 2a: 15»ia — 2a— lOJ +j9 The following rule is also derived from (1) and (2) : Art expression in brackets preceded by the sign + will not be altered in value if the brackets be struck out, a + (6 + c — e) = a +b +€-^6 Subtraction. — To subtract 6 -f c from a. If we first subtract b, which gives a — b, we do not subtract enough, since b should have been increased by c, and the whole then subtracted. Hence c must also be subtracted, giving a^b — c, or a — (b-\-c) = a — b — c (3) To subtract b — c from a. If we now subtract b, giving a — 6, we have subtracted c too much ; or a — b is less than the result should be by c. Consequently, a — 6 -|- c is the true result, or a — {b — c) ^= a^b+ c • • • • (4) The following are instances : a — (c^a) = a-'C-\-a=:i2a — c a^(a^c) = a — a-f-c = c 3a + i-(2a — i) = 3a + i — 2a + & = a -f 26 a + ft — (a — i) = a + 6 — a + 6 = 26 mx^^q — Smx) = mx ^ q + 3mx = 4mx — q When an expression in brackets is preceded by the SIGN — , THE brackets MAY BE STRUCK OUT, IF THE SIGNS OF ALL THE TERMS WITHIN THE BRACKETS BE CHANGED, NAMELY, + INTO — AND — INTO +• This is evident from (3) and (4). As the neglect of this rule is the cause of frequent mistakes, not only to beginners, but to more advanced students, we have printed it thus to attract attention. Still furtlier to impress it on the memory of our younger readers, we beg to inform them that to neglect this INTRODUCTION. XIX rule is the same as declaring that all debts are gains, and all property a loss ; that to forgive a debt is to do an injury, and that the more a inan is robbed the richer he grows ; with a thousand other things of the same kind. Another proof of the preceding rule is as follows. If we wish to find a — (i + C — p ^q) (A) we must remember that if two quantities be equally increased, their difference remains the same: thus the difference of a +j: and 6-fx is the same as that of a and b. We are told to diminish a by b -{-c—p^q which is the same as if we diminished «+(/> + ^) by (bJtC^p-^q) + {p+q) or by i + C — p — y + ^J + J or by 6-fc thai is, a — (6 + c — p — q) is the same as a+^-fy — (6 + c) or a -{-p-k- q — b — c or a — i — c+p+g' (B) on comparing (A) and (B) the rule is obvious. The rule for subtraction is as follows : Consider the first term of the expression to he subtracted as having the sign +. ; then change every sign, annex the expression thus changed to the expression which is to be diminished, and make all practicable red act ions J as in addition. From a + i — c — a: + 2z + 3ai — 14 Take c — 2a + a: + 2r — 4a6 + 2J ■ -"--I - ■ — ■■■■Jill - - , Rem'. 3a + 6 — 2c — 2x + zi^7a6 — 16J From a+c a;+y — 3 — a a — fe + c — d + e Take 2c — a a: — y + 3 — a a— 26 + c + d— e Remr. 2a — c 2y — 6 i — 2d + 2e From a + 6 + 2c + 3d + 4e — 5/— e^r Take lCd-f4e-3c + 2a + 6-5r+/ Rem'. 5c — 9d— 6/— S^r — a XX INTRODUCTION. What is a-.(6-(c+^)) + (6-(a;-26)) This, by ihe rules for expunging brackets, is a — 6 + (c + a?) 4- i — (^ — 26) which, by the same rule, is a'-b + c + x-j-b^x + 2b or a + c+ 26 / , ^ Shew/ that A. - <- -f * since all the rules for addition and subtraction are independent of the order in which the terms of the expressions are written, we shall in future not inquire whether an expression is written in a possible or impossible form (page xi), but consider the impossible forms as meaning the same thing as the possible ones. Thus, in 3 — 7 -}- 8, we shall not regard the subtraction as necessarily to be performed first, and therefore treat the expression as impossible, but we shall consider the order of the operations as immaterial, and the above as 3 4*3— 7 ; and the same for other expressions. We oould not have done this if the rules for addition and subtraction had re€[uired any preliminary inquiry into the possibility of the order of the terms. If we have to subtract the preceding, say from 12, we find that the employment of the impossible form, namely 12-(3-7 + 8) = 12-3 + 7-8 = 8 gives the same result as if the possible form had been employed, as in 12-(3 + 8-7) = 12-3-8 + 7 = 8 Multiplication and Division. — In the multiplication and division of algebraical quantities, it must always be borne in mind that the letters may represent either whole numbers or fractions. We shall first express the rules which have been found in arithmetic for the addition, &c. of fractions which have whole numerators and denominators. First observe that r- (when a and h are whole numbers) is the answer to all of the following questions, which are in effect the same. INTRODUCTION. XXI 1. If a unit be divided into b parts, and a of those parts be taken, how many units or parts of units result? 2. How many units or parts of units are there in the 6th part of a? 3. How many times, or parts of times, does a contain b ? Thus, 3 - representing the seventh part of unity repeated three times, is the answer to the questions, " What is the seventh part of three V* and '< How many parts of a time does three contain seven?'' It is only the method of speaking, or the idiom of our language, which prevents our explaining in a similar manner the meaning of fractions which h^ve fractional numerators and denominators. For a 4 instance, if we attempt to explain t where a is 2^ and 6 is - in the same way as where a is 3 and b is 7, we shall produce a (yet) unintelligible idiom. Let us suppose some concrete unit, say a mile of length. 3 3- 2\ What is - miles, or ~ of a What is ~ miles ? 7 7 ^ mile ? 4 Cut a mile into 7 equal parts ^""^ « '^'^ •'•^^ 9 ^^^<^^P^th and take 3 of them. and take 2^ of them. The words in italics are unintelligible, and not having a meaning, may have one given to them.* By altering the manner in which the first of the two preceding is expressed, without changing the meaning, we may find a mode of speech which shall not become unintelligible 4 when - is written for 7, and 2 j^ for 3. As follows : "* The same letter may either stand for a whole number or for a fraction ^ and we might find out how to group those idioms which belong to whole numbers with those belonging to firactions, so as to be able to pass from one of the first set to the corresponding one of the second. But it will be more convenient to take the modes of speaking which belong to whole numbers, and agree that when fractions are spoken of they shall be used for the corresponding expressions. We have already done this in arithmetic in the word multiplication, which originally means, " taking a thing many times,'' but which we have also made to signify ** taking a thing a part of a time." Thus we speak of multiplying by one half. XXU INTRODUCTION. Find the length which taken Find the length which taken 7 times gives a mile, and take 4 ^ ^ ^^^ ^^^^ ^ ^.j^^ ^^^ that length 3 times. ^ take that length 2^ times. 4 45 The reduced value of 2 J -7- r is — of a mile, or 5% miles, and 9 the student may easily shew by the rules of arithmetic that this coin- i 4 cides with the length, - of which is a mile, repeated 2J times. And y I : 5i is also the answer to the question, ** How many times and parts of ' 4 ■ times does 2h contain - V* " 9 It is usual in algebra to make use of modes of speaking with regard to letters, drawn from our notions of whole numbers ; but as the letters themselves may stand either for fractions or whole numbers, these modes of speaking are too confined unless they are understood to imply the corresponding modes of speaking, with regard to fractions. For instance, suppose it asked, ''What is the value of one acre if x acres cost y pounds?*' The answer would always be given as follows : — Divide the number y into x equal parts ; then e€K:h of those parts is the number of pounds which an acre costs. Thus, if 18 acres cost £36, since 2 is the 18th part of 36, £2 is the : I price of an acre. But if - of an acre cost £2-, and if we speak of 2 • 3 dividing 2- into - equal parts, we must mean the same as if we 1 11 said "take .2- two times," or divide 2- by - (according to the arithmetical rule). Now, though it may appear at first sight almost i ': ■ 1 ridiculous to say that dividing a quantity into — equal parts is the same thing as taking it 10 times, we must remember, 1st. that we have done something of the same sort, when we said that dividing > into 10 equal parts, and taking one part, is multiplying by ---; 2d. that we do say this, when we say that if x acres cost y pounds, ; the price of one acre is found by dividing y into x equal parts ; for letters may stand either for fractions or whole numbers. We should recommend the student to solve various simple INTRODUCTION. xxiii questions in the rule of three, with fractional data,* 1st. By imitation of a question with integral data, 2d. By independent reasoning ; as follows : I. If 6 yards cost 7 shillings, how much do 5 yards cost? As 6 yards to 5 yards, so are T'X.5 5 7 shillings to -— • or 5- shil- lings, the answer. If - of a yard cost - of a 3 "^ 7 4 shilling, how much do - of a yard cost? 2 4 As - of a yard to - of a *i y yard so is - of a shilling to 5 4 7X0 10 g or — - of a shilling, the 3 answer. 2 , 5 II. If - of a yard costs - of a shilling 5 15 2 yards cost ^ X 3 or -— 1 yard costs -=- -7- -& or -— ^ 7 14 A J ^ 15 . 30 4 yards cost 77 X 4 or —- 4 r A ♦ 30 . Q 10 - of a yard costs -=- -f- y or -- 9 "^ 7 21 We shall now write all the rules of arithmetic relative to fractions in an algebraical form^ these rules being those with which .the student is already familiar as applied to whole numbers. We shall first suppose the letters to denote whole numbers. a ma a c aa-\- be b mb 6 ' rf ^ bd , b ac + h c c a e ad — be 6 5"" bd b ac '— h c e a a^be 6-*=- b * Datum, A thing given, that is, a number given as pert of a question. ** 2 pints cost 4 shillings, how much, &c. ;" here the data are* 3 pints and 4 shillings. Xxiv IKTRODUCTION. a h ac a c I ^5 ac — bd a h a • a '^b _ 6c a a b c ad '^ d^ be = a b d X - c The learner must make himself acquainted with each of these equations, which he will easily do if he have the requisite degree of familiarity with the operations of fractional arithmetic. For ezampley in T X J =: 7-}» he will recognise the rule, " To multiply one frac- 6 d bd tion by another, multiply their numerators for a numerator, and their denominators for a denominator." The preceding rules all hold good when the letters stand for frac- tions. We shall take the demonstration of this in one instance, namely, t = — r- Let a be the fraction - let 6 be-, and let m be •^' 6 tnb q t X - ; where /?, ^, r, s, x, and y, are whole numbers. y p ^ = "7 = — (By the rule.) r * Sr X p xp 1 X r xr y 9 y9 y 9 y ma ^^ yq ^yp* mb il "~ ^y^f But '^^' = ^^-^^^P' c= El ^y9^ {^y)><9^ 9^ ma a 1 where o, 6, and m, are frac- or n mb 6 J tional. It is shewn in arithmetic that the order in which multiplications or divisions are made may be changed without affecting the result, both in questions of whole numbers and fractions. We need not, wiien speaking of both, distinguish between multiplication and division ; for division by a is multiplication by -. The following a summary should be attended to and repeated on several products. The expression abed is the product, 1. Of a, 6, c, and d, in any INTRODUOTION. XXV order; 2. Of ab and cd; 3. Of ac and bd; 4. Of ad ana be; 5, Of abc and(f; 6. Of a6dand c; T.Ofacdoind b; 8. Of ice? and a. The product of single terms may be expressed by writing the letters consecutively in any order which may be convenient, and actually multiplying the numerical coefficients, if any. The sign x becomes necessary between two numerals only. Thus, 2ab x ^cd might be written in tlie following ways : 2ab4tcd 2 x Aabcd 8acbd Sabcd^ &c. It is most convenient to write the numerical coefficient first, and letters of the same sort together, the order of the alphabet being generally preferred. Thus, 2aab x Sabbc is written daaabbbc 1 3 12abxx^abxx = 4Saabbxxx 3abcx-ab =-aabbc 2 2 When fractions are written side by side of each other, or of single letters, multiplication is intended to be denoted. Thus, ■rC-^ means ZXtXCX:^ and is -r-p- of ^ J of [Though a, ab, a be, &c. are called integral expressions, and fl c ac Tf^^-Ti &c. /rac^itms, this refers to their algebraical, not to their d arithmetical character ; for, since letters may stand for fractions, that which is integral considered algebraically, may be fractional con- sidered arithmetically, and viee versd. For example, suppose that a stands for - and 6 for -, then the algebraically integral expression 1 /l a is the arithmetical fraction - ; while the algebraical fraction -, or 2 : — is the arithmetical whole number 2. 2*4 In speaking, therefore, of integral or fractional expressions, we refer always to their algebraical appearance, not to their arithmetical values. The latter depend on the particular arithmetical value of the letters, on which no supposition is made.*] * The part of algebra which treats of letters considered as repre- senting wluyle numbers only, is generally called the theory of numbers. It is very rarely, if ever, of use in the application of algebra to the Differential Calculus, and is therefore altogether omitted in this work. d XXVI INTRODUCTION. The multiplication of algebraical quantities depends on the rule wliich appears in the following equations : m^a + b) = ma + mb mia-^b) = ma—mb First, it is required to take a-\- b, m times. If a be taken m times, it is clear that for every time and part of a time which a has been taken, 6 or a part of 6 has been omitted. Consequently, ma h too little hy mh, OT ma •{- mb is the product required. Secondly, it is required to take a — b, m times. Here, if a be taken m times, 6 or a part of b too much has been taken for every time or part of a time which a has been taken. Consequently, m a is too much by wi 6, or ma — mb is the product required. Hence we may prove the following equation : as follows: let a + b be called />, and let c-\-d be called q; then a -\- b — c — d is p — q (page xix.), and m(a4-i— c— d) = m(p^q) = mp—mq But mp = ma + mb mq = mC'\-md mp—mq = ma-j-mb^{mc + md) s= ma + mb-^mc-^md The following are applications of the preceding rules : 3(a+i) = 3/1+36 3^(0-6) = ^\a-^z\b ab^a—b) = aab-^abb 2a(a— aa)*= 2aa—2aaa 3aic(a6— ac + 4) = SaaiJc— 3aaftcc + 12a6c 2(1+1) =^ + T 6(1 + 1) =3^+2^ * The student will observe, that in these examples we do not inquire whether the expressions are possible or not, but bow to apply the rules when they are possible. For instance, a— a a is impossible when a is greater than 1, and possible only when a is less than 1. And let it be observed in proceeding, as a matter of great importance in the sub. sequent part of the work, that the rules investigated will not serve to distinguish between possible and impossible expressions. IMTBOOUCTION. XXTli a ^ J 7 ac ad ae P9rs{^ "^ J + 7 ""^r) == qrs+prs+pqs^s In order to multiply a + 6 by c + rf, let us, for a moment, make p stand for a + ^* Then, p multiplied by c -|- </, is the same as c -|- '^ multiplied byp, which ispc -{-pd, or (a + b) (c + d) = (a + b)c + (a + b)d But (a + i)c = ac + Jc, (a'hb)d = ad + bd .\ ia + b) (c+d) = (ac + ic)+(a(i+i(i) = ac+bc'\-ad+bd To multiply o -}- 6 by c — rf, let a + 6 ^ jt?, and we have p(c — d)=/>c — prf, or (a + J) (c— d) = (a + i)c— (a + 6)d = (ac + ftc)— (ad + id) = ac + bc^ad^bd To multiply a — b by c — rf, let a — b ^ p, and we have p (c — d) ssipc — pd, or (a^b) {c^d) = (a— J)c— (a— i)d = {ac—bc)^{ad^bd) = ac—bc-^ad-jrbd There are two methods of conducting this process, the first of which is recommended to the learner for the present. 1. To multiply a + 6 — 2cbyrf — a — c. Here a times and c times the multiplicand are to be successively taken from d times the multiplicand ; that is, a -\-c times is to be taken from d times. tf • • « XXVUl INTRODUCTION . Add I d times the multiplicand = ad+bd — 2cd a times ditto ^ aa-^ab — 2ac c times ditto s= ac-}-bc-^2cc a-f-ctimes ditto = flo + ac + a6 + ^c — 2ae — 2cc {Subtract from d times ad-\-bd+2ac-i-2c<:^2cd ditto which gives — aa— ac — ab^-bc 2. From looking at the preceding instances, it appears that the rule of multiplication is as follows : Consider the first terms as having the sign + ; multiply every term of the multiplicand by every term of the multiplier y and put + before the products of terms which have the same sign, and ^- before the products of terms which have different signs. The preceding example is here written in the usual way, with the proper signs written to every term by tlie preceding rule. from d«»»« ad-^bd — 2cdl from a • • • • — aa — ai + 2ac ^Product required. from c •••• ^ac-^bc + 2ccj Where like terms are found in different lines, so that subsequent reductions may be made, it is convenient to put like terms under each other, as in the following example : Multiply xx-^2x-\-l By s — 4 From j: xxx—ixx-^-x From 4 m^m2XX'^X ^ . f Product required. — 4xx + 8j?— 4 } ^ XXX — 6xj:-|-9x — 4 ditto in simplest form. But the manner of doing this, which (as yet) we recommend, is the following : Multiply a?a?— 2a?H-l By ar— 4 „ , . ,. ^ Z '. f Subtract second From a? timesmultiphc* a?jra: — Zxx + x ,. . '^ <{ Ime from first, Take 4 times ditto 4j;j-8j; + 4 | ^ ;„ ^^^^^^ y^^^ arxa;— 6a;a;+9a;— 4 Product re<iuired. ^ INTHODUCTION. XXIX The three instances which follow are of particular importance, and the learner should be able to write them (and similar ones) at sisht. Mult, a+b a-b a + r> By a+b a~h a~b To aa+ab From aa—ab From aa + nb Add ab + bb Take ab—bb Take ab + bb ^6 aa+2ab + b -2ab + bb [The following definitions may be appropriately introduced here, A square is a four-sided figure, with sides of equal length, and with contiguous aides perpendicular to each other. A cube is a solid figure enclosed by six equal squares ; or, a boK of the same length, breadth, and thickness. A square 4 inches long contains 4x4 squares of one inch long; a square of x inches long contains xx squares of one inch long. There are x rows of square inches, and x squares in each raw. A cube 4 inches long contains 4x4x4 cubes of one inch long ; a cnbe x inches long contains xxx cubes of one inch long. There are x layers of cubic inches, and xi cubic inches in each layer. Owing to this connexion of xx with the square on a line of x units, and of xxx with the cube on a line of r units, it has always been customary to call xx the tqtiare of x, aod xxx the cube o! x. But xxxx is called ihe fourth pmuer of x, xxxxx the fifth power ; and so on. So that x itself should be called tlie^tt power ofx, IX the tecond power of x, and xxx the third power ol x. Bui llie words square and cube are so conveniently short that they have never been abandoned.] llie last mentioned products may be thus slated : 1. ia + b){a + b) = aa + 2ab+bb d2 XXX INTRODUCTION. or, The square of the sum of two qtiantities is the sura of their sqtiares, augmeDted by twice their product. or. The square of the difference of two quantities is the sum of their squares^ diminished hy twice their product, 3. (a + J)(a — 6) =z aa — bb or. The sum of two quantities, multiplied by their difference^ is the difference of their squares. Thus let the two quantities be a 6 and 2 a. ab X ab = aabb 2a x 2a = 4aa 2(ab X 2a) = Aaab {ab+2a) {ab+2a) = aabb-j-4aab + 4aa (fli— 2a) (a6— 2a) = aa66— 4aa6+4aa (a6+2a) (a6— 2a) = aabb^-^aa The following are examples for the student : Square* ofladl-) = aadi2 H \ a/ aa (a -\ — ) [a 1 =: flfl a/ \ a/ aa Square of (2ax ^h 6) = 4aaxx it 4abx + bb (2ax + b) {2ax — b) ^ 4aaxx ^- bb Square of (a + b -\- c) = (a + b) {a -\- b) + 2{a + b)c -^ c c =s aa + bb ■}- cc + 2ab -f 2bc + 2ca (a + 6 + c) (a + 6 — c) = (a + b) {a -h b) -- cc = aa + 66 — cc '\- 2ab (c + a — 6) (6 + c — a) = (c + a — 6) (c — a — 6) * By + occurring several times in an equation, two equations are combined in one. The upper or under sign is to be taken throughout. Thus, aih6=<^HF<J is either a4-6:=c — d or a — 6s=sc4-rf The student U recommended never to use this double sign himself ; but as it frequendj occurs in books it is here shewn. k INTRODUCTION. XXXI = cc^^(a-^b) (a— 6) == 2ab'{'CC — aa-^bb ^ 2ab — (aa-^-bb — cc) From the last two examples, shew that the product of the four quantities a+A + c, a + 6— c, h-^-c^Oy c+a^b^ is 2aabb + 2bbcc-}-2ccaa^aaaa^bhbb^cccc Shew the preceding by help of the following (which shew also), Squareof (p+y— r) := pp'\-qq-jrrr + 2pq--2qr'^2rp The following are miscellaneous examples in multiplication, to be done without paper : (a + bx) {a'\-cx) = aa + abx + acx-^-bcxx (or+a) (a? + 6) = xx-^ax-k-bx + ab (x— a) (a:— 6) = xx^ax-^bx + ab (x + l) (a?— 3) = a;a?-2a?-3 (a:— 1) (a;— 3) = ara?— 4a: + 3 (2a:+l)(a'— 1) = 2a;a;— a:— 1 The following theorems are given for exercise : 1 . If a and 6 be two quantities, of which a is the greater, and if S be the square of their sum, D the square of their difference, and P the product of their sum and difference, then 8 + = 2(aa + bb) S - D = 4ab S + P = 2a{a-{-b) S-P= 2b{a + b) D + P = 2a{a-b) P-Ii= 2b{a-b) 2. If two numbers differ by a unit, the difference of their squares is their sum; and if two fractions are together equal to a unit (such as -- and - j their difference is also that of their squares. 3. The sum of the squares of xx — yy and 2xy is the square of xs-^-yy. [According to the rule, the square of a — b is the same as the square of 6 — a; for that of the first is ma — 2ab-Ybby and that of the second bb-^^ab-^-aa, which two are the same (see page xi). r XXXll INTRODUCTION. But one of the two, a — b or 6— a, must be impossible^ except only when 6 = a, in which case, both are nothing ; for in every other case either a — b or b — a is an attempt to subtract the greater from the less. But for the same reason, one of the two, b — a or a — 6, must be possible; therefore aa-\-bb — 2a 6, which is the square of that possible one, must also be possible. That is, if either of the two, a or bf exceed the other, aa-\-bb must be greater than 2ab. And we also see that t^ does not follow that an algebraical process is intel- ligible because it gives an intell gible result ; for it appears that the algebraical rule of multiplication would apply to (3 — 7) (3 — 7), which is absurd, and give the same result as (7 — 3) (7 — 3), or 16. This is a defect, the remedy for which we shall afterwards have to find ; and we see, that so far as we have yet gone, we can never know that any process is correct which is to lead to the value of an unknown quantity, until we re-examine the process after the unknown quantity has been found by it.] Divisions in algebra we shall for the present divide into two classes ; those which it is obvious how to do, and those which it is not obvious how to do. For instance, to divide ab by a, that is, to tell how many times a b contains a, the answer evidently is, that since ab means the same as 6a, or a taken b times, therefore ab must contain a, b times; or a 6 divided by a is b. In this case the simplest rule is as follows : To divide, where there has already been a multi' plication by the quantity which is made a divisor, suppress all the symbols of the multiplication. This will be seen in the following examples : Dividend. Divisor. Quotient. Dividend. Divisor. Quotient ab 4 a b \2aax 6aax 2 abc ab c 2ibyz Iby lOz • 2abx 2x ab aaaa aaa a aabbx ab abx aaaa aa aa Qabcc 3abc 2c xyz xyz 1 [One of the most common errors of a beginner is a mistake between and 1, arising from a confusion of subtraction and division. This is partly a result of the idiom of our language, as follows. If a begiaaer be asked how many times does 7 contain 7, the answer is IKTROOUCTIOK. XXXIU sure to be, no timet at alii and in one sense this is oorrecty for 7 does not contain 7 a number of timet, but one time. But it roust always be understood in algebra that tiroes means time, or tiroes, or parts of a time, or time and parts of a time, or times and parts of a time.* Therefore, though X diminithed by x leaves nothings X divided by x givet one,} Closely connected with the preceding is the theorem in fractions ma ma that T and — - are the same. For -y multiplied by m gives -7-, and o mb " ^ this divided by m gives — r. But multiplication, followed by division (multiplier and divisor being the same), leaves any quantity the same as at first From the rule of multiplication it follows, that if any quantity contain the same letter or letters in every term, it is the obvious result of multiplying another expression by that letter or the product of those letters. Thus, ab'\-ae is 6 + c multiplied by a, aab — abc is a — c multiplied by ab. Hence, to divide an expression by a letter or a product of letters, strike out those letters from every term of the dividend. But remember to write 1 where all the letters of any term are thus struck out. For instance, a-^-ab divided by a gives 1+6, ac-^aac ^ ace divided by ac gives 1— a + c. The following are instances, arranged as before: Dividend. Divisor. Quotient. 2ai-26c+4a6c 26 a — c + 2ac aaa--'aa-\-a a aa^a + 1 6a6 — 3a + 36 3 2a6 — a + 6 aab'-abb ab a —6 axxy^xxxyy xxy a^xy * An act of parliament, or any- other legal instrument, always speaks of men under the title **man or men,*' &c. If this should happen to be neglected, and a single offender should plead that "men" only were prohibited from doing as he (one man) had done, it would be called a ** quibble." If the student, after this warning, should ever say that * contains x no timet, it would not only be a quibble, but a very useless quibble, because nothing is to be got by it. XXXIV INTRODUCTION. In dividing a & by a we might proceed as follows. The result of the process is the fraction — , which is not changed in value if both numerator and denominator be divided by a. But this gives -, which is h. Such a process is of no use in the preceding case ; but suppose that a 6 is to be divided by ac. The complete division is here impossible until we know what numbers a, h, and c, stand for. But — , the symbol of the result, may be reduced to - by the preceding theorem. The division here is not completed, but reduced to a more simple division. 26 ^_ 6 aah ^_ ab Zammn mn 2c c ax X 6aam 2a p 1 Sab 3 21vww 3vw pq q aab a 2^xw Ax The division of an expression of several terms by another of one term may also admit of reductions. For example, xy-^yz — zx divided by xyy is ly^ ^ UL ^ 1!L or 1 + — _± xyy xyy xyy y xy yy 2v — xx-\'Vx 2 * I 1 vx X V a + b-^c _. i. . J_ . JL abc be ac ab = - H = a -\ — aa a aa a a x+45/ — 3g + 2 ^ I Hy £. J- i All that precedes contains the obvious cases of division ; of those, the answer to which requires further process, the following is an instance: "How often is x +y contained in xxx ■\-yyyV* As we shall not need such a process for some time, we defer it to its proper place. In some cases, however, the preceding theorems of multi- plication (page xxix) furnish an answer at once. For instance, we know that xx'^9 must contain J^ + 3, x -^ 3 times. INTRODUCTION. XXXV Fractions may frequently be reduced to simpler terms by in- spiection, of which the following are instances : a -{- ab 1+6 Sx-f 6 jj __ 1 -f 2 j: a — ab 1 — b 9xy — 3x 3y — 1 a — aa 1 — a flfl-+-3fl6 + 36 2a+fli 2 + ar fl6 + 12a "" 6 + 12 It is frequently necessary to arrange expressions in a different form, without altering their value, by performing inverse operations upon them with the same data^ such as addition followed by sub- traction, or multiplication followed by division. The four following methods of writing x exhibit this process. or+a— a ar— a + a -- -xa a } a Thus a+x = 2a+a;— a = (l + -ja aa+2ab—c = aa + 2a6 + 66— (c + 66) = (a + 6) (a + 6)— (c + ft6) m+w = mn(- -\ ) = w(~ + 1) = ?w(l + — ) \n m/ \n / \ m/ 1 1+ar 1+jr ,_ ^ = -T = 1 = 1 (See page v.) -,0+^) 7 + 1 X The following are instances of those reductions of fractions which will occur hereafter. The rules with regard to fractions which are proved in arithmetic are here applied in conjunction with the algebraical methods of addition, &c. At the head of each section stands an example without any complicated expressions, containing the arithmetical process used in those which succeed. I. a ma b mb 1+j (l + \)^^ xx-\-x r+J "" 7r+J-)^a. ~ ^^ + 1 * XX \ ' xx/ S XXXVl INTRODUCTION. _ y(3^— 1) _ yy—y £ _. j^j'+ax " y — 1 y — 1 a ax-\-aa \ a—b a+& 4 a-^b aa — bb fla + 2a6-f-66 4a+46 X — 4 2j' — 8 4j:— 16 2ax — 8a 2i 5 "" 10 "~ 5o 7j— 4 _ ^(7 J— 4) _ 3^J — 2 10 "" Kio) ~ 5 5 + -^ ^Ka+Ift) _ 6 + 1 h^a-\-\ a6(6— fl+l) a^fc— aaft + a _, . X ay-^x X ay — x x jr — av y y y y y y . 1 X — 1 1 XX — 1 XX XX _y^^ ^ 2j^ + 2-(3/-l) ^ 5^ + 3 j^'+i 5^ + 1 y + 1 aa a6 ab __ aa ^ a4-6 a + 6 a + 6 a + 6 aa — 2a6 4a6 + bb a + b a + ft ■ aH-6 aa — 2a6 2aa-+-fc6 a-{-b a-j-^ •5lzi± -4- 7/ -4-1 -= • y^-y-y = 7/-2lZ- 5/— 1 -^ y— 1 ^5^— 1 a + 6 — c Q 6 — a-|-c x x — xy a — c a — c y y ab-^bc-^-ca ^^ ab — cc a + 6 +c a + 6 + c a J- ^^ ay + 6jr a x ay — b x by '~' by by by a^h a—b _ (a~\-b){a+b) — (a—b)(a — b) _ 4a6 a — b a-{-b (a — 6)(o + 6) aa — bb 1 J- 1 — : ^'^^ - -4- ^ = ''JL^yy. X y xy y X xy a-^-b a cb — ad a — b a ad — be c-{-d c cc-^ cd c — d c cc — c d INTRODUCTION. xxxvu ^x y _ xx^2xy-~yy f 9 PP ?p + 77 x+y ^—y XX ^yy PP9 IV. ^ X i^ = ^ b y by a , X ay b'^ y^ bx j:— 1 jrH-2 X — ■ — = (' (' -l)(-r + 2) _ X4-2 + l)(jr-l) j + 1 2ab a — b 6aab a -\-b ' 3o ^ aa'-'bb 3ax yv X = yy 2jr 3av 2y m 2m 3b an ' Zbn 2a P^ ^ 3^9 — ^P9 q cce ce The student is recommended to make himself well acquainted with every example given in the preceding list, but no more (see the Preface); as a better method of obtaining examples will be given. All that has preceded is purely arithmetical, and the letters may be considered as mere abbreviations of numbers, and all identical equations as abbreviations of arithmetical propositions. Thus, {a + b)(a + b) = aa+2ab'\'bb represents the following sentence : — If two numbers be added together, and if the sum be multiplied by itself, the result is the same as would arise from multiplying each number by itself, and adding to the sum of these products twice the product of the numbers. An arithmetical problem is one in which numbers are given, and certain operations; and the question asked is, what number will result from performing the given operations upon the given numbers. For instance, what is the fiftieth part of the product of 25 and 300. An algebraical problem is one in which numbers are either given or supposed to be given (as will presently be further explained), and a question is asked of which it is not at once perceptible what operations will ^furnish the answer. Such is the following: — The numbers 3 and 17 are given; what number is that, the double of which will fall short of 17 by as much as its half exceeds 3? And the questions asked are the following. 1. Is there any such number? 2. If there be, by what operations on 3 and 17 may it be found ? 3. What is the result of these operations, or the number required. The answers to which (as the student may afterwards find) will be / XXXVm INTRODUCTION. that there is such a number, that it is found by taking two-fifths of the sum of 3 and 17, and that in consequence the number is 8. If we had contented ourselves with the first two questions, it would have been unnecessary to have specified that the numbers in question were 3 and 17, for the same problem might have been proposed about any other numbers, and the process of solution would (as may afterwards be shewn) have been the same whatever the numbers might have been. That is, if the following question had been asked ; — The numbers a and b are given ; what number is that, the double of which will fall short of b (the greater), as much as its 2 half exceeds a (the less) ? The answer is - (a -j- f^) and the veri- o fication is as follows : 2.4 44 The double of- (a + o) is - (a + 6), or - a + - b. o o o o Tin's falls short of & by 6 — (-a + -b] or b a b \o 5 / 5 5 14 2 1 or T&— -zu; but the half of -(a + &) is-(a + b) which exceeds a by - (« + fc) — fl> or r o + - b — a, or ~b a, 5 5 5 5 5 2 the same as that by which the double of - (a -f- b) falls short of 6. o Which was to be done. Now, observe that the preceding not only informs us of the general process by which this problem may be solved, but it also shews in what cases the problem is impossible. 1 4 For the excess or defect above-mentioned turns out to be - 6 a, 5 5 which is an absurdity, unless -r ^ be greater than (or at least not less o 4 than) -a; that is, unless 6 be greater than 4a. This was the case o in tlie first instance where b was 17 and a was 3. If it be not so, we may pronounce that the problem is impossible ; for instance, let the student try to find a number or fraction, the double of which shall fall short of 11 by as much as its half exceeds 3. In this problem there must be a contradiction ; and when we know there is one, and set ourselves to find out how it arises, we see it in the following: — The number sought is presumed to have a half which exceeds 3 (so that it must be more than 6) and a double which falls INTRODUCTIOK. XXXIX short of 11 (so that it must be less than 5^). But a number which exceeds 6 cannot be less than 5^ ; therefore the clauses of the pre- ceding problem contradict each other. We see, then, that we may propose a problem which is impossible or contradictory, or has no solution. But, on the other hand, we may propose a problem which admits of an innumerable number of answers. These we will call unlimited problems. And, as in the case of impossible problems, there are some of which the impossibility is evident, as ** To find a whole number which shall be the half of seven i" and others, in which it requires investigation to discover the impossibility, as ^* To divide 10 into two parts, whole or fractional, of which the product shall be 30 ;*' so in the case of unlimited problems, there are those in which the unlimited nature of the result shall be evident, and others in which it shall not be so. For instance, to the question, *' To find two odd numbers which added together shall make an even number?'' it is clear that the answer is, "Ant/ two odd numbers ;** and to the question, '< What two numbers are those of which half the sum added to half the difference shall give the greater number ? " the answer is (but not so evidently), " Any two numbers.'' Between these two extremes, we can conceive there may be problems which admit of 1000 answers, others of 999 answers, &c. &c. down to problems which admit only of one answer. And even when we find tliat a problem is impossible, we may yet think proper to ask, whj/ is it impossible ? what are the two parts of the problem which contradict each other, and by how much ? that is to say, what sort of change, and quantity of change, in the conditions of the problem, will render it possible ? To all these questions, arithmetic gives no means of answering, and we have therefore to consider algebra as a distinct science, which proposes objects of which arithmetic knows nothing, and therefore as we may suppose, uses language, finds methods, and adopts inter- pretations, of which arithmetic furnishes no examples. If the student have read* a little of geometry (a science which he * In England, the geometry studied is that of Euclid, and I hope it never will be any ether ; were it only for this reason, that so much has been written on Euclid, and all the difficulties of geometry have so uni- formly been considered with reference to the form in which they appear in Euclid, that Euclid is a better key to a great quantity of useful reading than any other. Xl INTRODUCTION. should begin to study at the same time as algebra, if uot before), f knows that all the questions of geometry are made for him, that i^ the reasonings, &c. are put together before his eyes, and all he has t« do is to comprehend and agree to one step of the process after anotbear This is called synthesis {fvfit^ttt a putting together), or the synthetical method, in opposition to analysis (AvaXv^it, an unloosing, or bringing^ asunder), or the analytical method. The latter consists in taking the problem to pieces, if the phrase may be used, that is, reasoning upon the whole problem, reducing it to more and more simple terms, and so coming at last to those considerations which must be put together to make a solution and to verify it. We now proceed to establish the principles of algebra analytically; and instead of laying down new names or new principles, and putting the science together, we begin from arithmetic, such as we know it, and leave all additional considerations till the want of them is felt. We shall thus see one new result spring up after another, until we find the necessity of speaking a new language, and giving interpreta- tions to symbols which we did not at first contemplate. How this is done, and what it leads to, we cannot otherwise explain than by di- recting the student to proceed to the first chapter. ELEMENTS OF ALGEBRA. CHAPTER I. EQUATIONS OF THE FIRST DEGREE. We now proceed to the solution of equations of the fir$t degree,* This term must be explained. To find the degree of a term generally, count the letters in it. Thus, a 6c is of the third degree; aahc is of the fourth; for though there are only three letters, yet one of tbera occurs twice. The fol- lowing are examples: Of the first degree, a, 6, c, x, z, p, &c. Of the second degree, aa, bby ex, hcy pz, &c. Of the third degree, aaa, aah, abb, abc, pac, &c. and so on. To find the degree of a term with respect to any letters, count those letters only. Thus Saaxxy, of the fifth degree, is of the third degree with respect to x and ^, of the fourth degree with respect to a and x, of the second degree with respect to x only, of the first degree with respect to y only, and so on. A term which does not contain x at all, is of tio degree with respect to x, or is independent of j:« The degree of an equation with respect to any letter, is the degree of the highest term with respect to that letter. Thus the equation XX ~ zxxx 's=^ yz — yyx is of the third degree with respect to x, of the second with respect to y, and of the first with respect to z, * Commonly called tim'ple equations. B 2 EQUATIONS OF THE The solution of an equation of condition is the following problem : — Given an equation of condition, containing a letter the value of which is unknown ; what is that number for which the unknown letter must stand, in order that the equation may be true ? Are there more such numbers than one ? if so, how many, and what are they ? Or is there no such number^ that is, is the equation impossible ? and if so, how is that to be ascertained? The scope of this will be better seen by some instances, which the pupil may verify. The equation 2a:- 1 = 6a:- 19 is true then, and then only, when x is 6. The equation 2a:— 1 = 6a; + 12 cannot be true, whatever x may stand for. The equation 16a; s= 48 + ara: is true when x is 4, and is also true when x is 12 ; but never in any other case. The equation 12a: = 48 + a:a: is never true for any value of x. The equation XXX + 11a; = 6a:a: -f- 6 is true when a: is 1, when x is 2, and when x is 3 ; and in no other case. As an example of verification, let us try the latter equation when jf = 4. Then XXX = 64 6a;a; = 96 ll:r = 44 Qxx + 6 = 102 XXX + lia: = 108 But 108 is not = 102; therefore xxx + llx is not = 6a:j7 -f 6, or j: = 4 does not satisfy the equation. We shall now use the following evident truths : 1. If equal numbers be added to equal numbers, the sums are equal numbers. That is, if a = 6 and c = </, then a -{- c ^ h '\- d. If arszb — c and j: = jj — q, then a -\- x = (b — c) + (jd — y) = 6 -fp — c — q. If a := cT — y, and 6 s^ x + y, then a -f ^ = (•*" — !/) FIRST DBGRBB. 3 + (*+y) = *— y + '+y = 2j:. If a = 5 4- c, then a + v = 2. If equal numbers be taken from equal numbers, the remainders are equal numbers. That is, if a = 5 and c = d, then a — c^b — d. If a ^p — g and b =ip — 2^, then a — b =s (;> — q) — (jf — 2^) =s p^q^p^2q = y. If a =s jar+y, tlien a— w = z-^y^m, 3. If equal numbers be multiplied by equal numbers, the products are equal numbers. That is, if a = 6 and c =i dy ac ss bd. If a ss 6 + c, and z ^=n, then ajet =s n{b-\'c) = nb-^nc. If J = / — v, 2d= 2/— 2t;. 2 3 Then 2|+2|=: 2 or 0:+^ = 2 3a? + 3y = 6 or 3a;H-2a: = 6 4. If equal numbers be divided by equal numbers, the quotients are equal numbers. That is, if a ^ 6 and c = (/, then - = ->• If c ct iR = n, then — =-. If a = b — c and p4-g = x, then — -— ^ . If 7x = 14, then -—=---, or x = 2. z T T The following abbreviations will be used, on account of the con- tinual occurrence of the phrases : (+)a means, add a to both of the last-mentioned equal quantities, which gives .... ( — ^a .... subtract a from both of the last-mentioned equal quantities, which gives .... (x)a .... multiply both the last -mentioned equal quantities by a, which gives .... (-i-)a .... divide both the last-mentioned equal quantities by a, which gives .... (-f-) ( — ) (x) and (-2-) by themselves I use to denote that the itoo last-mentioned sets of equal quantities are to be added. The following will explain the use of these abbreviations : 1. a = 6~c 6— 6 = j + a: (+)c a + c = b (+)6 a = g+^ + 6 d EQUATIONS OF TDE 2. c— rf = /— m 2jr^3 =: 9 {+)dT^ c + m=zl+d ( + )3 2a; a: 12 3. p + q = a— 6 11j:+18 = 100 («)y ^ = a-6-y (-)18 lla; = 82 4. p + y— ^ = 3a+4 (— )y— * P = 3a+4— gr-H^r X X 27 7x 5jr 3 2 3"*'T "■ "6'"T2"*'4 , v,rt 12j 12j . 324 84x 60x , 36 (^)i2 -2 — r+— = -r--TT+T or 6a?— 4a: + 81 = 14a:— 6a: + 9 6. aa? = 6 (aH-6)a: = c 7. a— fc+2c— 3c? = x^a + b 64-3c— 2rf = 4a?-a— 26 ( + ) a-}-6c— 6c? = 6x— 2a— 6 8. 2ax = b^z a = 64-2r We shall now proceed to the solution of equations of the first degree, containing one unknown quantity, by means of the principles in pages 2 and 3, and the preceding operations. 1. What value of x will satisfy the equation 3a;— 7 = a; + 19 ( + )7 3a; = a; + 26 (-)ar 2a; = 26 (-f-)2 a: = 13 Verification. If a: = 13, 3a:— 7 = 32 a: + 19 = 32 2. 3a:+16 = 10a:+9 (-)3a: 16 = 7a:+9 (-)9 7 = 7a; (-r)7 1 = X FIRST DEGBEE. O Verification. If X = 1, 3x+l6 = 19 10a:+ 9 = 19 3. 20x— 13 = 102j-ar (+)13 20a; = 116J-a; i+)x 2U = 116J = HI V (-r)21 ^ = 23Sr ^^-"'-^ - ?ii-S* - w-°^ Verification. It x = 6J, 20ar— 13 = 97 102j-a; = 97 a: + ^ = 2-^ 3 2 2x+y = 4-x 6x+4x = 12-3jr 6a;+4a:+3j? = 12 13j; = 12 (^)13 x = l| Venjicatwn. If ^ = -,-+- or gO; is - of ~, or -. And 1 — T is 1 — (-: o^ TTih or 1 — r;:> which is also --. 4 \4 13/ 13 13 The same equation might be more easily solved by multiplying both sides by any common multiple of 2, 3, and 4. The least com- mon multiple is the most advantageous ; why, will appear on trying a higher one, as follows : 2 + 3= ^~4 36 is a common multiple of 2, 3, and 4. (x)36 -2- + — = 36-— or 18a; + 12a: = 36-9j; (+)9a; 18a; + 12ar+9a; = 36 b2 (x)2 (x)2 (x)3 (+)3a; that is 6 BQUATIOVS OF THB that is 39 X = 36 ( -f" ) 39 X = — , which, reduced to its lowest 39 12 13 terms, is s Now try 12, the least common multiple of 2, 3, and 4. JF * t St 2+3=1-4 (x)12 lli+!|f = 12-lii or 6x + 4x = 12— 3x Proceed as in the last case but one ; and no reduction of the result to lower terms is necessary. 5. ab-^-a-^b = 1 This equation differs from the preceding in' having two unknown quantities. The real answer is, that there is an infinite number of values of a and 6, which will satisfy this equation. If we choose a value of bf we can find the value of a, which, with the chosen value of bf will satisfy the equation. For instance, I ask, can 6 be ^ 12? Substitute 12 for 6 in the above equation, which then becomes 12a+a-12= 1 or 13a- 12= 1 ( + )12 13a =13 (-T-)13 a = 1 The answer is, b may be 12 provided a be 1. In this case^ ab = 12, and 12 + 1 — 12 = 1. Without making 3ny particular assumption about the value of b, let us suppose it given ; in what way must we combine this known b on the first side with the known unit on the second side, so as to point out the manner of finding a so soon as a particular value shall have been assigned to 6 ? Resume the equation : a6-i-a— 6 = 1 ( + )6 ab + a = 1+6 But ab-\-a is a taken one more than 6 times; that is^ a& + a = (1+6) a. FIRST DEGREE. 7 Therefore (iH-fc)a = 1+6 (H-)i+6 a = :f^^=l The answer, then, is the following : 6 may be what we please, provided a be 1. Verification. If a = 1, ab-i-a—b = 6 + 1 — 6 =s 1. We have given this instance to shew how soon the operations of algebra lead to unexpected results. We will now take another instance. 6. xy = ar+y + l Knowing the value of y, to find that of x, ( — )a: xy—x^y + l but xy — j: is j: taken once less than y times, or (y — 1) x. Therefore (y-l)a:=y + l Particular case* Let y ^ 5, then ^ "■ 5 — 1 "■ 4 ■" 2 3 15 Verification, xy =s - x 6 = — General Verification, x := 4lII1_ xv =• ^^ ^ / __ 5/ + i+3/i^— y+y— 1 y-1 _ yy+3^ _ y(y+i) >— 1 y— 1 7. Two labourers can separately mow a field in 4 days and 7 days. They begin to work, and on the second day are joined by a third^ who alone could mow the field in 10 days. The third remains 8 BQUATIONS OF THB with the former two for a certain time, aAer which he leaves them; and it is then found that exactly four-fifths of the field have been mowed. IIow many days is this altogether? [This question is introduced to shew how very soon algebraical symbols may be made to simplify complicated arithmetical reasoning.] The fractions of the field which the first and second could mow in a day are - and -. Let x be the whole number of days ; or, that number being unknown, let x staAd for it until it is known. Then the first man, who does one-fourth in one day, two-fourths in two days, &c., will in x days do j:-fourths, or the fraction - of the field. X In the same time the second does - ; but the third, who works one 7 day less, at the rate of one-tenth a day, does — — . Therefore, all that is done of the field is Jf , X , X — 1 4"^7'* To" 4 Biit by the question this is -, which gives X , X , X — t 4 4 "^7"^ lo" "" 5 The least common multiple of 4, 7, 10, and 5, is 140 (Ar. 103). (x)140 !12a:+li2,+^(,_l) = 12O10 or 36a; + 20a; + 14(a:-l) = 112 or 36a;+20a: + 14a;-14 = 112 [because 14(x— 1) = 14x— 14] therefore 69j:— 14 =112 (+)14 69 a: =126 126 42 ,19 Verification, (^)69 a;=lH£ = lH=ii2 ^ ^ C9 23 23 In 1 day and -- of a day, there is mowed by the first 1 and -- Z6 4 23 19 ot a day, there is mowed bv the first ~ and 23 ^^ 4' ^' 23 ^^ 4' ®' 46 ^^ ^^® ^^^^ ' ^^® second mows || of - or 6 12 — , that is -t; and the third, who works one day less than the others, FIRST DEGREE. 9 19 19 1 19 or only — of a day, does in that time — r of -— , or --- , that is ^ 23 ^ 23 10' 230 38 —- of the field. But 460 21 . 12 . 38 368 4 46+46 + 460 = 460 =5'^ '^^"*'"^- x~r^ ^ — 4 Q * + l 8. — — — — ■ -, ^ O— ■ ^ — 2\ 6\ 5 A common multiple of 2^ and 6} (not the least, which is 95, and with which the student should also solve the equation) is 570, which contains the first 228, and the second 90 times. It is also a multiple of 5. ( X )570 ^(a:-3) - '^(x-4) = 1710-^°(ar+ 1) or 228(a;-3)-90(a:-4) = 1710-114(a;+l) But 228(x— 3) = 228x— 684, &c. Therefore (228a;-684)-(90ar-360) = 1710-(114a;+114) or 228a;-684-90x+360 = 1710-114x-n4 ( + ) 684 + 1 14X-360 228a;-90ar+114a: = 1710-114+684-360 or 262* =. 1920 (-r)12 21* = 160 (-H)21 160 ^=^ 21 = 7I3 21 Verification, If 97 X = • 97 160 21 X — 3 21 76 21 5 2 194 194 105 5X21 X — 6j 4 _ 21 "■ 19 3 228 399 228 19X21 X — 3 X — - 1 194 5X21 228 19X21 2546 ^ 134 2i 6J 5X19X21 5X21 181 .• a:+l __ 5 - 21 __ 5 181 5X21 { 1 10 EQUATIONS OF THE o— — ; — = - — -Tt the same as before. 5 5X21' From these cases we may lay down the following rules for the solution of equations of the first degree. 1 . To clear an equation of fractions, mtdtiply both iides by a$^ common multiple of all the denominaton : generally ^ the least common multiple is the most convenient. The following are some useful applications of this principle : fl __ C , \ 1. _J abd Cbd m m J- 5 (x)Jrf -J- = -5-, or arf = Jc From the preceding equation the student is left to deduce the following : cb i ad ^ ad J be d c b a ^— A ^— _1 1— A ^— A a cb b ad c ad d'^ be From the first of the following equations let the student deduce all the rest. ah ^^ cd cdxy ahpq A ^^ cdx *y ^ pq ~~ pqb " cdy y "~ pqb ab dxy « , b ex — = — i abpq = xycd -j- = c pq ^^ ^ dy apq 2. Any term of an equation may be removed from one side to the other if its sign be changed. If this have not already occurred to the student from the preceding examples, it may be established by the following : Let a + J = c + rf— e (— )i a = c+rf— e— i ( + )e a + e = c + d— ft In applying the rule for clearing an equation of fractions, care must be taken, when the denominator is removed, to remember that the sign which was placed before the complete fraction now belongs to the complete numerator, which should, therefore, be placed in brackets, or the proper rule for addition or subtraction applied at once. The following example will shew what is meant. X — a c-\-x J J?— c b ab a (x)ab aia;-f-a(a;— a)— (c + x) = abd—b{X'^e) or aiar+(«x— aa)— (c+a;) = abd^ibx-^be) or aiar + aar— aa— c— a: = aJrf— iar + Jc FIRST DEGREE. 11 The mistake to which the beginner is liable is, to write — c -j- x and — bx — fee, instead of — c — x and — 6 jr + 6 e. By the second of the preceding rules, ahx + aa; -f- ia; — ar = ahd + aa -{• c -{-be or {ab-^-a -f-i — l)a; = abd-^aa + c + be / V — T -. abd-^aa-j-c-^-be ,iv i-h) ab + a + b-l X= .t^^Jtll (1) ao+a +0 — 1 abd'\-aa-\-c -^-be — a(ab •\'a-\'b — 1) "" ab+a + b — l abd-^ aa •}- c + be — aab — gg — afr-j-o "" ab + a + b-^1 __ abd + a — ab — gg^-f-c + ^c ab -{• a + b — 1 JT— g abd-^a — ab — aab -{- c •{• be .qv "T" 6(g6 + g + 6 — 1) ^^ And by similar processes, c+jr abc-^ac + bc + abd -\- aa'\- be ,n\ "ab ab{ab + a'\'b'^l) ^^ X — e abd -\- aa -{-c — abe — ae •}- e .j^. ~ g(g6H-g4-fc — 1) ^^ Reduce (1) (2) (3) and (4) to a common denominator, which can be done by multiplying the numerator and denominator of (1) byg6, of (2) by g, and of (4) by 6. Then form ^ + '-T^-Tr' "' (l)+(2)-(3) which will be found to be gg66<^ + gg6rf-i- abbe -{- abe — ggfe — abd — be — be ab{ab + a-\-b—l) aabd -\- aad-\-abe + ge — gg — ad — c^^e a(flfc+a + 6 — 1) the latter of which arises from dividing the numerator and denomi- nator of the former by 6. By similar processes, e?-^ or e?-(4) will be found to have the same value as (1) + (2) — (3). The student should not pass the preceding solution until he is able to repeat the whole on paper without the assistance of the book. ( / 12 BQUATIONS OF THB In the preceding equation, let c and e be each equal to nothing, which reduces the equation to ub a the value of x to . ahd-^aa /and the value of each side of the equation, as just found, to aahd-^- aad-^aa-^ad fl(a6 + fl + 6 — 1) or — j-^^ — — r — 7— (dividing numerator and denominator by a.) afr + a + o— 1 ^ o -f ' These the student should find for himself from the equation. We now look into particular problems to see what explanations may be necessary. Various unforeseen cases will present themselves ; and each case will he explained, and a problem will be given for each, to shew how it may arise. Anomaly 1. Let a = 2 i^3 C?^^ o The equation then becomes jr— 2 X 1 X ^■^"1 6 "" 6 "" 2 Then X = ?2L3_2^J±2.>12 = ± = 1 2x3-1-2-1-3—1 10 2 On attempting to verify the equation, we see that a contradiction appears ; for x is -, and the operation x — 2, which is therefore im- possible, appears in the second term. It seems, then, that an equa- tion may give a rational tolution ; and on attempting to verify the equation by this solutionf the latter may be found to be impossible. The question now is, can such an equation arise from a problem ? if so, is it the problem itself which is absurd, or the way of treating it ? If the latter, how is the method of solution to be set right ? Problem in illustration. A enters into this bargain with B, that he is to take B's property and pay his debts, taking his chance of gain or loss. On examination, it is found that B's property is (debts allowed for) exactly the same as that of A, with this excep- tion only, that B is in partnership with another, and he and his partner have made a similar bargain with C. On examining C's afiairs, he is found to be insolvent by £100. The result of the whole FIRST DSGREB. 13 is, that this transaction falb short by £75 of making A's property twice as great as it was. What was A's property? Let X stand for A's original property, whicli is, therefore, that of B and Co., independent of their share in the engagement with C. From the concluding paragraph we might presume that A is benefited by the transaction, namely, that the £j: of B and his partner is more than sufficient to cover the loss arising out of their engagement with C. Let this be so; then x — 100 pounds remains for B and his partner, of which B's share, namely, i (jt— 100) is by the bargain transferred to A, who has, therefore, . JT— 100 X 4-' This doubles his property all but £75^ and is, therefore, the same thing as 2x — 75. Therefore, x + '^^ix-lb (x)2 2a; + a;- 100 = 4a; --150 4a; — 2a; — a; = 150-100 a; = 50 This introduces into the equation the anomaly we are now con* sidering, for is impossible. It also contradicts the suppo- sition on which it was obtained, namely, that x is greater than 100. We cannot, therefore, depend upon this solution. Suppose we try the other supposition, namely, that x is not greater than 100. In that case, B and. his partner have to pay £lOO, of which they can only make good £x\ of the remainder, or 100 — j*, A must, by the bargain, make good B's part, or \ (100 -~ j:). Thi» he loses by the transaction ; and having x at first, he has now only ^ 100— jr 2 This doubles his property all but £75, or rather we must now change this mode of speaking, which may seem to make one part of the problem disagree with another, and say simply that A's propeity is £75 less than twice what he had before. Hence, (x)2 2a; -(100 -a;) = 4a; - 150 14 EQUATIONS OF THE or 2j:-100 + x = 4x-160 or 2x+ar-100 = 4x-160 wliicli is now the same equation as before, and not absurd in its present form ; for tliough (since it yields x =z 50) s — 100 is absurd, yet ftjT -I- JT — 100 is not so. Hence we see that the effects of the wrong supposition, which made us write or -f | (x — 100), where we should have written x — | (100 — x), disappear in resolving the equation, and leave the same result as we should have obtained by proceeding correctly. The anomaly arises from an error of this sort. If 6 be greater than c, we know that a— (J— c) = a— i-f-c but if we have a — b -{-c, and wish to bracket b and c together, we cannot do this correctly until we know which is the greater. If it be b, the preceding is d — (6 — c) ; but if it be c, this should be fl + (c— J). One or other of the preceding two is absurd, except only when ft ^ c, which makes them a — and a + 0, or a for both. From hence we may see, so far as one instance can shew it, that any mistake which amounts to no more than writing a — (6 — c) instead of a + (c — 6), as the representative of a — 6 -f" c, makes no difference in the final result. We here write, side by side, the solu- tion of two equations, which only differ as above. a— x , X — b , X — a b — x Ja:— (a— a:) = JcH-(a:— 6) Ja; + (a;— a) = 6c— (6— x) bx^a-hx = bc+x—b bx+x—a = 6c— 6-f-a; The remaining part is common to both. bx = bc + a — b be -|-fl — 6 ^ = — — Anomaly (2). Let ax + b = cx + d ax^cx = d—b {a^c)x = d—b d—b X = a — c v FIRST DEGREE. 15 Let it happen that d is less than hy but a greater than c, as in the case There is then an impossible subtraction in the numerator of the result ; and it is sufficiently evident, on other grounds, that the equa- tion is impossible ; for if a be greater than c^ax must be greater than ex ; from which, if b be greater than d^ax '\-b must be greater than ex + df and cannot be equal to it. A similar question may now be proposed to that which arose upon the last anomaly. (See p. 12.) Problem I. in illustra.tion. In the year 1830, A's age was 50 and B's 35. Give the date at vdiich A is twice as old as B. This must either be before or after 1830. Try the second case, and let the required date be 1830 + x. Then A's age will be 60 + a; . . B's 35 + a? and 50 + a; = 2(35+ a:) or 50 + a; = 70 + 2x 2x-'X = 50—70 Here we see an impossible subtraction, and it is also evident that 2 X + 70 must be greater than x + 50. Now, try a date before 1830 ; say 1830 — x. Then A's age was 50 — X . • B's .... oo — X and 50 — 0: = 2(35 — a;) or 50 — a; = 70 — 2a; 2a;-a; = 70-50 or . a: = 20 An evidently true answer; for in the year 1830 — 20, or 1810, A's age was 30 and B*s was 15. Here then we see that an impossible subtraction may arise from assuming a date to be after a certain epoch which is in fact before it, or vice versd. Problem II. A and B have accounts together. The state of their affairs is this : Give A half as much as will make their dealings worth £500 to him, and give B £lOO, and they will then, after settling their account, have equal sums. How does their account stand ? The balance is either in B's favour or in A's. Take the latter, fuid suppose A ought to receive £x. Then 500 -» x will make this tmosaction worth £500 to him, because 16 EQUATIOKS OP THE x + (600 — ar) =b 600 (Sive liim | (500 — jr) and he m\\ hate (when B pajs him) , 500— jr Now R, when he gets the £100, mutt pay £r to A, and will therefore hafe £(100— x). But they haTe then equal siuns; tbereloac^ :c + *2^' = 100-x (x)2 2ar + (500-ar) = 200-2x or 2x4-500— « = 200 — 2 J? 2x-\'2x^x = 200 — 500 or 3x =200 — 500 which is impossible. Try the other case, and suppose the balance to be in B's favour, and that he ought to receive £x. Then, to make A worth £500, his debt to B must be paid, and he must receive £500 besides : that is, he must receive 500 -|- jr. But of this one-half only is given, or ^ (500 + x), out of which, when he pays £j: to B, he will have 500+4f ' —a: 2 Now B gets £l00 and also £x from A, and will therefore have 100 -j- J? pounds. And, since they have then equal sums, ^2^ -a; =100+* ( X )2 500 + x^2x — 200 + 2x 2a; + 2a:— a: = 600 — 200 or 3a; = 300 and j: = 100 Therefore A owes B £l00. Problem III. A traveller proceeds along a road on which, at various intervals, are found direction-posts variously numbered, point- ing north or south. As soon as be reaches No. 1, be proceeds in the direction pointed out by it till he reaches No. 2, and so on. He finds the first direction-post after be has travelled 16 miles north^and he finds also that be changes his direction at every post which he meets after the first ; * that the distance between every two posts is double * The problem does not say whether he changes his direction at the first, or not. FIRST DEGREE. 17 that between the precediDg, and that, at the fiflh post, be is 86 miles north of his first position. What is the arrangement and character of the posts ? After travelling 16 miles north he reaches a post, and we are not told whether he is there directed to go on or turn back. Let us suppose the former, and that he travels x miles further north before he reaches the second post. He will then be 1 6 + ^ miles north of his first position. At the next post he has to turn back, and proceed Itx miles south. Here two cases arise. If 2jr be less than 16+^9 the third post will be north of his first position by 16 + j: — 2x miles; but if 2 x be greater than 16 + ^) the third post will be south of his first position by 2x — (16-f-^) miles. Suppose the first; then between the third and fourth post there are ^x miles, and he has to go north from the third, therefore he will meet the fourth post at 16+j: — 2j: + 4x miles north of his first position. At the fourth post he turns south, and after proceeding Qx miles, meets the fifth post, his position north of his first position being then IC+J? — 2x'\-^x — Qx miles. But this by the problem is 86 miles: consequently 16+a:— 2a; + 4ar-8a: = 86 or 8a;— 4a; + 2x— a; = 16—86 or 6x = 16-86 in which there is an impossible subtraction. Let us now try the other hypothesis, and suppose that at the first direction-post he has to turn south, and that he finds the second after proceeding x miles south, or at 16 — X north of his first position, or j:— 16 south, according as X is less or greater than 16. By the same attention to the expressed conditions of the problem, we find that y J/ Z 16— a:+2x— 4a;+8a; = 86 %x—Ax + 2x^x = 86—16 6a: = 70 a; = 14 Consequently the positions of the posts are as follows : South North ^ (4)C3- <2)(^ 4^(1) ^(3) (5) 26 +2 16 30 86 eg c2 18 EQUATIONS OF THE Under each is marked the number of miles at which it is from his first position. If we collect together and look at the correct and incorrect equa> tions which we ha?e found in the three preceding problems, we shall have the following : Problem I. ' Incorrect, 60-f-ar = 2 (35 + a;) or a; s= 50—70 years after 1830 Correct, 50— a; = 2(35— a;) or a? = 70—60 . . before . . Problem II. 500— X . ,^^ 200—500 , . , ,5 ^ . Incorrect, ' . +a?= 100— a?ora: = r which BowesA Correct, — -^ x = 100-f-a; orx = . . A . . B Problem III. Incorrect, 16 + a: — 2x+4x — 8a? ^ 86 or a: = — ^ — milesnorth o Correct, 16— a: + 2ar— 4x + 8ar = 86 or a: = — z — miles south o From which, as well as from other instances, the following principle is clear: When the value of x, deduced from an equation, contains an im- possible subtraction, both the equation and the meaning of x have been misunderstood, and require alteration. 1. To correct the equation, alter the sign of every term which contains x once only as a factor, [The words in italics are inserted to remind the student that we cannot draw any conclusion from the preceding as to equations which contain such terms as xx, xxx, &c. All our equations have been of the first degree,] 2. To correct the result, invert the terms of the impossible sub- traction (that is, change SO'^TO into 70-— 50), and let the quality of the answer be the direct reverse of that which was supposed when the incorrect equation vras obtained. Thus, change years after into years before ; property into debt; distance measured in one direction into that exactly opposite ; and so op. Or, whatever alternatives it may be possible to choose between in assuming x, provided one be the direct reverse of the other, then, if one alternative produce an impos- sible subtraction in the value of x, the other is the one which should have been chosen. FIRST DE6REB. 19 An equation generally obliges us to take a more extensive view of the question than the words of the problem will bear, and will fre- quently shew that the view taken of the problem is not in every part a consistent whole. In the preceding questions we have taken care to leave every possible case open in the statement of the problem : thus we have said (Problem I.), ^ Give the date at which A is twice as old as B,** not " How long will it be before A is twice as old as B V* because the latter would be tacitly assuming that the event is to come, whereas it would be found out that the event is past, and the implied statement is erroneous. We write underneath the correct and incor- rect mode of enunciating the question. Correct. In the year 1830, A's age was 50 and B*s 35. Give the date at which A is twice as old as B. Answer. 20 years before 1830, or in 1810. Incorrect. In the year 1 830, A's age was 50 and B*s 35. When will A be twice as old as B ? Answer. Never; but A was twice as old as B 20 years ago. The chance of an impossible subtraction occurs in both; but in the first it arises fix>m a question being left open to the student, who may choose the wrong alternative; in the second it arises from a wrong alternative being already tacitly assumed in the problem. The alternatives presented by a problem may generally be ascer- tained with ease ; but if not, the equation itself is frequently a guide. Anomaly 3. Let 3a;— 10 = 2a;— 8 3a;-2a? = 10-8 a; = 2 On verifying this equation we find each side to contain an impossible subtraction, for 3 a: — 10 is 6 — 10, and 2jr— 8 is 4 — 8. After what has been said on the last case, we need not dwell upon this; the problem in the next page will furnish an instance. Somewhat similar to this is a mistake in the process which may introduce an impossible subtraction into both numerator and deno- minator of the answer. If, in solving ax-^b = cx + d, thus, ag^mcx sz if— 6 or jr = -^^, we afterwards find a less than c, and fl— c I 20 EQUATIONS OF THE d less than h, it is a sign that we ought to have chosen the process ex — ax ^h — 4, This is a mistake in the order of operations only, and not in the conception of the problem. Problem. Divide the number 13 into two parts, in such a manner that three times the first may exceed half the second as much as the first exceeds 4. It will be found from the resulting equation, namely, - o 13 — X . 3a; r— = a;— 4 (where x is the first part) that jt := 1, and therefore the parts of 13 required should be 1 and 12. But the problem is then impossible, for three times the first does not exceed lialf the second. But if the words "fell short of'' be substituted for "exceed" throughout the problem, the equation becomes 13 — j: o a the answer to which is j: := 1 as before, and the problem is possible ; for 3j: or 3 falls short of i(13 — dr) or 6, as much as x or 1 fells short of 4, We now ask how it happens than an equation gives a rational result, by which, when it is tried, the equation itself is proved to be irrational; and are we to conclude that no answer to an equation holds good until it has been tried upon the equation, and found to satisfy it rationally ? Let us examine our first instance. The equation is 3a:-10 = 2ar-8 and the answer x ss 2, when applied to the equation, gives 6-10 = 4-8 ^It so happens that the rules for solving an equation give the same answer to both of the following : 3a:— 10 — 2a:-8 10— 3a: = 8-2a: And the following example will shew how this happens : ax—b = cx^d b^ax = d-^cx ax— ex ^ b — d b — d = ax^cx X = m both. fl— c Hence, when an anomaly of the kind treated in this article occurs. FIRST DEGREE. 21 it is the sign of a misconception of the right way of viewing the problem, but of a misconception which no way affects the result. Anomaly 4, If we first solve the equation ax + b = cx-^d which gives X ss , and if it should happen (without our observing it during the process) that a=c or a— c=sO, we shall then find an answer of the following form, * which is unintelligible ; because there can be no answer to the ques- tion, *' How often is nothing contained in d— b?** or, at least, if there be any answer, it is, '' Nothing, however often it may be repeated, yields nothing, and therefore cannot be repeated often enough to yield <^— 6.*' On returning to the equation, we see that the supposi- tion of a ^ c gives ax =zcx, so that, as far as the equation only is concerned, it is always true if ( = d, and never true if b is unequal to d. But in giving further explanation of problems which produce such equations, we shall employ the following principle, the propriety of which is obvious. When any supposition (such for instance as making a^szc in the preceding equation), makes the results of ordinary rules unintelligible, then, instead of making a exactly equal to c, let it be made very nearly equal to c, and observe the result : afterwards suppose it still nearer to c, and so on ; the succession of results will inform us whether any rational interpretation can be put upon the result of supposing a s= c, or not. We shall now try a problem in which the preceding difficulty will be found to occur. Problem. There are three trading companies, of 4000, 5000, and 9000 shares respectively, and all three would, if broken up, pay the same dividend upon their shares ; but if every shareholder in the / second advanced his company £10 on each share^and every share- ^ ' holder of the third advanced £l2 in like manner, then the first two companies together would have the same total assets as the third ; what is the dividend which each company could now pay ? Let X pounds per share be that dividend . Then, after the advances supposed in the problem, the three companies could pay x, x-^-iO, and » + 12 pounds per share respectively; which, taking their number of shares into account, supposes them to be in possession of 4000 j?, 22 EQUATIONS OF THE 5000 (jr -f- 10), and 9000 (x -f- 12) pounds respectively : between which the last clause of the problem gives the equation 4000a; + 6000(a: + 10) = 9000(a: + 12) (-r)lOOO 4a;-|-5(a:+10) =:9(a;+12) or 9a: + 50 = 9a; + 108 In which we recognise the anomaly which is the subject of this article. Nor can we in this case, as in page 18, account for the impossibility by supposing that we have mistaken the problem, and that the three societies are at first insolvent, and are in debt upon each share ; fof , if we make this supposition, and let x be the amount they fail for upon each share, we have already seen (and the student must make himself sure of the same in this particular case) that the resulting equation will be 50-9a; = 108-9ar which is equally impossible with the former. We shall, therefore, now try the consequences of a slight change in the conditions, agree- ably to the preceding principle. For instance, we will suppose the third society to have only 8999 shares, instead of 9000. The equation then becomes 4000ar + 5000(a: + 10) = 8999(a;+12) or 4000ar +5000a; + 50,000 = 8999 x + 107,988 4000a:+5000x-8999a: = 57,988 or X — 57,988 The answer therefore is, that each society could at first pay £57,988 per share. Let us try the effect of a still smaller change, and suppose the third society to want only the hundredth part of a share of 9000 99 shares, that is, to have 8999 — - shares. Then we have 4000ar + 5000(a; + 10) = 8999^^(a?+12) 4000a;+5000:r + 50,000 = 8999^a;+8999^ x 12 4000a;+5000a;-8999:^a;= 8999:^x12-50,000 100 100 _!_,= 2^. 12-50,000 ( X ) 100 X = 899,999 x 12-6,000,000 X = 5,799,988 FIRST DEGREE. 23 or each society can pay £5,799,988 per share. In the same way, if 999 we take the third society at 8999 r^r^ shares, we shall yet have a still greater answer, and so on. A similar result would be obtained by increasing the 4000 or 5000 shares of either of the other societies. Therefore, the answer to the preceding question is, that no number is great enough to satisfy the conditions of the question ; but that if these conditions be slightly altered, an answer may be found, which answer is a greater number the slighter the alteration just alluded to. Dis- missing the problem, which we have only introduced to shew that such anomalies may arise in the application of algebra, we return to the consideration of similar equations. The solution of ax = bx -{• c IS a; = a— 6 in which, should it happen that a ^ (, the answer is unintelligible, c being --, and the equation impossible, being ax ^ ax -f" c but if a exceed h by any quantity, however small, the equation and its answer are both rational. Let a exceed h by the fraction of unity 1 — , then the equation becomes \h + -^x — bx-{'C or ia; H — = ia; + c m (—)bx — =c (x)m X = mc The same might be obtained from the preceding answer, for c c X = r =:i -^ = mc a — b 1 m To make a exceed ( by a small quantity, — must be small, that is, m must be large ; and in this way we may get an equation whose answer shall be as large as we please. For instance, let c be 1 ; and suppose we want an equation of the preceding form whose answer 24 EQUATIONS OF THE aball be 1,000,000. Let m = . Then such equations as the fbllowing hare thjg answer j: = 1,000,000. ^7 A number which does not satisfy an equation may, we can easily conceive, nearh/ satisfy it. But this word nearly is too indefinite for our purpose, as we shall now shew. Suppose we have the equation 7r = 2jr 4- 3, and we try whether j: = 1 will satisfy this equation. It will not; for the first side is 7 (x being 1), and the second side is 5 ; that is, the first side, instead of being equal to the second, is greater by 2. The same result applies, in the same words, to the equation 7j: = 5 j? -|- 19fl8, if we try x = 1000 upon it ; for the first side becomes 7000, and the second 69^8. Shall we then say, jr := 1 satisfies the first as nearly as x *= 1000 does the second? Is 7 as near to 5 as 7000 to 6908 ? If we look at the differences only, we must answer yes ; for 7-5 = 2 7000 - 6998 = 2 but in the common use of the word near* (to which it will be conve- nient to keep) it would be said that 7000 is nearer to 6998 than 7 is to 5. In the first case, the difference is 2 out of 7000 ; in the second it is 2 out of 7. Keeping to this meaning of the term, we shall in future consider ax and ax-^c as nearer to equality when x is greater than when it is smaller. And in this sense we say, that when a problem leads to such an equation as ax ^= ax -{-c the result is, no number is great enough to be an answer to the problem ; but the greater any number, the more nearly is it an answer to the problem. Tried by the common rules (which, in this case, lead us too far) the answer to the preceding equation is c c X = or - a^'a * In the making of a bargain, ^6998 would be considered as the same price, within a trifle, as ^7000 ; but any thing at ^7 would be con- sidered dear as compared with the same at ^5. We might multiply instances in which the same quantity would he considered small under some circumstances, and great under others. FIRST DEGREE. 25 and it is customary to say, that -- means an injinite numbery and that the answer is in/initefy great. Taken literally, such phrases are un- meaning, because we know of no number which is infinitely great, that is, greater than can be counted or measured. But the word is often used; and we shall, therefore, adopt it with the following meaning : By saying that - is infinite when 9 =: 0, we are to be understood as meaning no more than a short way of expressing the following : — 1 1 When g is small, - is great ; if g become still smaller, - is still 9 9 greater, and so on; so that - may be made to exceed any given number, howeyer great, if g be taken sufficiently small. And when we say the answer to a problem is infinite, we mean that no number' is great enough to satisfy the conditions of the question ; but that any great number nearly does so, a still greater still more nearly, and so on ; so that the problem may be answered within any degree of nearness (short of positive exactness) by taking a sufficiently great number. Anomaly 5. The solution of ax -{-b = ex -hd d—b IS j: = a — c Now, if it should happen that, after the solution of this equation, it becomes necessary to suppose a equal to c (as in the last case), and b also equal to d, the answer ^=* must be written ° which has no meaning. On returning to the equation we no longer find any necessity to give x one value rather than another ; for, if a be = c, and b =sd, then ax -{-bis equal to ex -^ d, whatever x may be. Therefore the answer to the question is, that every possible value of ;p satisfies the conditions. 'We shall apply this in the following Pboblem. Is there any number such that a times one less than the number, added to 6 limes two more than the number, is exactly c times the number; a, 6, and c, being given numbers or fractions ? -; V # 26 EQUATIONS OF THE Let X be that number, then fl(ar~l) + J(a;-f2) = ex ax — a-hbx -{'2b = ex ax + bx^cx = a^2b (a + ft — c)x = a — 2ft a — 2b X = —~. a -\- b — c Verification. J^ — 1 = — r-7 — a (a: — 1 ) = — -—. a + 6 — c ^ ^ a-|_^_c a(r - 1) + i(x + 2) = ^^=l*f « £^ifll*l ' a + 6 C fl+6 C a — 26 = C X — r-T = CX a + 6— -c Suppose that o is 8, 6 is 4, and c is 12, or that the problem is the following : — What number is that, one less than which multiplied by 8, added to the product of 2 more and 4, is equal to 12 times the number? Here we find a — 26 =: 0, and a-\-b — c = 0; so that the preceding answer takes the form - : trying this case by itself, to find out the reason, we have the equation, 8{x-])+4{x+2) = 12a: 8a:-8+4a: + 8 = 12a; 12a: = 12a; which being always true, the answer is, that every number and frac- tion whatsoever, which is greater than 1, satisfies the conditions of the problem ; a result corresponding to the interpretation we have already seen reason to put upon the form -. We shall now proceed to the solution of some prpblems, in which the preceding method and principles will be applied. As instances will be taken from difierent parts of natural philosophy, we shall divide them into sections^ and state at the head of each the facts on which the solution depends. Examples. — Section I. Specific gravities, — By the specific gravity of a body is meant the number of times which its weight is iriRST DEGREE. 27 of the weight of an equal bulk of water. Thus, when we say that the specific gravity of brick is 2, we mean that a mass, say a cubic foot of brick, weighs twice as much as a cubic foot of water.* A cubic foot of water weighs about 1000 ounces avoirdupois.f Problem I. One pint of water is added to three pints of milk (specific gravity 1*03) : what is the specific gravity of the mixture .' If a pint of water weigh m ounces, then one pint of milk weighs 1*03 x^ra ounces, and the whole four pints of the mixture weighs wi + (l-03»i)x 3, or iw + 3'09>» ounces. But four pints of water weigh 4m ounces; therefore the specific gravity of the mixture (see the preceding definition) is wi + 3-09m 409 TO 4*09 , r\c\c\r :; or -— — or — -— or 1-0225 4m 4m 4 N.B. Here is an instance of a quantity m introduced for conve- nience, and which disappears in the process. The question itself is too simple to require an equation. Problem II. A number of cubic feet (m) of a substance whose specific gravity is a, is mixed with n cubic feet of another, having tlie specific gravity b. What is the specific gravity of the mixture ? It 19 plain that the w -f-n cubic feet of mixture will be as heavy as ma-^-nb cubic feet of water. Therefore the specific gravity re- . , . ma-hnb quired IS ; . Exercise. Try to shew that ^^ . ^ must lie between a and 6. ' m -fw Problem III. How much of a specific gravity 2 must be mixed with 20 cubic feet of specific gravity 10, in order that the specific gravity of the mixture may be 5 ? Let J" be the number of cubic feet in that quantity. Then the whole 20+^ cubic feet of mixture has the same weight as 20 X 10 4- J" X 2, or 200 -|- 2 J? cubic feet of water. Therefore the . . 200-|-2j: , specific gravity is " , and ?9^±ll = 5 or 200 + 2;r = 5(20+a;) /. x = 33J 20 + x Generalisation of the preceding. How much of a specific gravity • Atmospheric air is often taken as the standard of gases. Water is tbout 800 times as heavy as air. t Easy to recollect, and remarkably near the truth. Let the student dedace it from Ar. Art, 217. f 28 EQUATIONS OF THE ' a must be mixed with m cubic feet of a specific gravity 6, in order that the specific gravity of the mixture may be c ? Let X be the quantity required. Then x cubic feet of specific gravity a weigh as much as ax cubic feet of water, and m cubic feet of specific gravity h as much as hm cubic feet of water. Hence the whole m -{- X cubic feet of mixture weigh as much as hm-^- ax cubic feet of water. Hence, as in the particular instance above, hm -^-ax 7 , V ' — = c bm-{-ax = cCw-f^) = cm + cx hm-^cm = cx—ax or {b'-'C)m = {C'~'a)x X = ,m c — a This is rational when h is greater than c, and c greater than a ; that is, when 6 — c and c — a are possible. It is also rational when h — c and c — a are both impossible; since, in this case, the apparent irra- tionality arises from our having converted bm+ax = cm-\'Cx into bm-'Cm = ex— ax instead o( cni'^bm = ax— ex c b and the rational answer is a: := .m. In this case a is greater a — c than c, and c greater than 6. That is, this problem is rational when c lies between a and b. If c do not lie between a and 6, then a rational problem is formed, as in page 1 8, by supposing x the direct reverse of what it was last supposed to be ; that is, by supposing the m cubic feet of specific gravity b to allow of the substance of specific gravity a being subtracted from it, or to be itself a mixture already containing that substance. That is, solve this problem : How much of a specific gravity a must be taken from m cubic feet of specific gravity 6, so that the specific gravity of the remainder may be c ? The answer will be found to be c — b h — c X = ,m or a; = ,m C'—a a — c according as c is greater than both a and 6, or less than both. But here may arise another of the anomalies previously explained. Sup- pose, for instance, we ask how much of a specific gravity a(= 10) must be taken from m(= 20) cubic feet of a specific gravity 6(= 6), in order that the specific gravity of the remainder may be c (= 12). FIRST DEGREE. 29 (Call this problem A.) Here, though the problem is evidently im- possible, the answer will be rational, being -=^!'» = ^0-20 = 5-20 = 60 and the impossibility is detected, not in the form of the answer, but on looking at the problem, with which the answer is inconsistent ; for 60 cubic feet cannot be taken from 20. The equation from which this answer results is 1^5=i2f = 12 or 120-lOar = 240- 12a; 20— X in which, with the answer jr = 60, the anomaly 3 explained in p. 19 occurs. On correcting this equation, as done in p. 20, it becomes ]0a;-120 = 12a:-240 or ^^""'^H^ = 12 X — 20 which is derived from the following problem : — From how much of specific gravity « (= 10) must m (= 20) cubic feet of specific gravity *(=:6) be taken, in order that the specific gravity of the remainder may be c(= 12)? (Call this problem B.) Whether the answer x = 60 is to be called possible or impossib^ftr'' depends upon the answer to the following question. Was problem B within our meaning or not when problem A was proposed ? that is, did we mean to take the one of the two, A and B, which should turn out to be rational ; stating A, because we supposed it, before examina- tion, to be that one ? or did we mean to confine ourselves within the limits of the literal meaning of A ? Because, in the first case, the answer is, that we have chosen the wrong alternative, that the other should have been chosen, and that the answer is x zs^QO; in tlie second case, the answer is that the problem is impossible.* Problem IV. — The specific gravities of gold and silver are 19i and 10|; a goldsmith ofiers a mass of ^ of a cubic foot which • I have here stated this purposely, because the matter of convention is more obvious in this problem than in that of page 16, where there is an even chance of our choosing the wrong alternative at first. The problem before us will appear strained, simply because the alternatives of north and south of a post come more frequently into practice than those of taking a known from an unknown, and an unknown from a known, mixture. I state this because some writers on algebra seem to imply, by making this sort of extension rest only on the most obvious and usual examples, that they wish the student to consider it as not con- ventional, but necessary. 2 30 EQUATIONS OF THE he asserts to be gold, and which is found to weigh 260 pounds. Can it be all gold ? if not, may it have been adulterated with silver ? and, in that case, in what proportion were silver and gold mixed ? Since a cubic foot of water weighs 1000 ounces, and gold is 19^ times as heavy as water, a cubic foot of gold weighs 19,250 ounces, and ^ of a cubic foot weighs 4812^ ounces, or 300 pounds 12^ ounces. Therefore the mass cannot be all gold. Again, a cubic foot of silver weighs 10,500 ounces, and i of a cubic foot weighs 164 pounds 1 ounce. Therefore the mass is heavier than its bulk of silver, and lighter than its bulk of gold, and consequently may be a mixture of the two. In this case, let x be the quantity of gold, x being a fraction of a cubic foot; then \ — x is the remainder of silver, and 19250 j: is the number of ounces the gold weighs, and 10500 {\ — x) the same for the silver. But the whole weight is 260 pounds, or 4160 ounces ; therefore 19250a: + 10500(J-.ar) = 4160 1535 307 3 , 12 . I X = = = Tz nearly, or -— of - 8750 1750 17 ^' 17 4 or /. about 12 parts out of 17 are gold, and the rest silver. This is a case of the celebrated problem first solved by Archi- medes,* and maybe generalised as follows: — In what proportions must substances of specific gravities a and b be mixed, so that the specific gravity of the whole may be c ? To one cubic foot of the first let there be x cubic feet of the second, to produce the mixture required. Then the 1 cubic foot of the first, weighing a cubic feet of water, and x cubic feet of the second, weighing bx cubic feet of water, the whole 1 + x cubic feet weigh a-^bx cubic feet of water. But since its specific gravity is to be c, it weighs c(l-i-j:) cubic feet of water; therefore, a + bx = c(l + x), or ^^ = -37 to which the remarks in pages 28 and 29 apply. Examples. Section II. The Lever, Generally speaking, a bar, when suspended by any point in it, will only rest in one position, namely, hanging downwards ; but if properly loaded with weights, it may be made to rest in any position, and is then said to be a lever in equilibrium, that is, evenly balanced. The rules are, 1. Treat the • See the Penny Cyclopadia^ vol. ii. p. 277. FIRST DEGREE. 31 weight of the bar itself as if it were all collected in its midddle point. 2. Call the number of pounds* in any weight, multiplied by the number of feet by which it is removed from the point of suspension, the moment of that weight ; then a bar will be in equilibrium when the sum of the moments of the weights on one side of the pivot is the same as that of the weights on the other side. If the bar be not suspended by its middle point, the weight of the bar itself must be taken into account as if it were all collected in the middle point. If the sum of the moments on one side be not equal to that on the other, the side which has the greater sum will preponderate. -Problem I. A bar 18 feet long, weighing 40 pounds, has weights of 12 and 20 pounds at the two ends. Where must tlie pivot be placed, so that the bar may rest upon it? A C D B 12 lb. 40 lb. 20 lb. Let the weight of the bar (40 lbs.) be collected at the middle point C. Then AC = CB = 9 feet. We do not know on which side of C to place the pivot, which may produce an incorrectness in the equation similar to that in Anomali^ 1. page 12. This, however, will not affect the result. Let the pivot be at D between B and C ; that is, let 12 lb. at A and 40 lb. at C balance 20 lb. at B. Let AD=j: feet. Then CD = (j: — 9) feet, DB = (18 — ^) feet. The moments of the weights are 12jr, 40 (j: — 9) and 20(18 — x); and by the preceding principle, 12a;+40(a;-9) = 20(18-a:), or a; = 10; therefore the pivot is 1 foot to the right of the middle point, and the problem has been rightly interpreted, because x — 9 and 18 — a:, tried by the result, are both possible. If we had imagined D to be on the left of C, and ADz=j; as before, we should have supposed the weights at C and B conspiring to balance that at A, and DB =18 — x as before, but CD = 9 — X instead of ar — 9. The equation would have been 12a: = 40(9-a:) + 20(18-a:) or . 12a? - 40(9-a:) = 20(18-a;) or a: = 10 * Any other units may be substituted for pounds and feet j but car© must be taken to use the same units throughout the whole of each problem. 32 EQUATIONS OF THE differing froip the first in liaving -40 (9 -a:) instead of +40 (a: -9). The solution j: =: 10, would have shewn us the Anomaljf 1, page 12. To generalise this problem, let the length of the bar be /, its weight* W, the weights at the let\ and right extremities P and Q. Then let AD = jr, which gives (supposing the pivot right of C), CD = j — 4/, DB = / — X. The equation becomes Vx+Vf{x^\l) = Q(/-a:) _ W/ -f-2Q/ _ W+2Q I whence x — 2P + 2Q + 2W " P + Q + W ^ 2 Exercise. Prove from the value of .r just found that x is greater than, equal to, or less than, \ /, according as Q is greater than, equal to, or less than P. The preceding problem contains the principle of the steelyard. Paoblem II. If a bar 20 feet long, weighing 6 pounds, be sup- ported at 9 feet from the lefl extremity, how must we place upon it weights of 16 and 17 pounds, 7 feet apart, so that the whole may be balanced (the 16 lbs. being supposed on the left) ? 16 lb. 6 lb. 17 lb. \ 1 1 T I ' "i A E D C F B Let C be the middle point, D the pivot, and E and F the places of the weights. Then AD =9 feet, BD = 11 feet, AC =10 feet, EF = 7feet, DC=1 foot. LetAE=x; then ED = 9 — x, DF = AF— .AD=AE + EF— ADrsx-f 7— 9 = x— 2. The system therefore consists in 16 lb. at dist. 9 — j: from pivot; moment 16(9 — x), which balances 6 lb. at dist. 1 foot from pivot; moment 6 X 1 or 6 17 lb. at dist. x — 2 feet from pivot; moment 17(x — 2). Hence 16(9-^:) = 6-fl7(x-2) a: = 5^ feet. The equation has been rightly formed, for 9 — x and x — 2 are both possible. If we had supposed E and F to fall on the same side of D, the resulting equation would have been * That is, W is the number of pounds, or other unit, in its weight, and / the number of feet, or other unit, in its length. FIRST DEGREE. 33 16 (9-a;) 4-17(2-0:) = 6 or 16(9-a;) = 6-17(2-0:) a: = 5^ feet: from which the same value of x is obtained, but 2 — j: is impossible. Even if we had made the evidently impossible supposition that £ and F are both on the same side of D as C (amounting to supposing that the weights at E, F, and C are counterbalanced by no weight at all on the opposite side), the equation which results, treated by ordinary rules, would present no direct sign of impossibility until we came to compare the result with the equation. In this case, A D C E F B ifAE=a:,wehaveDC=l,DE = T— 9,DF = (j:— 9) + 7=j: — 2; and the moments of the weights at C, E, and F, are therefore 6, \Q(jc — 9) and 17 (x — 2). To trace the effect of the preceding supposition, namely, that there is no weight on the left side of the pivot D, we must see what will follow from supposing 6-i-16(a:-9) + 17(a:-2) = as if such an equation were possible. This gives 6 + 16a;-144+17j:-34 = 33a;-172 = 33 a; = 172 a; = 6^ the same as before. But the preceding equation is impossible, since the addition of three quantities must give more than nothing. At the same time, we see that x — 9 is also impossible. We must here make a remark similar to that in page 14. Tlie et|uation a:— (c — J) = 0, or a: + 6 — c = is possible, since it merely indicates that j:=:c — h. But the equation x + (J)-^c) = is impossible. Nevertheless, when b is greater than c, x-\-{b — c) is the same thing as x-^-h — c; and by attempting this conversion when h is less than c, we might be led to the impossible form x-f (6-c) = 0, where we should have adopted the rational form o:— (c — i) = 0. From this we conclude, that if we meet with X -^p = 0, 34 EQUATIONS OF THE it is a sign that, in forming the quantity p, we have inverted the order of the terms in a subtraction ; that is, we have supposed p was b — c when it should have been f — b. Let us call the latter q ; then if we had proceeded correctly, we should have had a: — (7 = 0, or a; = j. The problem in page 32, generalised, is as follows. A bar / feet in length, weighing W pounds, is supported at a feet from its left extremity. How must we place P and Q pounds (P being on the left) m feet asunder, so that the bar may be balanced ? The equation is P(a-a:) = W(J/-a) + Q(a; + m-.a) ^ "■ P + Q Exercise. Supposing the bar to be continued to the left of A and the right of B, but the continuation on either side to have no weight, explain, as in page 33, the case where W=20 pounds, /=50 feet, a=s5 feet, P = 4 pounds, Q^7 pounds, w = 10 feet. Examples. Section III. Miscellaneous. Problem I. — A straight line AB, 10 inches long (continued both ways), is cut by the point C at 7 inches to the right of A. Where must the point D be placed, so that AC may bear the same proportion* to CB which AD bears to DB? ■■ " ■■■ ■ I — 1 1 1 — A C B D Here ACi=i7 inches, CB=£3 inches. The point D must be either between A and B, or to the right of B, or to the left of A. Or there may be (for any thing we have shewn to the contrary), more than one such point; for instance, one such point to the right of A, and another to the left. But if we consider the conditions of the problem, it will appear impossible that D can lie any where but to the right of B. For, suppose D to be placed between A and B, say between C and B; then, according to the problem, AD (greater than 7 inches) contains B D (less than 3 inches), the same times and parts of a time which AC (7 inches) contains BC (3 inches). This, the * To those who have never used this term mathematically (see Ar. 177, 178), we may state, that a bears to b the same proportion which c hears to d, when the fraction — is the same as -r* a FIRST DEGREE. 35 least consideration will shew, cannot be. For a similar reason (this let the student explain), D cannot lie between A and C. Neither can D lie on the left of A; for then, of AD and DB, AD the less roust contain DB the greater, aaAC (7 inches) contains CB (3 inches), or 2 1 times, which is also impossible. Let us then suppose D on the right of B, and let Ap=:jr inches; then BD = x — 10 inches. By the problem, x bears to x — 10 the same proportion as 7 bears to 3 ; that is, _i^=^ (x)3(x-10) 3x = 7(^-10) which gives j: ^ — - = 17i inches. If we had supposed the point D to lie between A and B (say between C and B), then AD being x, DB would have been 10 — j, and the equation would have been * 7 = -, which gives x ^ 7 ; 10— a: 3 that is, D coincides with C. This is a case which we have not put among what we have called anomalies, because the result, though not expected, is intelligible without further explanation. It implies, that if we would place D between A and B, so that A D should be to DB in the same proportion as AC to CB, D must occupy the same place as C. But if we suppose D to lie on the left of A, and let x stand for AD, we have DB ^ 10-f ^> and the equation becomes '^ I, or 3a:-7a; = 70, lO+x 3' ''hich presents the anomaly in pages 14 . . 19. This shews that we ^ave nqeasured x or AD in the wrong direction, and that if it had '>een made to fall to the right of A, the equation would have been Ix—Zx = 70, or X = 17J inches, which we have found before. Now let the problem be altered so that C shall stand in the middle ^tween A and B. For instance, let AB =:12 inches, and AC = 6 iQches. Is there a point D, not coinciding with C, such that AD tears to D B the same proportion as A C to C B ? Certainly not ; for AC contains CB once exactly, but if D be placed right of B or left of A, AD is greater or less than DB. But if a point be placed at a d 36 EQUATIONS OF THE great distance from A or B on either side, AD contains DB very nearly once (see p. 24) ; and by removing D to a sufficient distance, A D may be made to contain D as nearly * once as we please. We might therefore expect, if we attempt to find D in this case by an equation, such an anomaly as that in page 21, explained in page 24. If possible, let the point D, on the right of B, satisfy the conditions of this problem. Let AD = jr. Then DB = a:— 12 and ^C = 6, C B = 6. Therefore the equation of the problem is = -7 = 1 or a? = ar — 12 (See page 21.) a:— .12 6 The generalisation of the preceding problem, in supposing AB=ia, AC =6, and AD=j:, and placing D on the right of B, gives the equation X b ah or a: = jr— a a — b 26 — a In order to meet all the cases which may occur in the application of algebra, we will now take a problem in which the answer will go beyond the notion which was formed when the problem was proposed, not because the thing proposed to be done is impossible, but because the answer is not within the limits of what is usually necessary or convenient. For instance, in ordinary arithmetic, a figure placed on ^ the figbt of another means that it is to be multiplied by ten before adding it to the other. Thus 24 is 2 X 10+4. We do not commonly use fractions in the same way : thus 2]^ 4 never stands for 2^x10+4, or 29 ; but it might do so if we pleased ; similarly 3J 2J^ might stand for 3jx 10 4-2 J, or 34^. We now propose the following Problem II.' What is that number, consisting of two digits the sum of which is 10, and which is doubled by inverting the digits ? We see that 91 is not double of 19, nor 82 of 28, nor 73 of 37, nor 64 of 46. Therefore, with the restrictions on the decimal system usually adhered to in practice, the problem is impossible. What sort of answer then are we to expect if we reduce the problem to an equation ? Let x and y be the digits in question : then a;+y = 10, or y = 10— a:. * For instance, place D on the right at a thousand times the distance of B from A. Then A D is to D B as 1001 to 1000, or in the proportion 1 of 1 + TT™- to 1, which is very nearly the proportion of 1 to 1. FIRST DBGRBB. 37 The number formed by placing tlie digit x before y, is IOjt -|-y (just as 24 18 2 X 10 + 4y 58 it 5 X 10 + 8, &c.) ; and when the digits are reversed, the number is lOy+x (just as 42 is 4x10 + 2, 85 is 8 X 1 + 5y &«.). By the problem, the second is double of the first; ihatis, lOy+a: = 2(10a:+y), or 20a; + 2y. Therefore lOy— 2y = 20ar— or, or 8y = 19ar. But y = 10—0?, or 8(10— a:) = 19ar; therefore, a; = -- = 2--, y = 10— a: = 7--. ^ 27 27* ^ 27 The answer therefore is, that if it be understood that none but the usual single digits shall be placed in the columns of units and tens, the problem is impossible ; but that, if the method of writing numbers be estended, so that a fraction placed before a fraction shall be con- ndered as meaning 10 times as much as when it stands alone, then tiie problem is possible, and the direct and inyerted numbers are, 2?5 tL and 7^ 2?^. 27 27 27 27 ^^ ^^ 7~ means 2?^ X 10 + 1^ and is 36^5 27 27 27 27 27 7^ 2~ means 7~ x 10 + 2% and is 73;^ ' 27 27 27 27 27 ^ second of which is double of the first. We may then lay down the following : When a problem has a "^tional answer, that answer can only be used on the supposition ^^ any usual method of combining whole numbers, which is neces- '^'y in forming the equation, shall also be applied to fractions. This principle, when introduced into common life, often induces ^^ to suppose fractional parts of things which, in the strict and ori- S^^l meaning of the terms, have no fractional parts* Thus there is, properly speaking, no such thing as half a hone : there may be half **** body of a horse (as to bulk or weight), half the power of a horse v^hich is but the half of a certain pressure), or there may be a horse ^ Wf the size, half the power, &c. of another horse — that is, we may "^ve any quality of a horse which can be represented by numbers ; DQt not the complete idea which we attach to the word, because it contains notions which have no reference to number or quantity. £ 38 EQUATIONS OF THE Nevertheless, we do not speak absurdly when we talk of a steam engine of the power of 20} horses, because it is there only the horses' power that we speak of, which can be numbered in pounds of weight; or of wolves eating half a horse, because we then speak only of a weight of flesh. Thus the problem — A horse can draw two tons; certain horses drew 5 tons, how many were there ? — is absurd in the strictest sense, but not so if we confine ourselves to the only quality of a horse which is concerned in the problem, namely, power of drawing: and we may either say, there was 2]^ times as much power as a horse possesses, or the power of 2]^ horses. The same remarks would apply to the following : The reckoning came to £5, and the share of each person is £2, how many persons were there ? — which cannot be solved in the strictest meaning of the words, but in which we may say that the whole reckoning is 2 } as much as that of one person, or that of 2} persons.* Problem III. There are two pieces of cloth of a and a' yards iik length. The owner sells the same number of yards of both sorts at b and 6' shillings per yard. If the remainders were then sold, of the first at c shillings a yard, of the second at d shillings a yard, the total prices of the two pieces would be the same. What number of yards was first sold of each ? N.B. To avoid using too many letters, it is usual to employ the same letter with one or more accents,t to signify different numbers which have some common point of meaning. Thus a and a' are the lengths of two pieces of cloth, b and b' the prices per yard of the first pieces taken firom each, and c and c' the prices per yard of the remainders. But a and a! differ as much in meaning as to the num- bers they may stand for, as a and b ; either may stand for any number named. Let X be the number of yards first cut off from each piece ; then the remainders are a — x and a'— x yards. The sums received for the first are therefore bx and b' x shillings; for the remainders, c{a — x) and d {d — x) shillings. Consequently, by the conditions of the question, • So when we say that the. yearly mortality of a country is 1 out of 40} persons, we mean ^ out of 81. t The symbol a' may be read a accented, a", a twice accented, and so on. But a dash, a two dash, &c. are shorter, though not quite so correct in g^rammar* FIRST DEGREE. 39 bx + c(a^x) = llx-\'d{al^x) bx+ac—cx = h'x'\-a!c'^dx bx^cx+cfx—b'x = a'c'^ac {b'\'d^V^c)x = dc'^ac ^^ dt! — ac ' ~ ft + c/— 6' — c Suppose we try to apply this to the following case : Let the num- her of yards be 60 and 80; let the prices of the number of yards taken from each at first be 10 and 9 shillings a yard ; and let the prices of the remainders be 4 and 3 shillings a yard. We have then 0=60 a' = 80 J = 10 y = 9 c = 4 d ^Z — dd -^ac __ 80x3 — 60x4 _ ^ ■" fc+i/— 6'— c "" 10 + 3 — 9—4 ■" an anomaly already discussed in page 25. We have there seen that it implies that any value of s will solve the equation, and this we shall find to be the case in the present instance. For if we return to the equation, we find it becomes 10x+4(60-x) = 9ar+3(80-x) ot lOx+240— 4a: = 9a; + 240— 3a; w 6a:+240 = 6a;-f 240 ^Idch is true for all values of x. Hence the answer is, that in this piirticular case the total prices of the two pieces are the same whatever ^^omber of yards be first cut off. * hA us now try another .case. Let the pieces be 60 and 80 yards^ ^ in the preceding ; but let the first pieces cut off be sold at 5 and ^ shillings a yard, and the second at 2 and 3 shillings a yard ; then a = 60 a' = 80 6 = 5 6' = 4 c = 2 c' = 3 -_ oV — gc __ 80X3 — 60X2 __ 120 __ ^^ ^""6 + c' — 6'— c 5 + 3 — 4 — 2 "" 2 ■" the number of yards cut from both is 60 ; that is, the wh)le of the first piece is taken, and 60 yards of the second, which are sold at 5 and ^ shillings a yard (giving 300 and 240 shillings). Then the re- niaibder of the second (we need not mention the remainder of the fint, which being nothing, brings nothing), 20 yards, sold at 3 shillings a yard, brings 60 shillings. The produce of the first is 300, of the ^ond 240 + 60 shillings, both the same, as the problem requires. 40 EQUATIONS OF THE The third case we will take is as follows : Let the pieces be 60 and 80 yards; let the pieces cut off be sold for 7 and 3 '^shillings a yard, and the remainders for 5 and 2 shillings a yard, = 60 a' = 80 6 = 7 6' = 3 c = 5 c' = 2 _ 80x2-^60x5 _ 160—300 ^ "" 7 + 2 — 3 — 5 ■" 1 and contains an impossible subtraction. From the conclusions in page 18, we must suppose some wrong alternative has been employed in choosing x. But, on looking at the problem, no such thing appears ; x yards are to be first sold of each. But the problems in page 18 were purposely* put in a form in which the alternatives were obvious ; how then are we to widen the expressions used in stating this problem so that the problem, as we have given it, may be only one case out of two or more ? Remember tliat we alter no number, but only the quality of the result. The seller begins with 60 and 80 yards of the two cloths in his possession, and ends with none of either, having in his pocket the same receipts from both pieces. Our problem says he first sells a certain number of yards from both, and the answer upon this supposition shews the problem to be impossible. We have been previously directed in such cases to alter the quality of the result; let us do this, and suppose he begins by buying the same quantity of both. We must preserve the condition that he begins with 60 yards of the first, and ends with none ; therefore, if he begin by buying 10 yards more, he must sell the whole 70. If so, he also buys 10 yards more of the second sort, and sells the whole 90. But as we are to alter none of the numbers, but only change their names, if he buy more he buys at 7 (h) and 3 (Jf) shillings a yard ; and when he gets rid of all he has (not all he has lefty for that belongs to one particular alternative), he sells at 5 and 2 shillings a yard. Therefore the wider problem, of which the one proposed is one of the alternatives, is as follows : * We may here remark that the extension of a problem appears datura] or not according to the idiom of the language in which it is expressed. Thus, comparing together the case here given, and that in page 19, the former appears forced, because we have no very common word to denote either buying or selling as the case may be ; the latter appears natural, because the words *' give the date," implying asking for a time, either before or after a given epoch, are perfectly consistent with FIR8T DEGREE. 41 Extended Problem. There are two pieces of cloth a and a! ys^rds in length. The owner concludes a bargain rC' ipecting the same number of -yards of both sorts at ( and b' shillings per yard. If his stock of both were then sold, of the first at r shillings a yard, of the second at <f shillings a yard, the total results of the transac- tions in each sort of cloth would heihe same. Case first proposed. There are two pieces of clotli a and of yards in length. The owner sells the same number of yards of both sorts at 6 and b' shillings per yard. If the re- mainders were then sold, of the first at c shillings a yard, of the second at d shillings a yard, the total prices of the two pieces would be the same. The case first proposed leads, as before, to the equation or X = flV ac 6 + c'— 6'— c but the general case leads to this equation only when the owner is the seller in the bargain mentioned. If he be the buyer, he first pays bx and l/x for what he buys of each sort, and then sells the stocks a -f .r and rt'-|- X at c and c' shillings per yard. Therefore c(a + x) — bx is the balance in his favour from the first, and c'(a'-)-jr) — b'x from the iiecond. The equation is c{a + x)^bx = cXa+x) — b'x or X = ac — fl'c' tlid idiom of our language. But if we translated these two problems into a laogaage, in which there was a word in common use, such as trafficking, to denote either buying or selling, and in which there was no usual way of asking for a date, without implying either before or after some other date, then tlie present extension would appear natural, and the one in page 19 forced. The equations of algebra of course take no cognisance of such differ, enoes of idiom, which is generally considered one of the great advantages of the science, though some regard it as a defect. The student must decide this point for himself, when he has had sufficient experience of the advantages and disadyautages arising from such extensions. e2 42 EQUATIONS OF THB which differs fh>m the former^ consistently with the rules in page 18, by an alteration of the sign of every term which contains Vy and ah inversion of the subtraction aV— oc in the result. When a = 60 a' = 80 J = 7 6' = 3 c = 5 c'=2 we have already tried the alternative of supposing the owner to be seller in the first transaction, and have found an impossible subtrac- tion 160—300 in the result. If we now try the second alternative, and suppose him to be buyer, we shall get the rational answer 300 — 160 or 140; which will be found to satisfy the problem. We might enter upon various other cases of the same question, but we shall leave them for the present to the student^ and state a problem which is in all respects analogous to the preceding, and presents similar alternatives in a difierent form. The equations of the two problems will be the same. Problem IV. The paper is a map of a country, of which AB is a level frontier. AH the roads rise from left to right, and fall from right to left, and all the miles mentioned are meant to be measured perpendicularly to the frontier on a level with it. CD is a parallel to the frontier (whether right or left of it is not stated), and T and V are towns on, above, or below (as the case may be), the line BD perpendicular to the frontier. P and Q are two frontier towns; R and S two towns, on, above, or below the points R and S, according to the position of C D. The roads rise or sink, as the case may be^ a number of inches per mile for every level mile from the firontier, as follows : From P to R 6 inches per mile. From Q to S V inches per mile. From R to V c inches per mile. From S to T c' inches per mile. Now T atid V are on the same level, BV is a level miles, and BT a' of the same. Required the distance B D and its direction. At P p< r~~- — _.^ — :r.::::=— ^^"cv. ^''^> ^^>. VIBBT DEGREE. 43 We have given this as an exercise, and shall merely point out the resulting equations on all the different suppositions. In all of them I stands for BD in miles. 1. If D lie to the left of By either €(a+x) — 6a; = c\a' + x) — b'x 1 according as TV is or bx^c{a+x) = b*x — (!{ci+x) ) above or below PQ. 2. If D lie between B and T (as in the figure), cia-^x) +ftx = (f(p!^x) -hb'x. 3. If D lie between T and V, fta?— c(x— a) = Vx + cf{a!^x) when n' is greater than a, or bx + c{a^x) = b'x^c'{x — a!) when a is greater than a'. In t&e figure a is greater than cf, 4. When D lies to the right both of T and V, bx^e(x^a) = b'x^c\x^a') or c{x^d) — fta: = c'(x^a)^b'x the first wh^^m« above, the second when TV is below, the level of P Q. ^BKKf^ o^ ihesQ seven equations can be altogether true ; and as only«j^ alternative in the set marked 3 is directly given in the conditions of the problem, six equations may need examination. But after the explanation of the anomalies (1), (2), and (3), any one of the six equations may be made to give the true answer. The anomaly (4) will be found to arise when h 4-c'^6'-f c, and (5) when b addition to this, €id=iac. The student may make this problem an illustration of every case which we have found to arise. Before proceeding to other forms of equations, we shall now, having found impossible subtractions arise in the solutions of problems, and having seen the method of interpreting them, proceed to the investigation of rules, by which the interpretation may be deferred to any stage we please of the processes, and by which the symbols of impossibility may be used as if they were real numbers, without creating error. 44 ON THE. SYMBOLS OF ALGEBRA. CHAPTER II. ON THE SYMBOLS OF ALGEBRA, AS DISTINGUISHED FROM THOSE OF ARITHMETIC. Symbols such as 50 — 70 (page 15), 200 — 500 (page 16), have received the name of negative quantities. This expression is not a correct one, because 50 — 70 is not a quantity, but the contradiction which arises out of writing down directions to do that which is impossible to be done. But we have seen, pages 14.. 19, that 50 — 70, when it is the answer to a problem, implies 20 things of some sort, as much as 70 — 50, but 20 things of a nature directly the contrary of the things first supposed; so that in forming the correct equations, these things diminish that which they increased in the incorrect one, and increase that which they diminished. Conceive a problem consisting of various steps, such as would &rise from joining two or more problems together, in such a way that the result of the first must be known before we can proceed with the second. If we solve the first problem, and find by an impossible result that we have chosen a wrong alternative, we should first retrace our steps, set the matter right, and when we have obtained an intelligible result, proceed to the second problem. But, we may ask, are there no rules by which this may be avoided, and by which we may continue the process, as if the result obtained had been rational ? To try this question, we must examine the consequences of proceeding with the symbols of impossible subtraction^ to see what will come of applying those processes which have been demonstrated to be true of absolute numbers. If we look at a problem which presents alternatives, we shall see that not only will the answers be of different kinds, according as one or other alternative is the true one, but the methods in which the unknown answer (jt) must be treated, in order to form the correct equation, are different in the two different cases. Thus, in page 15, Problem I., when x was years after 1830, the processes into which x entered were 50 -^-x and 35 +x; but when x was years before 1830, OK THB BTMBOLB OF ALGEBRA. 45 these processes were 50— » and 35— ». And this brings us to define what we mean by different problemt as distinguished from diferent altemativei of the tame problem. This distinction has been already tacitly laid down ; for, when we came to an impossible subtraction a— fr, we always looked for that modification of the problem, which, not changing absolute numbers, but only the sense in which they were taken, would hfve giren (—a as the answer. Or when we came to Anomaly I., page 12, in which not the answer, but the verification of it, was impossible, we chose that modification which, without altering absolute numbers, inverted the impossible snbtracticms in the equation. Hence, without per- ceiTing it, we have been led to make use of the following definition, [in which, however, it must be recollected, that we have obtained it entirely from equations of the first degree, and that it must therefore be considered as limited to such equations, and possibly capable of extension for equations of higher orders.] It is convenient to con- sider those problems only as different alternatives of the same problem, in which, 1. the absolute numbers employed are the same ; 2. the equations only differ in having inverted terms with different signs (such as — ' mstead of -\ — in page 13), or else m having the signs of the unknown quantity altered throughout (as 50— X ^ 2 (35— x) instead of 50 + a: = 2 (35 -|- x) in page 15) ; 3. the answers are either the same in both, or else only differ in the inversion of a subtraction (such as 70 — 50 instead of 50 — 70, in p. 15). We might propose a problem appearing to have alternatives, but which, in this view, is two different problems combined together, ^or instance, A has £60, and is to receive the absolute balance that appears in B's books, whether for or against B ; but C, who has £200, is to take B's property, and pay his debts. AAer doing this it is found that C's property is three times that of A. What is the absolute balance for or against B ? If B have x pounds, the equation is 3(60+:r) = 200+a; or a; = 10 If B owe s pounds, the equation is 3(60+ a;) = 200-x or x = 5 We have here two difierent equations not reducible one to the other by any of the changes allowed in the preceding definition \ and 46 ON THE SYMBOLS OF ALGEBRA. therefore, so far as the preceding is considered as reducible to equa- tions of the first degree, the two cases are distinct problems. The step we now make is to apply the rules of algebra to the symbols of impossible subtractions, and afterwards to proceed cor- rectly with the inverted subtractions, that we may see, by comparing tlie results, whether the errors committed may be corrected or not by simple and general rules. And since we know that such a subtraction as 3 — 7 will, when set right, be 7 — 3 or 4, let us denote it for the present by 4, in which the bar written above 4 is not* a sign of sub- traction, but a warning that we are using the inverted form 3 — 7 instead of 7 — 3. Thus we might say, that 10 — 14 should also be denoted by 4 ; but here we must stop until we have some further assurance upon this point ; for we cannot as yet reason upon such symbols as 3 — 7 and 10—14, since they represent no quantity imaginable, and we have not yet deduced rules. All we can do is to go to the source from whence they came, and see whether, by the same means which gave 3 — 7, we might have got 10—14 in its place. Suppose a problem, wrongly expressed or understood, gives 2x — j: ^ 50 — 70 (as in page 15). If we take the correct equation 50 — x = 2(35 — x), we may add any quantity to both sides. Say vre add a to both sides, which gives (50 -fa) — a; = (70 +a) - 2x the solution of which is 2ar-a; = (70+a)-(50 + a) = 20 If we had taken the incorrect form 50+j^=2(35H-j?), and added a to both sides, we should, by what we suppose to be strict reasoning, till the result undeceives us, arrive at the conclusion x = (50-|-a) — (70 +o). And this is what we want to ascertain, namely, that just as in the rational form of an equation, we may by previous legiti- mate alterations obtain the answer in the form 70 — 50, 71 — 51, 72 — 52, &c. : so, in the irrational form, we may, by the same sort of process, obtain 51 — 71, 52 — 72, &c., instead of 50 — 70. And we will not say, that 51 — 71 is equal to 50 — 70, because our * The sign of subtraction is a bar written before the quantity to be subtracted. The present is not a sign of subtraction any more than the bar between the numerator and denominator of a fraction. ON THE SYMBOLS OF ALGEBRA. 47 notion of equal (as far as we haye yet gone) applies only to mag- nitode, number, bulk, &c. &c. ; but because any equation which gives 50 — 70, might also have been made to give 51—71, &c., we will call these equivalent to 50 — 70, meaning by the word eguivaUni, that the first may stand in the place of the second, or be substituted for it, without producing any error when we come to correct the result, or any set of operations for which correct substitutes cannot be found. Thus, then, we say, that 0—1,1 — 2, 2 — 3, &c., are all equivalent, and may be represented by T ; a — (a -f IjJ and (a +z) — . (a 4- c 4- ?) are equivalent, and are represented by c ; the rule always being ; — invert the subtraction, and place a bar over the result. Thus, if we obtain such an equation as x + a-\-b = which is the form most obviously impossible of all, we shall, by rules (mly, obtain the expression a; = — (a + 6) which we signify by (a + b) In considering equations of the first degree, we may confine our- selves to the rational form x — a =z 0, and the irrational form j-f-a = o. For to these all others can be reduced. For instance (page 5) equation 4 is reduced to X = 13 and the first equation of Prob. I., in page 15, is reduced to a: + 20 = We now find equivalent forms for a + b a-'b axb ■=■ b The first will arise from such an equation as the following : a? 4- (jp 4- a) — p +(.q + b) ^ q from which, if we solve it before observing that it is impossible, we have X =;> — (;? + a) 4- ? — (? + &) = a + b But the same rules of solution will also give a: = p+q — (p -j-q + a+b) = {a + b) 48 OK THE SYMBOLS OF ALGBBRA. In which the bar over a + i signifies that we have attempted to subtract from a quantity another which is greater than itself by a + b. Or we have a -f- 6 is equivalent to (a + b) Similarly the equation a:+(p + a)— i>-fy == iq + i) gives X = jp— (p-fa)— (5— (y+J)) = a— J following rules only. But this equation is not always impossible, for it is equivalent to or a; + a = 6 which gives x ^ b — a Therefore, a — b is correctly 6— a when b is greater than a; when b is less than a, it is (a— 6). We may also give the equivalent form b-^a, which follows from the attempt to solve correctly. x+(p + a)'-p = b in the form X = ft + (p— (p -f a)) We have as yet obtained no such expressions as ab or -=r b but we shall now shew that these arise from inattention to the equa- tion, not to the problem. That is, we shall deduce ab and ab, -=r- and T, or similar forms, from the same equation, whether that equation be true or false. If /) be greater than q, and c greater than d, the multiplication of the rational expressions/) — q and c — <f, and the attempt at multipli- cation of the irrational expressions g-^p and d-^c, give the same result, as follows : p-9 g-p pc—qc qd^pd pd-^-qd qc-^pc Subtract pc^qc^pd-i-qd qd^-pd—qc-hpc OK THE SYMBOLS OF ALGEBRA. 49 whidi are the tam« in everjr thing but the order of their terms. Consequently^ the equation x + qc+pd ttx pc-^-qd might, by inattention, be thus solved X s= pc'^-qd^qc'-pd =» (j— p)(rf— c) where the latter aAiould have been X^ (p-qXc-^d) whence, if p — q be a and c — d be 6, the expression Zb may be obtained instead of the quantity a b. We have already seen, in page 19, how it may happen that -^ is b introduced in the place of -. Let p be greater than g, and c greater than d; then cx + J =s dx +p correctly solved, gives incorrectly solved, gives {d'^c)x ^q-p ^^jETc whence, if p — y be a, and d — c be i, -=• is equivalent to ^ b b We have thus determined either equivalent forms or corrections, in all the cases which arise from the equation, considered without reference to the problem from which it was derived. We shall now consider both, taking as a basis what we have ascertained by examples, namely, that the misconception which produces a instead of a, also causes us to add where we should subtract, and subtract where we should add, in forming our equations. Suppose we have obtained a as the result of an equation, and that the next step (if all before had been correct) would have been to add a to c, er to find c-\-a. Correction and Process, The true result is a, but the same mis- conception by which a was produced, has made us suppose this quantity was to be added where it was in reality to be subtracted, and vice versd (pages 15-18); therefore the next step corrected is e — a or e^^^a is equivalent to C'-^a, r>o .ON THE SYMBOLS OF ALGEBRA. Trial of the incorrect Process, a is the representative of x — (M'\'d), and c -ho (applying rules only) is c -^ z — (z -f a), or c -{-z — z — a, or c-^a, which has been shewn to be correct. Similarly, where c — a occurs, we know that the true answer is a^ but that the misconception which produced a leads. us to suppose if: should be subtracted where it should be added ; therefore c + a is the true result. The incorrect process gives c — (« — {z-{-a)\ or c — r 4- (^ + a), or c — a: + ;8r + a, or c + a. We have, then, these two rules : c + a is equivalent to c — a c^a c +a By similar reasoning (p — a) x ig — b) is equivalent to (j> -\- a) (7 4- 6). The incorrect process gives pg — ga — p b + ab. If we con- sider a and 6 as resulting from the misunderstanding of a problem^we must take some such problem as a guide. Let it be the following : A and B have respectively 4 and 5 pounds. One of them loses a bet to the other, after which the product of the number of pounds belonging to each is 18. Which lost, and how much? If we suppose A lost a; pounds, the equation evidently is (4-.a:)(6+ar) = 18 But if we suppose A gained .r pounds, the equation will be (4+a:)(5-a:) = 18 First Alternative. 4 — X 5+x Second Alternative. 4H-J: 5 — X 20 + 5J: 4x + XX Subtract 20 -}- ^ — ^^ 20 H- j: — XX = t8 XX — X ^2 20 — 5x 4x^xx Add 20 — X — XX 20 — X — XX = 18 XX -\- X ^ 2 From this we see, that in this instance (and trial proves the same in others of the same kind) the correct equations belonging to different alternatives have different signs in the terms which are multiplied by ,r only once (or contain the first power of a:), or (page 1) are of the first degree with respect to x ; but that the terms which contain xx, or ON THE SYMBOLS OF ALGEBRA. -'A are of the second degree with respect lo x, have not different signs. And the same may be pro?ed of terms containing the product of two unknown quantities x and y^ which are not the same ; for instance, in the equations (4-a:)(5+y) = 18 ^ (4 + a:)(5-3f) = 18 If we take a term such as abc, vre shall find that, on cor- rection, the sign preceding it must be changed ; that in such a term ^ abcdf the preceding sign is not changed: the rule being, c^e the sign where there is an odd number of factors to be corrected. It is indifferent whether the fiu^tors to be corrected be in ^ nnmerator or denominator:' if, for example, we take -=-, we c ^h by deducing - instead of x from the equation which gave r, X 1 ^ ^ — instead of '=', as follows. Suppose the equation which c c gives c to be 2x -^{6 + z) =^ x + z : ^is> following only rules, may be finally represented either by 2x^X =i Z-^(c +z) or X = C ^^7 x — lx or (1— 2)a; = c-f-^:— 2r = c that is, (T)a; = c {rr)cx \^\ ^cing the consequences of this result, we find that the uncorrected — ^ /» ^ ^ i. is equivalent to -=•. Hence the term -=• is equivalent to c c c af V— or .which contains all the uncorrected factors in the c c "Offlerator. If we now resume (p — a) (^ — ^)> of which the continuation of the incorrect process is /? j* — p 6 — 9 a + a ft, we must conclude, that, 'n the terms of the first degree with respect to a and 6, the signs must be altered ; but that in the term a h the sign preceding it must not be altered ; so that the correction gives 52 OK THB SYMBOLS OF ALGEBRA. But this 18 the lame as would have arisen if the process had been corrected one step earlier, as in page 50 ; that is, if (p +a) (9 -f- b) had been written at once for (p— . a) (9 — 6 ) • It is not necessary to go through all the individual cases that might arise. We have found in all that the common rules of algebra may be applied without error to the expressions of impossible sub- tractions ; that is to say, the correction may be deferred as long as we please without introducing error, provided that, when at last the cor* rection is made, the following rule be observed : — In correcting any term, change the symbols of impossible subtraction by substituting the absolute number resulting from the real subtraction [thus, put 3 for 3> or (ar+3) — z for z — («+3)]; change the sign preceding all such terms as require an odd number of such corrections ; keep the sign of such as require an even number. Repeat this as ofien as may be necessary. If the final result be then rational, the problem has been rightly understood, and the mistakes have arisen from inattention to the processes which come between the statement and the result ; but if the result after correction be still an impossible subtraction, then the problem has been misunderstood if there be alternatives in it, or is itself a wrong alternative of some more general statement. As an example, let the final result of a set of operations be abc-{-dd . ab ac — a cd Let it be then discovered that a, b, and e, are not rational expres- sions, and let them be found to be made, a by attempting to subtract a number from 1 less than itself, b by attempting to subtract a number from 3 less than itself, and e by attempting to subtract a number from 5 less than itself. That is, let a, 6, and e, be represented by I) 3) and 5. Let ^ and / which are rational, be 2 and 6. Then, the preceding expression, before correction, is 1X3X6+2X2 , 1X3 _ g^g 1x6-2 6X2 the first stage in the correction of which is 18+4 , 3 — 6 — 2 • 12 + :^ +30 ON THE SYMBOLS OF ALGEBRA. «03 buly —6— 2 (page 47) is signified by 8; and the necessary correc- tjoo; according to the preceding i^le, gi?es ^ + 30-^ or 27J which is the result which would have been obtained, had each correction been made in its proper place. But the preceding form a is not made use of by algebraical writers, and is introduced here not to remain permanently, but to avoid using the sign of subtraction, to appearance at least, in two diflfeffent senses. If we follow rules, without observing where they lead us, we should obtain processes of tlie following sort : 3-8 = 3-(3+6) = 3-3-6 = 0-6 and, as in + ^9 it is not necessary to the meaning to retain 0, we might, by imitation, write — 5. This is what we have hitherto written 5. And we shall find, in all the intelligible properties of the sign — , a close similarity between —5 (properly placed in an ex- pression) and the legitimate rules by which it is treated, and 5? an uncorrected misconception, with the rules for obtaining a correct result. In &ct, if we apply rules to + ^od — as they are applied when the quantities concerned are rational, we find no distinction between a and —a, though we have made one until we could establish the points of similarity. For instance, b — a when corrected is b-^a. And b — (z — a), when z is greater than a, gives b — z-\-a; so that a, rationally used with two negative signs before it, gives '\-a in the result. Apply this rule to b — ( — a) and it gives b-^a; so that b'^ais corrected by the application of no other rule than considering a as —a, and applying the rules which, in the Introduction, are shewn to apply in possible subtractions. The same will be found in every otlier case yet stated . In further illustration, \ei ax=zb — c, let c=rf — x, let ar=^ — v, and let v^t — z. We have, then, a = b^(d—x) = fe--(rf— (y— v)) = ^-{^-(y-(^-^))| (A) = 6-|rf-Cy-^ + ;2)} — b^ |rf—y 4-^—^1 = 6— rf-fj^ — ^ + z f2 54 ON THB SYMBOLS OF ALGEBRA. On looking at this result, we see that z is preceded by + ; in the expression (A) it is four times under the negative sign, t is preceded by — y and is under three negative signs, y is preceded by +> having been under two negative signs. Consequently, those terms are nega- tive which are under an odd number of negative signs ; and positive, which are under an even number. Now, let us suppose that we have obtained from an equation an incorrect value — a, denoted by a, as before. Let the result of some succeeding process lead to 0— a, which we will denote by a. A third process leads to 0— a, which we denote by a, and so on. At every step, therefore, a new misconception has been introduced : but, as we shall proceed to shew, the repetition of the error any even number of times does not shew itself in the result. The first irra- tional answer must arise from the attempt to determine x from an equation, which reduces itself to jr + a = 0. Let a new process be then entered upon to determine y, and let it lead to ^ -f*^ =^0* The equations which we should have got by proceeding correctly are j:— a = and y— x =: 0, which lead to ^ = a. But this is the same as we should get from the incorrect equations jr-|-a = 0, i^+x^O, by rules only. For, subtracting the first from the second, we have ^— a = 0, or ^ = a. Again, proceeding to find 2r, suppose we get z -|-^ :=0. From the correct equations in the first column x^a = X'\-a = • y— a; = y+^ = z^y = ^+y = ^ we get z^^-a; not so now from the incorrect equations (observe that their number is odd). For, from rules only, by adding the first to the third we get z-^-x+y-^a^^Oy from which, subtracting the second, we find 2r+a=0. And thus we might proceed with more equations. Now, observe that the first equation gives x^O — a or a, the second ^ = — X or — a or a, the third ja: = — y or — a or a, and so on. Hence, from the preceding, any even number of errors of this kind corrects itself, any odd number requires correction. We now return to the expression which is rational when t is greater than z, y greater than t — z, &c. ON THE SYMBOLS OF ALGEBRA. 56 We hare already applied ^aeie eperatiom to inational cases to see what would come of them ; we now apply direct reatonmg knowingly to an irrational case, with the same intention. Not that any new step is now made ; for in applying operations, we always tacitly employ the reasoning by which the rule of operation was demonstrated. It is only allowable to write an instance of a — (6— c)^a— 6 + c in cases where we can return to the demonstration (see the Introduction), and make that demonstration apply to the particular case in hand. We place the example of too general reasoning in brackets. [Since the preceding equation is generally true, it is true when f =0y jrs=0, dssiOy and 6=0. But the preceding equation, omitting the term wherever it occurs, because neither increases nor dimi- nishes the Talue of an expression, becomes -!-(-(-'))}=- therefore z is not altered by being preceded hy four negative signs, and the same may be proved of any even number ] But the preceding reasoning is obviously incorrect, if seriously meant as a proof, and not as an experiment; for the equation a — (6 — c)s=fl— 6-|-c is tacitly applied to the case where 6 = 0. We will go over the general proof, which ought to apply to the particular case, putting the two together. General Pboof. (True when b is greater than c.) ^— c is to be taken from a. If from a we take away 6, giving a—- 6, we have too little, be- cause only a part of b should have been taken away, namely, as much as is left after it has been lessened by c. Therefore, c too much has been taken away, and the true result is a^b-i-c. Particular Application. (Not admissible as reasoning in any case.) 0— c is to be taken from a. If from a we take away 0, giving a — 0, we have too little, be- cause only a part of should have been taken away, namely, as much as is left afler it has been lessened by c. Therefore, c too much lias been taken away, and the result is a — O + c (that is, a-\-c). The application of the reasoning needs no comment. Nothing has been taken away from a quantity, and yet it has been too much diminished — only a part of nothing should have been taken away, S 56 ON THE SYMBOLS OP ALGEBRA. and nothing should have been previously lessened. We will now subjoin the version we give of the equation a— ( — c) = a-{'C9 derived from the preceding part of this chapter. We have examined particular cases, and have always found that 0— c is the result of a mistake of one particular sort, namely, that the quantity represented by c is of the opposite nature to what we supposed it to be. And we have also found by examination, that as to addition and subtraction, all the operations have been inverted ; we have added where we should have subtracted, and subtracted where we should have added ; to which additional misapprehension we should have remained subject, had we not come to the irrational expression — c. Tlierefore, instead of a — (0 — c), we remember that — c should be c — or c, and in a — (0 — c) the first — is also the result of misconception, and should be +. Therefore a — (— c) is correctly written (not is equal to) a-^-c. Thirdly, we have found by examination, that if we continue any series of processes with the effects of the misconception uncorrected, we shall not introduce any errors but those which may be corrected, at any period we please, by the use of one simple rule, namely, apply no other rules except those which have been deduced in the case of rational expressions. It was found out that the rules of algebra might be applied with- out error to symbols of impossible subtraction, before the cause* of so singular a circumstance was satisfactorily explained. The conse- quence was, that many such reasonings as those in page 55 were universally received, and a language adopted in consequence which, as long as words have their usual meaning, is absurd. But, at the same time, every one must see that words are them- * I am far from asserting that the view I have taken will be easy, or that it is the only one which might have been given as satisfactory to those who can understand it. But I think that the matter of it, inde- pendent of the method of stating it, must he considered at least of incon- trovertible logical soundness. I am aware that many will think the connexion of —(—a) and + a to he more necessary than I have attempted to shew it to be ; and in the higher view of the subject, which no beginner could understand, it may be so ; but I think the exclusion of false analogies (to which the student is very subject in this part of the science) of more importance than the establishment of true ones. It will be easier for the pupil hereafter to acquire new ideas of relation, than to get rid of any he now acquires. OK THB SYMBOLS OF ALGEBRA. 67 selves sjmbols of oar own makingy over which there is unbounded oootrol consittently with reaton, provided onlj that what we mean by every word be distinctly known, so that we shall not draw conclusions from one meaning of a word, and then apply those conclusions to jDther meanings.* We have made some additions to common arithmetic^ and have found uses ibr symbols which were never contemplated in that science. It is suflBcient that we have demonstrated the uses of these symbols ; it now remains to find words by which to express the operations we diall emplof. There are two vniys of proceeding. 1. Whenever we want to signify an operation which is not wholly arithmetical^ we may invent a new term. This would load the science with difficult words, which, after all, would only have the eflfect of banishing tlie arithmetical words, and substituting others in their places ; for we cannot know whether we are proceeding with or without the misconceptions explained in this chapter, until the end of the process. We should therefore be obliged always to use the newly invented terms, to the exclusion of the others. 2. We may alter the meaning of th^ words already in use by extending them; that is, allowing them to mean what they already stand for, and more. In common language we are already well used to something like this, and, whenever we want a word to express one object, are in the habit of using one which belongs to another object having some resemblance to, or connexion with, the one we are to name. By this means, there is a word in the English language which stands for a receptacle, a seat, a small room, a small house, a plant , and a blow. But this is forming names by resemblance only, not by extension. We might instance the latter in the words arm^ mark, plain, &c. ; but it is to the sciences only that we must look for examples * As an illuBtration of our meaning : The word square, in algebra (as we shall see when we come to it), is made to mean a number multiplied by itself; in geometry, it means a well-known species of four-cornered figure. How this word came to have two meanings so different, the student will see if ever he studies the history of algebra, and will guess when he comes to apply algebra to geometry. But in the mean time, nothing that is proved of the square in algebra is to be therefore taken for granted of the square in geometry. The same word with two different meanings is the same as two different words. 58 ON THE SYMBOLS OF ALQEBRA.* of intentional extension, correctly managed. We take one out of the ^ numerous instances vvhich natural history affords. It is found con- yenieut to divide all animals into classes, comprising in each class those vvhich have certain common arrangements of teeth or other members. One particular class of animals contains the cat, which is the best known of its class. Instead of inventing a new word to signify this class, containing the cat, lion, tiger, panther, &c., they are' all called ca^<, and each has a particular additional name to distinguish it. Thus, the common cat is felU catus, the lion is felts leo, the tiger is felis tigris, the panther is felis parduSy he. Observe that what is here done is, to make the word felis (Latin for cat) mean less than in common discourse, and imply not the common animal, or any animal which agrees in all respects with it, but any animal which agrees with it only in those arrangements which are considered the distinguishing marks of the class. Consequently, by limiting the ideas which the word is meant to imply, the number of objects which come under it- is extended. And no mistake could arise by this means when one zoologist speaks or writes to another; though a third person, not- acquainted with their meaning, might think they believed that a cat- could run off with and devour a man. Similarly, in algebra, we have terms which are well understood in » arithmetic, and processes which we find carry us beyond the object of arithmetic, which is absolute number. But, both in the processes of: algebra, and in those of arithmetic, there are resemblances which wiU« make it convenient to classify together those which follow the same rules; and, in giving the names to classes, we shall, as previously described, limit the definition of the arithmetical terms so as to name the whole class by the arithmetical name. And when we speak of the process of arithmetic to which we have been accustomed, we ^hall prefix the word arithmeiical. Thus, by arithmetical addition, we mean the simple increase of one absolute number by another. But this will be, as we shall see, only one case of algebraical addition, or, as we shall call it, addition. Andf once for all, observe that in future every term has its extended or general algebraic meaning, except when the word arithmetical is prefixed. We shall now proceed to the limitations of the notions contained in the terms, or the extensions of the cases which come under them, whichever it may be called. 1. Quantity is applied in arithmetic to any number or fraction. ON THE SYMBOLS OF ALGEBRA. 59 In algebra, it is any symbol* which results from the rules of calcula- tion. We have the first effects of this in the following proposition. Quantities (as far as we have yet gone) are either positive or nega' iive. Arithmetical quantities are all positive. The latter part requires this remark, that + 6 is more than the symbol of 6 ; it is the symbol of one particular way of obtaining 6, namely, + 6, or adding 6 where there was nothing. But 3 -|- 3 is not identical with +6 in the operations indicated, but only in the result obtained; just as (a-\'x)(a — x) and a a — xx, which are not the same operations, always gire the same results. Positive and negative quantities are of diametrically opposite signi- Rations; if -{-a be a gain qf£a, — a is a loss of the same ; if-^-abe a loss of£a, — a is a gain of the same ; if -\- a be length measured ftorthward, — a is the same length measured southward ; and so on. This distinction has been sufficiently dwelt upon in a different form. If we suppose a gain, and the answer to our supposition (derived from a rational equation) is that the gain is a, then we were right in our supposition; but if the answer be — a, then we were wrong in tlie supposition, and we ought to have supposed a loss of £a. The extension here made consists in making the symbol of an error stand for the correction of that error. On this we must remark, that the extension avoids confusion only because there is but one way of making the wrong supposition right. If — a might indicate mis- takes of more than one kind, it would be wrong to let — a stand for the correction of one species, when the problem might oblige us to choose another. The application of algebra to geometry immediately suggests this sort of extension. Let A be a point, in a straight line indefinitely extended both ways ; measure A 6 to the right of A, and from B C A C B * A symbol is any thing which can be placed before the mind as a representation of any other thing. The term quantity is not applied according to its original meaning, even in arithmetic. This 2 is not a qtumtity (unless it be of printer's ink), hut a symbol, which denotes that a certain quantity, represented by 1, has been taken twice. Thus, 3 — 5 is a rational symbol, but not a S3rmbol of arithmetical quantity, because it proposes operations which contradict the arithmetical meaning of 3, — , and 5* 60 ON THE SYMBOLS OF ALGEBRA. mearnre B€ to tbe left of B. If A B be greftter tkao B C, the proper description of tbe position of C is ^ at a distance AB — BC on the rigbt of A/' But if BC be greater than AB, and we still say the same of C, we are warned of some mistake by the impossible subtrao- tion, and we see immediately that the proper designation of C's position is '< at a distaooe B€ — AB on the left oift'lT^ In conversation and writing, figurative extensions are so common that they have sometimes been appealed to as a justification of tbe processes we have been investigating. Id strict propriety, there is a repetition of ideas in the phrase '' to gain a gain/' and contradiction in " to lose a gain,*' in which the word '' to lose *' is used in the common sense of ^ not to get.'' Bat the most obvious analogy is in the words ^' to gain a loss,*' which is an ironies^ term applied to one who loses where he thought he should gain. And when we say, <' darkness went away," instead of ^ light came," we make a mistake* in a matter of fact which bears a close analogy to that which we have considered. In the application of matliematics to physics, we are liable to the error of imagining that a phenomenon may arise from matter being added to other matter, when in fact it arises from matter being taken away, and vice versa. This has happened in several instances, of which we will cite two of tlie most remarkable* 1. If glass be rubbed against leatlier in dry weather, both sub- stances acquire power to attitict small pieces of matter, which power is called electrical attraction, or electricity. It was at first supposed that friction made the leather communicate some fluid to the glass, so that the glass had more than its natural share, and the leather less. * These phrases are not introduced as illustrations or confirmations, hut precisely the reverse. They are an impediment, because the student may hy them be led to imagine iMt he sees reason in the use of Ae negative sign, independently of the proof given that it is merely a con- venient method in correction of unavoidable misconceptions. To warn him that he has not (from this work at least) any evidence of the pro« priety of negative quantities, other than that which he gets from observing what will come of using them, is tbe object of this note. If a tteaning is to be given to a term, which in its original use it will not hear, the more repugnant the phrases employed are to common ideas, the better in one respect ; because the less the student can find any thing like them i& his mother tongue, the more likely will he be to fasten upon them the explanation which they are meant to bear, and no other. ON THB SYMBOLS OF ALGBBRA. 61 Consec^uently, the glass was said to be positively^ and the leather twegatwely^ electrified ; and the phenomena of the latter were supposed to be caused by the subtraction of something from it. But succeeding experiments shewed it to be much more likely that the friction of the t.wo substances separated a compound fluid, substance, agent, or ^v?hatever it may be called, into two distinct component parts, having this quality, that when united in their natural proportions they attract nothing, but that either, when separated from the other, shews it by attraction. These were called the vitrcova and rninout electricities, because friction gave the first to gla»$y and the second to renn (as was Ibund). But many still retained the old names of positive and negative electricity; and this produced no inconvenience, because what we may call the mathematical phenomena of electricity remained the same on both theories, it being exactly the same in calculating effects, whether we suppose the cause of the effect to be removed, or a sufiicient quantity of something which destroys the efiect to be added. 2. Id burning a candle in a close vessel of air, it was observed that the air soon became incapable of allowing the process of burning to continue, and that the air produced was not fit to breathe. That an alteration had taken place was then certain ; and it was supposed that the burning candle gave out a fluid which mixed with the air. This fluid was called phlogiston (thing which makes flame). There- lore the effect of burning on air was supposed to be the addition of phlogiston. But it was afterwards discovered that in fact something is taken from the air when a body bums, which something is oxygen, found by other means to be a part of the mixture called air. Hence, the efiect of burning is the subtraction of oxygen. And if any chemi- cal calculation made on the theory of phlogiston were required to be aet right, it might be done on the supposition that -)- a of phlogiston is — a of oxygen, with the rules laid down in this chapter. 2. AdtUtion and Subtraction, The first term means the forming two expressions into one, retaining the proper signs; the second, forming two expressions into one by altering the sign of the one which is said to be subtracted. The following examples will shew that arithmetical addition and subtraction are particular cases of the term. 3-|-(5-.2) or 3 + (0 + 6-2) = 3+5-2 8-(6-2) or 8-(0 +6-2) = 8-6 + 2 62 ON THE SYMBOLS OF ALGBBRA. But addition and subtraction include such as the following: — 3 + (-5) is — 3 — 5 or —8 -3-(-5) is -3+6 or +2 3. Equal. Any two algebraical expressions, of which the on^ may be substituted for the other without error, are called equals and := is written between them. This, as before, includes arith — metical equality; for 5 + 3, which is arithmetically equal to 8, may be substituted for 8. But the algebraical term also applies to 3 — 7 and 10 — 14, page 46, to a+( — b) and a — b, and so on ; and the term will afterwards apply to still wider cases. For instance, we shall come to a species of misconception, which will give 1 — 1 +1 — 1 +1 — 1 + &c. continued for ever. where the true result is 4> This will be thus represented : J = 1 — 1+1 — 1+ &c. ad infinitum, 4. Greater and less; increase and decrease. The extension of the words addition and subtraction requires also the extension of these. The symbols of arithmetic are, 1 2 3 4 6, &c. and intermediate fractions; and the greater of any two is that which comes on the right. The numerical symbols of algebra are, I Arithmetical. —4 —3 —2—1 I +1 +2 +3 +4 «tc. in which the addition proceeds throughout as in the arithmetical series by the (here algebraical) addition of +1.. For -4 + 1 = -3 -1+1 = -3+1 = -2 + 1 = +1 -2 + 1 = -1 +1 + 1 = +2 Let the definition of greater and leu remain the same on both sides of the line; namely, that of any two quantities, the one which falls on the right is the ^greater. Thus —1 is called greater than — 2, +2 is greater than -—I, and so on. Hence, with the extended meaning of the words, we have the following proposition:* ♦ This is the proposition which has startled so many beginners, and not without reason, considering that they have frequently been intrc duced to it without any warning that greater and less have not their ON THE SYMBOLS OF ALGEBRA. 63 All positive quantities are greater than nothing; all negative quantities are less than nothing. Of two positive quantities, that is the greater which is arithmetically the greater; of two negative quantitia, that is the greater which is arithmeticalli/ the less. The extended terms increase and decrease will follow greater and less. Quantity is increased when it is made greater, and decreased when it i» made less. But the word smaller is always alfowed to retain its arithmetical meaning, without extension. N.B. We have now separated increase from addition, 8cc. Addition of . . {P^S;« } quantity cause, ^^^^} Subtraction of {^^ quantity causes {f---} The following propositions are also true : The greater the quantity added, the greater is the result. For example : — 7 is greater than — 10 3+(-7) 3 + (-10) for we see that — 4 — 7 Similarly, the less the quantity subtracted, the greater is the result. From 9 subtract —8, the result is +11; subtract less than —8, say —12, the result is +15, greater than +11. From — 4 subtract 7, the result is -^ 11 ; subtract less than 7, say — 3, and the result is — 4 — ( — 3), or — 1, greater than — 11. And it will be found that all such theorems relative to addition or subtraction as are true of arithmetical, will also be true of algebraical, quantities ; which is the particular advantage of our new definition. For instance, remark the following : If a be greater than b, a — b is positive ; if a be less than b, a — b is negative. Thus _3-(-4)=+l _3-(-2) = -l The signs of greater and less are > and < . Thus, For a is greater than b, write a > 6. For a is less than b, write a < 6, The angle is turned towards the greater quantity. In the sign of equality ^ there is no angle towards either quantity. arithmetical meaning, except when arithmetical quantities are mentioned. Those who object to it in its present shape, will of course object to the zoological supposition in page 58. 64 ON THE SYMBOLS OF ALGEBRA. 5. Mtdiiplkaiion and DivUion, These rules are, so ftir as the nu- merical quantities are concerned, the same as in arithmetic. The rule of signs, as we ha?e seen, is, like signs produce +, unlike signs — . + a6 is both +ax +6 and — a X —6 —aft is both —ax +6 and +ax —6 + « is both ±? and =^ — Y IS both -7-7 and -^- -f-O — D The terms greater and less cannot always be applied to pro- ducts as in arithmetic. For instance, 3>2, 5>4, and therefore, 3x5>2x4; but from 3 >— 2, —3> —4, it does not follow that 3x— 3> — 2X— 4, or — 9>8, but the contrary — 9<8. But it is seldom necessary to deduce the algebraical magnitude of a product from that of its factors ; we therefore leave to the student the collection of the different cases. 6. Proportion, Four quantities are said to be proportional when the first divided by the second is equsd to the third divided by the fourth. This definition is the same in words as the definition of proportion in arithmetic, but the words quantity, cUvided by,vnd equals have their extended signification. The words greater and less cannot always be applied as in arithmetic. Thus — - being — - we have 3: — 4:: — 6:8, where 3 is greater than —4, but — 6 is less than 8. We shall now apply our definitions to a problem, and shall choose the cases already noticed in page 45, as being two different problems when only equations of the first degree are to be used. A has £60, and is to receive the absolute balance that appears in B*s books, whether for or against B ; but C, who has £ 200, is to take B*s property and pay his debts. After doing this it is found that C's property is 3 times that of A. What is the absolute balance for or against B ? Let X be this balance, positive or negative according as it is for or against B ; then A has 60 + x, the positive sign being used* when x * For A's property is to be increased on either supposition ; hence, if the balance be + 3, he must have 60 + ( + 3) ; if it be —3, he must have 60-(-i i ON THE SYMBOLS OF ALGEBRA. 65 i« positive, the negative when x is negative. But C ha» 200 + x; ^erefore, 3(60±x) = 200 + ar or ± 3a: = 20 + a: Tfais contains two equations, one for the positive, one for the negative s^gD. But irom it follows that ±3arx±3a: = (20 + x)(20 + x) in which the first side is -f Qjtjt in both cases, for — 3j:X — 3x *Dci -f 3-r X + 3 jr, are the same, namely, + 9 jtjt. Therefore, +9a;ar = 400 + 40a; + ara; or 8ara;-40jr~400 = (•^)8 xx-bx-^bO = M^hen we come to the solution of equations of the second degree, ""^ shall find that this equation can be true only for two values of x ; either x = 10, or j: = — 5. That is, the balance is either £lO for B, ®' •=€ 5 against him ; which are the solutions already found in page 45. iTiat either 10 or — 5 will satisfy the preceding, may be shewn as follovrs : ar = 10 a: = —5 XX = 100 XX = 25 —5a: = —60 —5a: = +25 -50 = -50 -50 = -50 a:a:— 5a:— 50 = a:a:— 5a:— 50 = ^ince the extensions of algebra have been so laid down that the '"^^^a for managing algebraical quantities when they are not arith- '^^tical are the same as those which must be employed when they ^^ arithmetical, it follows that the arithmetical case of a problem may *^ t^en as a guide ; for, to say that certain operations follow the same ^^^ as in arithmetic, or that we must proceed as if the operation was ^ntbmetical, is only the same thing in different words. Up to page 56 we have considered the symbols of algebra, which are not arithmetical, as results of misconception, and have called the rules by which they are treated corrections. In page 59, &c., by pro- perly laying down definitions, these same symbols are recognised and expected, so that the term erroneous no longer applies to them. The student should not immediately give over the first method ofcon- G 2 66 ON THB SYMBOLS OF ALOEBRA. tidering them, but should frequently, while employed upon the rules (pages 49y &c.), make himself sure that he understands the con- nexion of the preceding method with those rules ; and in future we may accordingly employ both methods, it being always understood that when the first is used, the extensions required by the second are dropped for the moment. The following examples of the use of the rules are added for practice. Such symbols as a and — a are used indiscriminately, it being remembered that they mean the same thing in practice, but are referred to two different methods of considering the subject in theory. 8x4-?-3=10| 8x4-j.3 = -10| or lo| 6+4-12 = 2 (- -6) + (- -8) + (- -13) zss -27 ab -\- cd m cd — ab m (; -'')x(- — d b)xc s= abc d f X C a + 6 a-^-b -a-( o+(- -6) = -1 ab-^ba = «(- -b) + b{ -«) = -2a6 abc = abc = abc = abc 55; ^abc EQUATIONS OF THE FIRST DEGREE. 67 CHAPTER III. EQUATIONS OF THE FIRST DEGREE WITH MORE THAN ONE UNKNOWN QUANTITY. Let there be such an equation as x+y = 12 resulting from a problem which involves two unknown quantities, X and y. Such a .one is the following : 1 1 1 A C B Problem. A is a given point in a straight line, and B and C are two other points. From A to half-way between B and C it is six feet. What are the distances of B and C from A ? Let us take as our principal case that in which B and C are both on the same side of A. Let AB = j; feet, AC = y feet; then BC = X — y, and from B to half-way between B and C the distance is i(x — y) ; whence from A to the same middle point the distance is X — Q ( '*' — yj which is therefore = 6 (x)2 2a;-(a:-3/) = 12 or x-hy =^ 12 Here the problem is what is called indeterminate, that is, ad- mitting of an infinite number of solutions. All that is laid down relative to x and y is found to do no more than require that their sum shall be 12, which can be satisfied in an infinite number of ways; for all the following cases are solutions, and others might be made at pleasure. ar= 1 y= 11 _ 1 ^ "" 2 , = "! X rrz 2 y = lO _4 y= »| ar = 3 y= 9 a; = 3? y= 4 &c. &C. &c. &c. X = 15 y = -3 a: = 16 y = -4 X = 14 y = 3 5 &c. &c. 68 EQUATIONS OF THE Again, when either j: or y is taken negatively, we have solutions such as the following : a: = -1 y = +13 a: = — 2 y = +14 a:= «ll y= +13i &c. &c. the first column corresponding, with the explanations before given at pages 14-19, to the case in which B only is at the left of A; and the second to the case in which C only lies to the left of A. Thus, if B be 1 foot to the left of A, and C 13 feet to the right, the middle point between C and B is at 6 feet distance from A to the right. Observe that we cannot in this equation of the first degree, j;+y = 12, include the cases in which the middle point falls to the left of A ; for since this quantity 6, given in the problem, has been treated throughout as an arithmetical (or algebraical positive, see page 59) quantity, the equation formed from it cannot include those cases of the problem in which the corresponding line is so measured that its symbol ought to be negative.* From the preceding and similar cases, we deduce the following principles : 1 . One equation between two unknown quantities admits of an infinite number of solutions ; either of the unknown quantities may be what we please, and the equation can be satisfied by giving a proper value to the other. 2. A problem which gives rise to such an equation is indetermi- nate, or admitting of an indefinite number of solutions. Let us now suppose two equations, eacl) containing the same two unknown quantities. For instance, x+y = 12 3a:-2y = 31 * On reading the problem again, therefore, we perceive either that we have not Bu£ficiently defined it, by omitting to state whether the six feet is to the right or the left of A, or else that there are two problems involved in it, as in page 45, or that these two must be represented in one equation of the second degree, as in page 64. For the student who is disposed to try to represent the two cases in one equation, we give the result, namely, «« + ]/y + 2xi/ «= 144. FIRST DE6RBB. 69 the first (considered by itself) has an infinite number of solutions ; so also has the second. As follows : Solutions of the Solutions of the first equation. second equation. ar =» 10 y-=2 ar= 10 1 x = 10i y = li x=10i 1 y = 4 ar= 11 y = l ar= 11 y= 1 X-U\ 4 3 y=4 X = lli 4 11 &c. 8cc. &c. &c. We have taken the same set of values for x in both ; and we iind the corresponding values of y different, generally speaking, but the same in one particular case : that is, we find a set of values x = 11, ^ = 1, which satisfies both equations. The question now is, among all the infinite number of sets of values which satisfy one or the other equation, how many are there which satisfy both ? There is only one, as we shall find from the following process of solution. l{x-\-y = 12, it follows that x = 12 — y. Substitute this value of Jr in the second equation (which maybe done, since the solutions of the second which we wish to obtain are only those which are also solu- tions of the first), and we find 3(12 — y) — 2y = 31, or 36 — 5i/ = 31, or ^ = 1 . It appears then, that the supposition of both equations being true at once consists with no other value of y except 1, or (since x-\-y = 12) oi x except 11. Let the equations proposed be ax-\'by = c poc + qy = t where a, 6, c, p, q, and r, are certain known quantities. First Method, Obtain a value of one of the unknown quantities from one equation and substitute it in the other. The resulting equa- tion will then have only one unknown quantity. From the first equation, X = a which value substituted in the second gives a ^•^ -^ aq — bp X = 70 EQUATIONS OF THE To obtain x, find y from the first equation, and repeat the process, which gives c — ax . Qc-^oax co —> br Or substitute the value of ^ first obtained in the previous expression for X ; thus, c — bt/ , bar^~bcp o ' y "■ aq — bp 1 caq—'Cbp — {bar — bcp) caq — bar ^ aq — bp aq — bp __ fl(c9--6r) . c^by __ cq-^br 09 — op a aq — bp Verification. If x = ^^^, and y = ^^^ ay — bp^ •^ ay — 6/> ax + by = — ^ — r — i- •^ aq^bp aq — bp acq — bcp c^aq^^bp) aq — bp aq — bp cpq — bpr aqr — cpq px + qy = -^ — v^ + ^ p- = r •*^ ^»7 aq-^bp aq — bp Second Method. Multiply both the equations in such a Way that the terms which contain the same unlcnown quantities may have the same co-eflicient ; then add or subtract the two results, whichever will cause the similar terms to disappear. Generally, the shortest method is : Multiply each equation by the co-efficient which the quantity not wanted has in the other equation. To find y. ax + by = c (x)j? pax-\-pby =i pc px + qy = r (x)a pax + qay = ar (— ) oyy— ij^y = ar^cp , V ar — cp {-r)aq-bp y = j^:^ To find X, ax-j-by = c (x)y (iqx + bqy = qc px + qy = r (x)& bpx + bqy = hr ( — ) aqx^bpx = cq-^br . . cq — br FIRST DEGREE. 71 Third Method. Obtain a value of one of the unknown quantities from each of the equations, and equate the values so obtained. c — ox c ^ 6y From the first equation y =s — r — x ^ =- From the second equation y =s ^-— x ^ 2j_ •^ 9 P C ^ ax r — px eg — br b q a(f — bp a p " aq — bp Let the student now repeat all the three processes with the fol- lowing equations (see page 38). ^ . __ cb'^bc i I y "" ab'^bu' (1.) 3a:-2y = 14 (x)2 6a;-4y = 28 2ar+3y = 100 ( x )3 6ar4-9y = 300 (-) 13y = 272 y = 20{| (x)3 9a;-6y = 42 (x)2 4a:+6y = 200 ( + ) 13a: = 242 j: = 18:^ (2.) X'\-y = a x—y = b ( + ) 1x = a + 6 a: = ''"*" (— ) 2y ^ a—b y= 2 (3.) px-\-y = 1 ^—py == 2 The first is px+y = 1 Tlie second, ( X )/? px—ppy = 2p (-) y+ppy ^l-^p y = i^ij 2 pp p l-^pp ^ 72 EQUATIONS OF THE (4.) 3a:— 7 = 4-|-(a:+y) or 2x— y =11 2y + 79 = bx or 6j:— 2y = 79 The first, ( X )5 10a:-6y = 65 The second, (x)2 10a:— 4y = 158 (-) y = 103 From the first, x = ^^^ = 57 2 (5.) 3a:-f 4y = 13 4a:+6y = 10 (x)4 12a: + 16y = 52 (x)3 12a: + 15y = 30 (-) y = 52-30 = 22 (x)5 15a:-f-20y = 65 (x)4 16a:-f-20y = 40 (-) a: = 40-65 = —25 the problem producing these equations must therefore be treated as before described. . ax + by = C cq^hr ar^cp Havmg given a: = -^ y ^ px-i-qy = r ag^bp ^ aq — bp we may find the following : f ax^by = C ^ ^ cq-^br ^ cp^ar ) \px—qy = r aq^bp ^ aq^bp^ f ax—by = C ^ _ cq-\-br _ flr+^j On looking at the two first sets of equations, we see that they differ in this, that + by and + qy in the first are replaced by — by and — qy in the second. But we know that ax — by\& the corrected form of axH-6y (see page 46, &c.), and px — qy of px + qy; and since we have proved that the corrections may be deferred to any stage of the process, it follows that we may take the solutions of ax -^ by =^ C eg — br ar — cp px + qy = r ^q — bp aq — bp and conclude, that the corrected solutions will be the true result of the corrected equations. This if done will give results as above; for the value of x, corrected by the rules in page 52, gives --cq-^-br br — cq cq-^br — ■ L or A or -^ T (Page 64). — aq -\-bp bp — aq aq — bp ^ ° ' FIRST DEGREE. 73 ax—by^cz by—ax^cz &c. Or as ax + by-\'CZ ax-i-by-i-cZy &c. ax-\-bi/-i-cZy &c. and a similar process must be followed for j^.* In this way, any results derived from an expression such as ajr + J^ + cz, may be made to furnish the corresponding results which would have been derived from ax — bi/ — ez, cz + by — ax, or any other variation -which is only in sign. We write underneath the different cases which may arise, and the manner of referring them to the one which is chosen as the representative of all. The ollowing May be considered as ax + by^cz ax-^by + cz ax + by-^-cz ax + by + cz &c. Any other case may be taken as the representative of the whole : thus, if it were ax — by — cz, then ax-\-by-\- cz must be considered as ax— by — cz, &c. Problem, f On the intersection of straight lines. Principle. It is proved in geometry, that if any angle BOA (for simplicity, we use a right angle) be drawn, and a straight line A B cutting the sides which contain it in A and B, and if from P, any point between A and BX parallels be drawn, PN to OA, and PM to OB, and if OA, OB, PM, and PN be measured in inches, or teuths of inches, or any other convenient unit (provided it be the same for all) ; then (PM meaning, not the line itself, but the number of units in it) the product of PM and O A, added to the product of PN and OB, will be equal to the product of O A and O B, or PMxOA + PNxOB = OAxOB • Atte:id here to the remarks in the Preface, on the necessity of working more examples than are given in the book. t If the beginner have no knowledge of the most common terms of geometry, he must either acquire it, or omit this problem altogether. X From this supposition we start; we shall afterwards make use of H e 74 EQUATIONS OF THB Let there be two such lines, AB and A'B' (draw a large figure and insert A'B'), cutting one another in the angle BO A in P ; having given OA, OB, O A', and OB', required the value of PM and PN. Let OA = 10 units 0A'= 7 units OB = 8 .. 0B'= 15 .. PN = a: units PM=y .. Then, because P is on the line AB (preceding principle), OAxPM+OBxPN = OAxOB or 10y+8a: = 80 Again, because P is also on A'B' (similar reason), OA'xPM + OB'xPN = OAxOB' or 7y + 16ar = 105 Here then are two equations which y and x must satisfy. Solving them by either of the preceding methods, we have a: 01 PN is 5-3 units; V or PM is 3-= units. General Case, Let OA = a units OA' = a units. OB = 6 .. 0B'= 6' .. PN = a: units PM=y .. The equations to be solved, which are followed by the solution at length, as at page 70, will then be ay + bx = ab a'y + b'x = ab' ady + a'bx = acdb ab'y + bb'x = abb' aa'y + ab'x = aa'b' a'by-\-bb'x = a'bb' (a'b'^ab')x = aa'(b^b') {a'b'-ab')y = bb'ia'-^a) , b — h' , • , a! — a ah — ah ^^ ah — ah the preceding theory of algebraical symbols to extend our results to the case where P is not between A and B. AH words in xialxci point out what is peculiar to the first case. In the preceding ^ure aie fbur lines, AB, CD, EF,aDd GH, cuttiog the axes* in aa many diSerenl ways as is possible, that is, no tno inNnecting both OA and B on the same side of O. Tiiere are theniore, six points of intersection (as in the figuTe), and (he perpendiculara drawn from them to the aies O A and O fi are inserted ; but no letters are put to tbem, it being understood that P is * Aim, the principsl Ui nutntioned, and bngtliened in both diiecUoni. ■md O B containing the angle liiit 76 EQUATIONS OF THE the point of intersection under consideration,* while P M and P N are the perpendiculars, as in the first figure. Let the distances at which the four lines cut the axes be as follows, in numbers of the unit chosen : OA = 3 0C = 8 0E = 4 OG = 2 OB = 6 0D = 3 OF = 2 OH = 4 Let us first take the intersection of A B and C D. Place the point P at this intersection, and let P M = ^ and P N = j?, as in the first figure. Then, because P is on the line A B, we have, from the prin- ciple stated at the outset, 3y + 6ar = 18 But on looking at the line C D, we observe^ 1 . That the principle does not apply directly to it, because C D is not contained in the angle BOA, but in the contiguous angle BOC. 2. That OC (in length 8 units) is not measured in the direction OA, but in the contrary direction. If, therefore, we write 8 instead of 8, and with this form the same equation as we should have formed if O C had been measured towards A, we shall then, by correcting the equation as in page 66, obtain another equation with which to proceed .f That is, because the point P is on C D, we have 8y -f 3a: = 8 X 3 or (page 66) ^8y + 3x == 24 = -24 or 8y-3:r = 24 [For, since 3x — 8^ = — 24 denotes that 8^ exceeds 3jr by 24, this may be written 8^ — 3 j: = 24.] Solving the two equations thus obtained, namely, 3y + 6a:=18] r^=l^ 8y-3x = 24j [^ = 3^ which, with the succeeding results, may be verified by measurement, as well as firom the equations. * Let the studeut draw this figure on a large scale in iuk> and mark the letters belonging to the point under consideration in pencil, to be rubbed out on passing to a new point. t We cannot refer to any single page here. This principle is the total result of Chapter IL FIRST DEOBEE. 77 To apply the same method to every case^ we must distinguish all the lines OA, OB, &c. by the negative sign, which do not fall in the directions of O A or O B. That is, OA = 3 0C = 8 0E = 4 OG = 2 0B = 6 0D = 3 0F = 2 OH = 4 Proceeding with these as in the last case, we have as follows : Intersection of Equations. Corrected equations. 1. ABand CD^--^ — ^ \ (8^-|-3a; = 24 83/-3a: = 24 ) 2. ABandEF^-^ _ - _ ^ \ (4y + 2a;=4x2 4j^+2a:= -8 3 3. AB and GH ' ^ ^ 2y + 4ar = 2x4 2y 4-6x=18 ) -4ar= -si 4.CDandEFi^y+^^ = ^^ 8y-3a; = 24 J I4y + 2a:=4x2 \y^-1x^ -8 J 5.CDandGHpy+^^ = ^'5 8y-3a;=24 J (2y4-4a;=2x4 2y-4a; = -8 J 6.EFandGHp2^+^^=^^'^ 4y + 2a; = -8^ t2y+4a:=2x4 2y-4a; = -8 S These corrected equations are some of them sot arithmetically true ; for instance, 4y-f 2i' = — 8. But remember that they are made on the supposition that PM(y) and PN {x) are measured in such a direction that P falls within the angle AO B; which may not be the case. We may, however, apply the rules in page 70 to their solution ; of which we shall give one case (the second) complete, as follows : 3y -f 6j; = 18 4y 4-2ar = -8 Multiply the second equation by 3. 12y-f-6j; = -8x3 or 12^^ + 6.r = -24 Subtract this from the first, which gives H 2 78 EQUATIONS OF THE (3-12)y = 18- (-24) = 18 + 24 = 42 ^"■3 — 12""— 9"" 9"" 3 From the first equation^ _ 18-3j^ __ 18-3(— 4j) _ 18+14 ^ ^1 6 6 6 3 On placing the point P at the intersection of AB and EF, we see tliat PM {y) is measured in a contrary direction to the one supposed, and PN {x) in the same direction, as would be pre- sumed from the negative sign of the first, and the positive sign of tl)e second. Proceeding in the same way, we have the following values of x and y in the six cases : Intersection of, Value of x(PN). Value of^ 1. AB and CD ■A 3^ 2. AB and EF 4 -*l 3. AB and GH 4 1 4. CD and EF -^ 6 7 5. CD and GH ^ 4« 13 6. EF and GH 4 5 5 [Remember that in such an expression as — IJ, the — refers to the whole ; that is, it is — (1 +1) or — 1 — 4, not — l+i-] Upon examining the six lines by a well-constructed figure, it will appear that whenever an answer is negative, it is measured in a direction contrary to that which was supposed in the principle at the beginning. The corrections might have been deferred to the end of the process, in the following manner : The equations (see page 74) ay -\-bx = ab ci'y + b'x = a'b' give X •=^ aa 77 77 y = 00 -n t, ^ ab — ab •^ ub — ab' FIRST DEGREE. 79 Take the two following sets (the second being case 6), ay '\'bx =i ab 4y + 2a; = 4x2 a'y + b'x = a'b' 2y -f 4a: = 2 x 4 which agree if a = 4 4 = 2 a'=2 4 = 4 Substitute these values in the expressions for x and y, which give, a: = 4x2x-iz±= .=(«8)x.=l±± 1X2-4X4 -4-16 = (-8)x(-^) =i? = 5 y==2x4x ^_^, _ = 8X"-A = ^2^ 2X2 — 4X4 20 5 the same as before. We leave this problem, and proceed. We have shewn, page 67, that one equation between two unknown quantities admits of an infinite number of solutions; and that a second equation must be given by the problem, or it is not reducible to a single answer. But this second equation must be independent of the first, that is, must not be one of those which can be reduced to the first. For instance, x -\-y = 1 2 admits of an infinite number of solutions; and if the second equation be either of the following, 2j:+2y = 24 3a;-f3y = 36 ^a;-f^y = 6 til tC 3a:-18 = 18-3y 2x+y = 24-y, &c. the same infinite number of solutions will still exist; for if j:4-^ =s 12, all the equations just given must be true. That is, instead of giving two equations, we have only given the same equation in two different forms. Now, we have already found (page 25), that in one case the index of an infinite number of results was the appearance of the result in the form -. We proceed to see whether this will be the case here. ,n ^(lX-\-by = c ) , cq — hr ar — cp If < ^ > then X = -^ T- y = r- IpX-^qy = r ) aq^bp ^ aq^bp To try a case in which the second equation is dependent on the first, suppose p =s ma g = Tnb r = mc 80 EQUATIONS OF THE in which case the second equation becomes max-^mby = mc (-r-)m aar-fJy = c the same as the first. Substitute the above values of p, q^ and r, in the values of x and y^ which gives cmb^bmc amc — etna amb^~btna ^ amb^-^bma in which the same anomaly appears as in page 25, and with the same interpretation. If there be three unknown quantities, by reasoning similar to that in page 67y we may shew that there must be as many as three inde- pendent equations, or else the problem admits an infinite number of solutions. We will shew in one instance the method of proceeding. Let 2ar + 4y-3z = 10 (1) 5x^37j+2z = 20 (2) 3a:-f2y+5z = 50 (3) Multiply both sides of (1) by 2, and of (2) by 3, in the results of both of which z will have the same coefficient. Equ.(l)x2 4x + 8r/^6z ^ 20 Equ. (2) X 3 15a;-9y-|-6z = 60 ( + ) 19a:-y = 80 (4) Repeat a similar process with equations (2) and (3). Equ. (2) X 5 25a:-15y-f 10;^ = 100 Equ. (3) X 2 6ar+ 4y+10z = 100 (-) 19j;— 19y = (-j-)19 a;— y = or a: = y (5) Two equations are thus found (4) and (5), containing x and y only, not z. These solved, give 40 40 Substitute these values in either of the three given equations, the econd, for example. Then FIRST DEGREE. 8l There is an artifice^ which is useful when one only of the three unknown quantities is required. Suppose, for example, that in the preceding equations only the value of z is wanted. Take two new quantities, m and n, not yet known, but afterwards to be determined in any manner that may be convenient, f Since the two sides of an equation may be multiplied by any quantity, multiply (2) by »w, and (3) by n, and add the results to (1). This will give (2+5m-f3w)a; + (4— 3m+2w)y +(2m+67i— 3)2? = 10-|-20m-f50w..(A) Since m and n may be taken at pleasure, and since the value of 2 only is wanted, let m and n be such that 2+5m+3n = or 5wi-f 3w = —2 4— 3»H-2w = or 3m— 2n = 4 uien m and n must be the solutions of the preceding equations, which give w = — , n = — -—. But in (A) the terms which contain x and y disappear, being multiplied by 0. Therefore, (2m+57i— 3)z = 10-f 20m-f 50/1 z = 2m+5n-3 2x^+6(-|)-3 (Multiply numerator and denominator of this fraction by 19, and reduce it), _ 10X19 + 20X8 — 50X26 _ —950 _ 950 _ 50 — 2X8 — 5X26 — 3X19 "" —171 ~ 171 "" 9 Anomalies, A problem may give rise to two equations which are absolutely incompatible with each other, such as the following : x-\-y = 12 x+y = 13 or it may happen, that if there be three unknown quantities and three equations, one of the latter may be impossible if both the others be true, though it be not inconsistent with either of the others singly. For instance, take x-—!/ = 10 y— z = 11 x—z = 12 • An artifice is a name given to any process by which either the prfhciple or practice of any method is shortened, either generally, or in any particular case. t Such quantities are usually called arbitraiy. 82 EQUATIONS OF THE FIRST DEGREE. The 1st and 2(1 are true ifx = 20 ^ = 10 ;?=— 1 The 1st and 3d .... a? = 20 y = 10 Z = 8 The 2d and 3d .... a? = 20 ^ = 19 Z=8 But no values of x, y, and s can satisfy all three together, as will be evident by adding the first two. For if x — y = 10, and y — ;; ^ 11, then (^ — y) + (y — ^) — 21 or a? — ;2; = 21 which is inconsistent with the third equation. It is lefl to the student to examine the general solution in page 70, and to shew that when the two equations become incompatible, the values of x and^ take the form discussed in page 21, namely, that of a fraction which has for its denominator. It might also be shewn, that the problems which give rise to incompatible equations admit of an interpretation similar to that already derived from results u of the form - in the page last quoted. It will be found, that two equations such as are treated in thb chapter will in no case become inconsistent except when they can be so reduced as to have their first sides identical, and their second sides different; such as 2a: + 3y = 10 2x^Zy « 12 The subtraction of the first from the second would give as 2, an absurdity of the same character as ax ^sz ax -^c (page 23), from which the form - was ^st derived. ^ OV BXPONfiNTS, 83 CHAPTER IV. ON EXPOHENTS, AND ON THE CONTINUITY OF ALGEBRAIC EXPRESSIONS. The coDtinoal occurrence of the multiplication of the same quantity two, three, or more times by itself, has rendered some abbreviations necessaiy, which we proceed to explain. r- * multiplied by a*, or XX^ is called the second power of jr. F ^^ a:, or XXXy the third power of x. * ^^^ • • • • ar, or XXXX, the fourth power of x. and so on. Or, n ares* multiplied together give what is called the I nth power of x. The second and third powers are usually called the ^9^^e and cube. Thus jcjt is called the square of x, and is read ' sgrutre; and xxx is called the cube of x, and is read x cube : and a number multiplied by itself is said to be squared ; multiplied twice by itself, it is said to be cubed, &c. By an extension, x itself is called the first power of x. The abbreviated representation of a power is as follows : over the letter raised to any power, on the right, place the number of times the letter is seen in that power. Thus, arj: is written x^ n^ fl^ n/> fy» 'W' JU *Mj JU %A/ ••».•»». ju and so on. Here 2, 3, 4, &c. are called exponents of x. Similarly, (a + 6) X (a + b) is written (a + hf (a-l-6)x(a + 6)x(a + J) (a + J)' and so on. The following results may now be easily found : * The beginner's common mistake is, that x multiplied n times by x is the Bth power. This is not correct ; x multiplied once by x (^xx) is the gecond power ; x multiplied n times by x is the (ft + l)th power. 84 ON EXPONENTS. XXX = x^ x^xx s= x^ ar* X a: = o;*, &c. {a-^xf = a« + 2aa:+a:« (a—xy = a^-~2ax+x^ {a + x){a^x) = a^^x^ {a^+ax+a^){a—x) = a^^x^ {a + bf = aH3tt26+3aJ2 + 63 {a^bf = a-^-3tt2& + 3a6«-ft3 To multiply together any two powers of the same letter ^ let the exponent of the product he the sum of the exponents of the factors. Thus, to multiply x^ and j:*, x^ is XXX X^ is XXXX a?xx^ is xxxxxxx or oc^ or a:^+* By the extension previously made of calling x the first power of ir, and considering it as having the exponent 1, or as being j?*, this rule includes the case where x itself is one of tlie factors. Thus, x^ XX = a^ 01 x^ xx^ ^=^ a;7+^ = afi Examples, a;* x x^^ = x^^ x^ X ar^* = x^'^ xxx^xx^xx^ ^ x^^ a^xa^ = a^^ 3 a 6« X 4 a2 J = Ua^b'' 2abxab = 2a%^^ the latter term, written at full length, would be aaabbbbbbbcceeeeeeeeeeeeeffffff To divide a power by another power of a less exponent, subtract the exponent of the divisor from that of the dividend. For instance, what is x^° divided by j:*? Since 10 is 7 + 3, or since jr*° = jr' x ^ (-T-)^ -y = j:' or x^°-\ Similarly, or^ -f- x (or x^) = x^; a-^^-i- ^yii = j' orx; j:"-f- x^=:x^; j:«+6 -;-i« = a*; a^b^c^^abc = abc^. Anomaly 1. If we apply this rule to the division of x^ by a*, we have j«-^ JT^ — j.a-&. If it should be afterwards found that a = 6, the preceding result becomes j«-o or x®, a symbol which as yet has no meaning. We return, therefore, to the original operation, which is, to divide x^ by x^ where i = a, or, which is the same thing, to divide x^ by x^. The answer is evidently 1. ON EXPOKEKTS. 85 Now why, instead of 1, the rational answer, did we obtain af^, which has no meaning? Because we applied the preceding rule to a case which does not fall under it. That rule was, '' to divide a power by another power of a ksi exponent,'' &c., and was derived from the preceding rule of multiplication, which rule of multiplication di4 not apply to any cases except where both factors were powers of Xf and, consequently, where the exponent of the product was greater than the exponent of either factor; that is, where x^ is the product, and a^ one of the factors, that rule does not apply unless b be less than a. When we come to this symbol (j:^ we must do one of two things, either, 1. Consider x^ as shewing that a rule has been used in a case to which it does not apply, strike it out, and write 1 in its place ; or, 2. Let j° (which as yet has no meaning) stand for 1 ; in which case the rule does apply, and gives the true result. Therefore, we lay down the following definition. JB|y any letter with the exponent 0, such as a®, we mean 1 ; or every quantity raised to the power whose exponent is 0, is 1. Anomaly 2. If we apply the equation j;« -f- x* ^ a^-& to a case in which b is greater than a, say i ^ a + 6, the mere rule gives a result which has no meaning. The reason is as before ; a rule has been applied to a case to which it was not meant to apply. To find the rational result, remember that x^-^^ := x** x x^; and X** x^ 1 j:«+6 x^ X x^ 7 the last result being obtained by dividing both numerator and deno- minator of the preceding fraction by x^. The following are similar instances ; in the first column is the rational process, in the second the (yet) improper extension of the rule : x^ X* "" 3^ 1 X^ , X X x^^ x^ 1 x" x" 1 x^ " x'\a^ ~~ 3^ X ^2 -5 = a:^-8 -« ^-6 1 ;y.l7-20 — «.-.3 86 ON EXPOKEKTS. To make the rule applicable, we must agree that /*»""1 /*»""0 /*»""3 (which as yet have no meaniDg) shall stand for tliat is, instead of x-^ being the sign that the result is to be abandoned, and 1 -7- j: written in its place, we agree that ar-^ shall mean the same as l-~-x. And we are at liberty to give x^^ any meaning we please, because as yet it is without meaning. We lay down, therefore, the following deBnition : A letter with a negative exponent means unit^ divided hy the same letter with the same numerical exponent taken positively ; or, 1 X means — X* Our two rules for multiplication and division will now be found to be universal. The following are instances, arranged as before : 1. 1 1 X^ X^ 5 ' »^ ^^— ^^ •— y ^—^ ^^ _^^ ^^ Q* X^ ' x^ x^ 1 x^ ^ 2._^ 1_ •^ ^ x^^ x^" x^ 1-i- 4 — J- J_=:JL = 1 .r * x^ X* x^+* J"' We have now added to our first definition of an exponent in such a way that two fundamental rules remain true in all cases where the exponents are any whole numbers, positive or negative. These rules are, afxa^ = af-^^ of" -^ a:^ = af'^ But we have no meaning for a number or letter with ^fractional exponent, such as x^ x^ x^ x^^ x'^^ &c. Instead of waiting until some improper extension of the preceding rules shall force us to the consideration of the manner in which it will be most convenient to give meaning to the preceding symbols, we shall endeavour to anticipate this step. And first we shall ask what should x^ mean, in order that the preceding rule may apply to it? In this case, since \'\-\ = 1, we must so interpret x* that x^xx^ = a;* "^4 =• x^ or x ON EXPONENTS. 87 consequently, jr« is that quaDtity which, muliiplied by itself, gives x, or is what is called in arithmetic the square root of x. Similarly, since i + i + i = l> ^^ must so interpret x* that x^xx^xx^ = x*"*"*"*"* = X* or a: that is, x* must be the cube root of x. By a root of x we mean the inverse term to power; that is, if m is the third power of n, n is called the third root of m. As follows : Name of n. Square root of m Cube root of m Fourth root of m FifU) root of m &c. Equation implied in the fore- going name, nn = m nnn = m nnnn ^ m nnnnn = m &c. Thus, 4096 is a number which has exact squart;, cul}e, fburtli, mid sixth, and twelfth roots. Its square root is 64 because 64 x 64 = 4096 Its cube root is 16 16x16x16 = 4096 Its fourth root is 8 .... 8x8x8x8=4096 Its sixth root is 4 .... 4x4x4x4x4x4 = 4096 Its twelfth root is 2 r 2X2X2X2X2X2) ^^^^ { ^ >= 4096 tx2X2x2x2x2x2j These results should, if the preceding interpretation can be relied on be thus expressed : 64 = (4096)* 8 = (4096)i 16 = (4096)i 4 = (4096)* 2 = (4096)''' But, according to the notation best known in arithmetic, they would* be thus expressed : * -v/ is deriyed from the letter r, the initial of radix, or root. This Bymbol is now generally used for the square root, which, in ninety-nine out of a hundred of the applications of algebra, is the highest root which 'veill occur. 88 ox EXPOXBSTS. 64 = V^4096 8 =: V4096 16 = 1^4096 4 = V4096 2 = V4096 Proceeding with the interpretation of the fractional exponents, '^ ought to signify the cube root of x* ; for, if the preceding rules are to remain true, we must hare and, by the same sort of reasoning, we may conclude that x» should stand for the nth root of i^. But here we may shew that we cannot decide upon the propriety of the preceding interpretation without some further acquaintance with the connexion between roots and powers. For instance, a^i or a:*+* ought to be a;* x a:* or a^V^x But 2| is I; therefore, X ought to be ^ or v3? Consequently, x^ vx ought to be V^ where, by " ought to be," we mean that if it be not so, we cannot,* under the preceding interpretation, apply the common rules of arith- metic to our assumed fractional exponents. Again, since \-\-\ = |, x' X x^ or vx X ^x ought to be a;« or V^ but as yet we have neither proved that a:* Vx = V^ or that Vx x V^ = VI? For the purpose of shewing that the conjectural interpretation as yet given leads to no erroneous results, we premise the following arithmetical theorems. Theorem I. If a be greater than b, than a* is greater than ^, a^ than 6^, &c. For aa is then the result of a multiplication in which more than b is taken more times than there are units in b ; therefore a a is greater than bb: in a' or a^a, more than 6' is tal^en more times * The student must remember that we are perfectly free to make x ^ imd av mean different things, if we only take care not to confound the two. But it would be inconvenient that SJ should any where have a meaning different from that of {. ON EXPONENTS, 89 ^^n there are units in h, and so on. By changing the order in which ^« letters are named, the theorem may be differently worded, thus : ^b be less than a, then 6* is less than a*, &c. Tkeorem II, If a be greater than b, a~' is lets than 6~*, a~* is leu than b~*. For if a be greater than b, - is less than j- ; and since, in that case, a? is greater than h^, therefore —^ is less than t-,» ^nd so on. Similarly, if a be less than b, a"^ is greater than b~^, &c. Theorem III, If a be c^ua/ to b, then a' is equal to 6*, a* to 6^, and so on. This is evident from page 3. Theorem IV, If a be equal to 6, the square root of a is equal to the square root of 6, the cube root of a to the cube root of 6, and so on. Let m and n be, for example, the fifth roots of a and b (which last are equal), then a and b are the fifth powers of m and n; Mm were the greater of the two, its fifth power a (Theorem I.) would be greater than 6, which is not the case. Similarly, if n were the greater of the two, b would be greater than a ; therefore m must be equal to n. In the same way any other case may be proved. JTieorem V, If a be greater than b, the square root of a is greater than the square root of i, &c. (We put the preceding argu- ment* in different words). Since a is the square of its square root, and b the same ; if the square root of a were equal to the square root of 6 (by Theorem III.), the square of the first (or a) would be equal to the square of the second (or b), which is not the case. If the square root of a were less than the square root of b (by Theorem I.), the square of the first (or a) would be less than the u^iSiSsJfff- of the Y' second (or 6); which is not the case. The only remaining possibility is, that when a is greater than 6, then the square root of a is greater than the square root of b. Similarly, if a be less than 6, the square root of a is less than the square root of b : and so on. Theorem VI, An arithmetical quantity has but one arithmetical square, cube, or any other root. For suppose a, if possible, to have two different cube roots, m and n ; one of these two is the greater, let it be m. Then (Theorem I.) the cube of wi (or a) is greater than the cube of n (also a) ; but the last two assertions are contradictory, therefore a cannot have two different cube roots, &c. * The nature of the argument is supposed to be well understood from the last ', it is practice in the use of terms which is here given. ^ 90 ON EXPONENTS. All whole numbers have not whole square roots, or cube roots ; and the higher the order of the root, the fewer are the whole numbers lying under any given limit which have a root of the kind. The following table will illustrate this. Square root. Numl Cube Root. )ers which hi Fourth Root. ive a whole Fifth Root. Sixth Root Value of the Root. 1 1 1 1 1 1 4 8 16 32 64 2 9 27 81 243 729 3 16 64 256 1024 4096 4 25 125 625 3125 15625 5 36 216 1296 7776 46656 6 49 343 2401 16807 117649 7 64 512 4096 32768 262144 8 81 729 6561 59049 531441 9 100 1000 10000 100000 1000000 10 &c. &c. &c. &c. &c. &;c. A number which has not a whole root has not an exact fractional root. At present we shall only enunciate the following proposition, without proving it, leaving the student to try if he can produce any instance to the contrary. No power or root of a fraction* can be a whole number. Consequently, all those problems of arithmetic or algebra are misconceptions, which require the extraction of any root of a number, unless that number be one of those specified in the preceding table (continued ad infinitum) as having such a root. But though we may not look for the exact solution of such problems, we shall shew that solutions may be found which are as nearly true answers as we please ; that is, we shall prove the following theorem. Though there is no fraction whose nth power is exactly any given whole number, we may assign a fraction whose nth power shall differ 4 64 ♦ That is, of a real fraction ; -, — -, &c. are whole numbers in a fractional form. It is not necessary to prove this strictly here ; because, were it not true, what follows would not be incorrect, but only useless. ^ ON EXPONENTS. 91 from that whole number by less than any quantity named, say '0001, or '0000001 y or any other small fraction. N.B. With the most conTeoient method of finding such a fraction we have here nothing to do, but only with the proof that it can be found. This is shewn in arithmetic as to the square and cube root only at most. We must enter into the proof of this at some length, and shall lay down the following LemmasJ* Lemma 1. The powers of 2 are formed by one addition : thus, 2 + 2 = 2« 2« + 22=2« 2«+23=2* or generally, 2«+2'»=2«x2 = 2'»+i Lemma 2. The powers of a fraction are formed by forming the powers of the numerator and denominator : thus, (a\3 a a a aaa o^ bJ "^ b^b^b " bbb "^ b^ Lemma 3. If j9 be less than g Then ap is less than aq If p be less than g and a 6 ap is less than bq Lemma 4. If v be less than unity its powers decrease con- tinually. For instance, if v be one half, its square (i x i) is one half of one half, which is less than v; its cube is one half of one fourth, which is less than v^; and so on. Lemma 5. If one of the positive terms of an expression be increased the expression itself is increased, &c. Thus a — 6 is increased by increasing a, and decreased by decreasing a ; but it is decreased by ina'easing b, and increased by decreasing b. Lemma 6. Ifvbe less than 1, then (1 +vy is less than 1 ^^v ox \ +(4— l)i; (l+w)3 l+7i? or l-(.(8-l)t? (1+v)* l^-16^; or l+(16-l)t; or (I 4- 1?)** is less than 1 -f (2**— \)v Firstly, (1 +t;)* or (1 +t;) (1 -f-v) is 1 -f-Qv+vS which, since (Lemma 4) v is greater than v', is (Lemma 5) increased by writing * A Lemma is a proposition which is only used as subservient to the proof of another proposition. f 92 ON EXPOKfiNTS. V for V*. But it then becomes l + 2t; + v or 1 + 3 v. Therefore 1 -h 2 V + v* is less than 1 + 3t; ; that is, (I + v)' is less than 1 -|- 3 v. Again, (1 + t?)2 is less than 1 + 3 © (Lemma 3) (1 -(.y)2(l +v) (1 +3v)(l + r) or {\+vy l+4v-\-3vl^ Still more, then, (Lemmas 4 and 5 as before) is (1 + vy less than 1 +4t; + 3v, or 1 + 7v. Again, ( J + 1?)3 is less than 1 + 7 w Therefore (l+v)* (1 +7t?)(l +t?) or l+8t? + 72?« Still more is ( 1 -f. ?;)* less than 1 + g w + 7 1? or l+15t? We might thus proceed through any number of steps, but the following is a species of proof which embraces all. Suppose that one of the preceding is true, say that containing the wth power ; that is, let (l+t?)" be less than l-(.(2«— l)i? Then (Lem.3)(l +t?)"(l +v) is less than {l +(2"— l)v}(l +r) which product may be found as follows : l + (2n— l)t; 1+ V l+(2» — 1)|; i; + (2»» — l)v« Add 1 +2« v + (2« — 1) t;« or (1 + vy^^ is less than 1 + 2«i; + (2'»- l)t?« Still more (Lemmas 4 and 5) is it 7 , ^^^ ,«^ , ^ lessthan { 1 + 2«z, + (2»«l)i; or l + (2'» + 2»— l)v or (Lemma 1) 1 -j- (2''+^— l)t? We have proved, then, that if (l + vf be less than l + (2'»— l)i? it follows that (1 + vf-^^ is less than 1 +(2"+^ — l)w or in the series of propositions contained in this lemma, each one L ON EXPONENTS. 93 must be trae if the preceding be true. But the first has been proved, therefore all have been proved. Lemma 7. Ifxhe greater than a, then (a: + a)^ is less than 0^+3 ax or «*-|-(4— l)ax (x+ay x' + Tax^ or x^ + (8— l)ax« (x+a)* a?* + 16ax' or x*+(16— l)ax» -1 or (x + a)" is less than x" + (2"— l)ax" Because x is greater than a, - is less than 1; therefore , (Lemma 6), (l ^ly is less than 1 + (2'»-l)- But 1 +- = ^i-" /. (Lemma2) (l + ^V = (-i±^ X X ^ ^ \ xJ .r» Therefore, ^-^^^ is less than 1 + (2« - 1)- ' x^ ^ ^x Multiply both sides by x*^ (Lemma 3), which gives Cg-ay* is less than x»+(2~— 1) — X or a;~ + (2~— l)ax«-i We proceed to shew the proposition in pages 90 and 91 in a par- ticular case. Say the number is 10, the power mentioned is the cube. Can a fraction be found whose cube shall be within, say -0001 of 10? Since (2)' = 8, and (3)' = 27, 2 is too small and 3 too great. Examine the cubes of the following fractions falling between 2 and 3 ; 2-1, 2-2, 2-3, &c. We have (2*1)' = 9*261, and (2-2)® = 10*648 ; whence 2*1 is too small, and 2*2 too great. Examine the fractions 2-1 1, 2*12, 2-13, &c. lying between 21 and 2*2. We find, (2-16)» = 9-938375 (2-16)« = 10-077696 Therefore 2*15 is too small, and 2*16 too great. Proceeding in this way, we shall find, (2-154)^ less than 10 (2-156)' greater than 10 (2-1544)3 .. 10 (2-1546)3 .. 10 (2-15443)3 .. 10 (2-16444)3 .. 10 &c. &c. ^ V 94 ON EXPONENTS. The only question now is, shall we thus arrive at two fractions, one having a cube less than 10, and the other greater, but both cubes so near to 10 as not to differ from it by '0001 ? Observe that in the preceding list, 2' 2 exceeds 2*1 by only •! 2-16 .. 2-15 .. -01 2-155 .. 2-154 .. -001 21645 .. 2-1544 .. -0001 &c. &c. &c. and from Lemma 7, if a be less than x, (ar + a)^ is less than x^-^-lax^ or {x + ay-^x^ is less than 1 as^ Let X be the lower of one of the preceding sets effractions ; then, since x^ is less than 10, jr must be less than 3, and its square less than 9. Therefore, 7ax^ must be less than 7a x 9, or than 63a. Still more, then, will {x-\-(if — a^ (which is less than 7 a a*), be less than 63 a. Let x + a be the higher of the fractions in the set spoken of; then a, the difference, will at some one step become -OOOOOOl, consequently, 63 a will become -0000063, which is less than -00001. Therefore x may be so found that x^ is less than 10 (a: + -0000001)3 jg ^^^^^ ^i^m 10 and (a' + -0000001)3-a;3 jg ^^^ ^^^^ -00001. But 10, which lies between the two cubes, will differ from either of the cubes by less than they differ from each other ; therefore, either fraction has a cube within the required degree of nearness to 10. The fractions required would be found to be 2*1544346 and 2*1.544347. In a similar way any other case might be treated. Hence, the following language is used. Instead of saying that 10 has no cube root, but that fractions may be found having cubes as near to 10 as we please, those fractions are called approximations* to the cube root of 10, as if there were such a thing as V^IO. Thus, .2*154 is an approximation to V^10> but not so near an approximation as 2*1544346; instead of saying that (2*154)' is nearly equal to 10, but not so nearly equal to 10 as (2*1544346)'. ♦ Approximare, to bring near to. ON EXPONENTS. 95 The student will now understand the sense in which we use the following words : Every number and fraction has a root of every order y either exact or approximate. When we shall have proved that in all cases n/a x V^a*= V^o*, what do we mean by this equation in the case where a ^ 10, and therefore o' = 100000 ? We mean that we can obtain two fractions of which the square and cube are within any degree of nearness (say '0001) of 10, which we call approximate values of V^IO and V 10, and that, on multiplying these two fractions together, we find a product which, being raised to the sixth power, gives a result within the same degree of nearness to 10^, or is an approximate value of V 10®. We shall anticipate the proof of both propositions, as one specimen of the method of passing from the strict to the approximative proposition will serve for all. Let a be a number which has both a square and a cube root (such as 64, or — ). Let x be the square root, and y the cube root. -? Then a;2 = « therefore {x^Y = a^ or x^.x^.x^ = a^ or x^ = a» y^ ^ a therefore {y^Y = a^ or y^ .y^ = a^ or y^ = a^ .'. a^y^ = a^a^ or {xyf = a^ for 3^^ is xxxxxxyyyyyy, in which the multiplications may be performed in the order xy.xy.xy.xy.xy.xy giving {xyf Consequently, xy is the sixth root of «* ; but x is the square root of a, and y the cube root, that is, xy = 1?^ or Va X ^^a = "^^ Now, suppose a to be a number which has neither square or cube root, such as 10. We can find fractions x and y^ such that x^ and y^ shall be as near as we please to a. Say that x^ = a-\-p and jy* =r a + ^ where p and q may be as small* as we please. We will begin by supposing p and q smaller than a. Hence (Lemma 7), * As small as we please does not mean that we can choose them exactly, but that, name any fraction we may, however small, they may be made (we need not inquire how much) smaller. / 96 [law op coNTiKumr.] (a+pY is less than a'-f-7/)a« (a + j)« a^ + 3qa But (x^y or ofi = (a-^pY (y*)2 or t^ ^ (a + qf therefore, ofi is less than a^ + 7pa^ y5 a^ + Sja (Lemma 3) afiy^ (a^ + 7/)a*) («« + 3 ja) or (a:y)^ is less than a* + (7;? + 3 j)a* + 21;? ja^ But since x^ (being a-^p) is greater than a, jfi is greater than a^; and since y (being + 9) is greater than a, y* is greater than a*; hence j:*^ or (i*^)* is greater than efl,a* or a*. Hence, (ary)^ lies between a* and a^ -r (7p + 3q)a* + 2l2?5'a^ and therefore does not differ from a* by so much as (7p + 3q)a'^'j-2lpqa^ Now, since p and g may be as small as we please, Tp-^-Sq and 2\pq may be as small as we please, and, therefore (however great* a* and a' may be), may be so taken that the preceding expression shall be as small as we please. Tliat is, {xt/Y may be made as near an approximation as we please to a^, or xy is an approximate sixth root of a*. The preceding demonstration is not frequently given in books on algebra, but the result is assumed in what is called the law of con- tinuity. This term we shall proceed to explain, as it involves con- siderations which will be useful to the student; but as it may be omitted without breaking the series of results, we inclose it in brackets, and also the heading of the pages which contain it. [The word continuous is synonymous y^hh gradual or vnthout sudden changes. For instance, suppose a large square, with two of its oppo- site sides running north and south. A person who walks round this square will make a quarter-face at each comer, that is, will at once proceed east or west where before he was moving north or south, and vice versd, without moving in any of the intermediate directions. * The product mn, if n be given, and m as small as we please, may- be made as small as we please ; only the greater n is, the smaller must m be taken, in order to give the product the required degree of smallness. [law op continuity.] 97 In this case be changes his direction discontinuoudy. If the figure bad had eight sides he would still have made discontinuous changes of direction, but each change of less amount; still less would the changes have been if the figure had had sixteen sides, and so on. But if he walk round a circle, or other oval curve, there is no discontinuous change of direction. If a geometrical* point move round a geometrical circle, there is no conceivable direction in which it will not be moving at some point or other of its course ; and between every two points, it will move in every direction intermediate to the directions which it has at those two points. The preceding illustration is drawn from geometry, in which continuous change is supposed ; and there is nothing repugnant to our ideas in the supposition, but the contrary, at least, when we imagine lines to be created by the motion of a point. But in the application of arithmetic, and eventually of algebra, to geometry, we have this question to ask. Can all geometrical magnitudes be repre- sented arithmetically? For instance, suppose B to start from A, and to move in a straight line till it is 100 feet from A, can we, by means of feet and fractions of feet, represent the distance to which B has moved from A, in every one of the infinite number of points which B passes through ? It is clear that between one foot and two feet we can interpose the fiactions 1*1, 1*2, 1*3, &c. feet; between 1*1 and 1*2 feet we can interpose 1*11, 1*12, 1*13, &c. feet; between 1*11 and 1*12 we can * Geometrical, formed with the accuracy which the reason supposes in geometrical figures. 98 [law of continuity.] V interpose 1*111, 1*112, 1*11 3, &c. feet; and so on for ever.* But assigning B any geometrical position between 1 and 2 feet distance from A, we cannot be prepared to say that we shall thus come at last to a foot and a fraction of a foot, which will exactly represent that position. And we shall now proceed to shew one position, at least, assignable geometrically, but not arithmetically. I eo H It is shewn in geometryf how to assign (by geometrical construc- tion, not arithmetically) a position to 6, in which the square described on A B shall be twice as great as the square described on 1 foot (as in the figure). We now proceed to inquire whether the line AB has, in such a case, any assignable arithmetical magnitude (a foot being represented by 1). If so, since every fraction of a foot can be reduced to a fraction with a whole numerator and denominator m (Ar. 114,121), let A B be - feet, where m and n are whole numbers. That is, let AB be formed by dividing one or more feet each into n equal parts, and putting together m of those parts. Let this nth part of a foot be called for convenience a *^ subdivision ; '' then a foot contains n subdivisions, and AB contains m subdivisions. Then, from Ar. 234, it appears that the square on the foot contains nxn of the squares described on a subdivision, and the square on A B contains m x ni of the same. Hence, since the square on A B is double of the square on one foot, we must have mm = 2nn We now proceed to shew that this equation is not possible under the stipulation that m and n are whole numbers. Because n is a * The student must not imagine this phrase, or its corresponding Latin ad infinitum, to mean more than as long as we please, or as far as we please. t Euclid, book ii. last proposition. [law op continuity.] 99 whole number, nn is a whole number, and 2 nn is twice a whole number, and therefore an even number; but mm equals twice nn^ therefore mm is even. Therefore m is even, for an odd number multiplied by itself gives an odd number. But if m be even, its half is a whole number ; let that half be m', then m = 2 m'. Substitute this value of m in the equation, which gives 2m'x2m's= 2nn Am'm! =^ 2nn or 2mW= nn which last equation nn ^ 2mW may be used in a manner precisely similar, to shew tliat n must be an even number. Let its half be n' (a whole number), then n ^ 2n', and substitution gives 2n' X 2n' = 2m'm' 4n'n' = 2mW or 2n'n' = m'm' which proves as before that r%' is even. In this way we shew that in order that the equation mm = 2nn may be true (m and n being whole numbers), we must have m (ml or half of iw) (m" or half of m') &c. n {vl or half of n) (n" or half of n') &c. all even whole numbers for ever. But this cannot be ; for if any number be halved, if its half be halved, and so on, we shall at last come to a fraction less than 1 . Consequently, the equation mmT=2nn cannot be true of any whole numbers, and therefore A B cannot be represented by any fraction — . The preceding equation (if it could exist) would give =r2or — X — = 2 or xx = 2 where x = — nn n n n and we have seen (page 94) that we can admit the equation xx z=z2 only in this sense, that, naming any fraction, however small, we can find a value for jt, which shall give xx differing from 2 by less than that fraction. That is, instead of satisfying the equation xx^2 = we can only satisfy the equation XX "^2 = a quantity arithmetically less than ( ) where we may fill up the blank with any fmction we please, however small. This is sufficient for all practical purposes ; because no applica- tion of algebra which has any reference to the purposes of life can f 100 [law op continuity.] require a degree of accuracy beyond the limits of our sight, when assisted by the most accurate means of measurement. If we take the least possible Tisible line to be that of a ten thousandth of an inch, it will certainly be sufficiently near the truth to solve the equation XX — 2 = arithmetically less than one millionth of an inch, in cases where perfect exactuess demands that xx — 2 = The solution which nearly satisfies such an equation as xx — 2 =0 may be either too small or too great ; that is, xx may be a little less or a little greater than 2. See page 94, where sets of solutions of both kinds are given for the equation xxx — 10 ^ 0. Hence, though X or V 10 has no existence, yet, since we can find two fractions, say a and 6, as near to one another as we please, of which the first is too small (or aaa less than 10) and the second too great (or hhb greater than 10) ; and since we can carry this process to any degree of accuracy short of positive exactness, it is usual to make use of such forms of speech as the following : 10 has a cube root, but that cube root is an incommensurable * quantity, not expressible by any number or fraction, except approximately; that is, we can find a fraction as near as we please to n/ 10. But still the following question remains : though we can, quam proximiyf solve the equation xx — 2^0, may there not be processes to which it may be necessary to subject that approximate solution, and may not those processes have this property, that any error, how- ever small, in the quantity to which they are applied, creates an error which cannot be diminished beyond a certain extent, however small the original error may be ? For instance, when the student oomes to know what is meant by the logarithm of a number (for our present purposes it suffices to say, that it is the result of a complicated process), he might happen to meet with a problem the answer to which is " the logarithm of x, where x is to be found from the equation xx — 2 := 0." Which of the two following propositions will he take ? one of them roust be true. 1. "In taking the logarithm of :r,.the error committed in finding * Having no common measure with 1 ; not expressible by adding together any of the Bubdivisions of 1. t A Latin phrase frequently applied to this subject, and therefore introduced here. Translate it, as near at we plean. [law op continuity.] 101 ' may be made so small, that the error in the logarithm shall be less than any fraction named/' 2. ** If an error committed in finding a number be ever so small, the error of the logarithm must be greater than (some given fraction, »y)001.'' To this no answer can be given except the following caution : Whenever any new process is introduced, or any new expressioit, *t must be proved, and not assumed, that problems involving that process odmit o/*quam proximo, if not of exact, solutions. The student should now apply himself to prove this of the pro- cesses already described. We will take one case at length. Let the result of a problem be where an error, which we are at liberty to suppose as small as we please, has been committed in determining, say b and e. Or (which is a way of speaking more consistent with what has preceded), let h and e be involved in some equations (such as bb — 2 = 0, eee — 3 ^ 0) which only admit quamproximc solutions. Let b' and h" be approximate values of b, the first too small, the second too great ; let ef and ef' be approximate values of e. Then the substitution of the approximate values of the preceding expression gives ^*: and t±^. To compare these expressions, subtract the second from the first, which gives fl+i' _ a + y' _ {ac-\-a^' -\'Cb' ^-b 'e")-^(ac-\-ae' -i^cb" ->te'b") _ a(^^^e')-'c{b"-'b') -f (6V^~e^n cc-f-(e'4-e")c + eV' And since, page 94, e" may be brought as near to e' as we please, and 6" to 6', it follows that c" — e' and b" — 6' may be made. as small as we please ; whence a(e" — e') and c{b" — b') may be made as small ^ we please, page 96, note. And so may b'e" — efb'^ for it will be found to be the same as Hence the numerator of the preceding fraction can be made as small as Yte please, because each of its terms can be made as small as we K 2 102 [law op continuity.] please. But since d' is always greater than e', the denominator is (page 91, Lemma 5) always greater than Here then is a fraction of which the numerator can be made as small as we please, but not the denominator; cousequently, the fraction can be made as small as we please. That is, the fractions ; , and ; ,, , different values attributed to ; c '\- e c 4- « c + e can be brought as near as we please, or be made to differ as little as we please. Here, by the same extension of language as before, the last mentioned fraction is said to have a definite value, to which we approximate by substituting approximate values of h and e. The Um3 of continuity which is assumed to exist in algebraical expressions, and which must be proved by the student in a sufficient number of particular cases, consists in the following theorem : General Theorem. Let there be an algebraical expression P, which contains x, and let the substitution of a instead of x give to that ex- pression the value p. Let the substitution of a + m instead of x give to the expres- sion P the value g. Then if a and a-\-m may be made as nearly equal as we please; that is, if m may be made as small as we please, it will always follow that p and q may be made to differ as little Particular Case. P = x + x* p =z a-^a* q =s (a + »i) + (a -f- w»)' = fl+o«+(14-2a)m-fm« = V +(lH-2a)m-|-m' From the last, q — p ^ (1 + 2a)m -j-m' each term of which, if m may be made as small as we please, may be made as small as we please. as we please. The only question about which any doubt can arise, as regards expressions hitherto obtained, relates to the values, real or approxi- mate, as the case may be, of n/j7, >/jr, &c. If m can be made as small as we please, can the approximate values of v a and w a-^m be made as near as we please ? To answer this question, we must premise a theorem which will also be useful in many other places. k ciry^. [law op continuity.] 103 It is as follows : afi—'f — (ar^y)(ar+y) a:"— y" = {x—y)(af^^+af"^y + .... -|-a;y»-*+y**-0 Multiplication will make any one of these obvious ; for instance, x^-hai^y+xy^+y^ x-^y or* + x^y +a:^y^ 4- xy^ — x^y^x^y^ — xy^ — y* a?* + 4- + -/ (Observe that in this, the first multiplication which has been given at length since Chapter II., we have employed the second of the methods in the Introduction, and shall do so in future.) If we examine the series of expressions x+y^ afi+xy+y^y x^+x^y + xy^+y^^ &c. we shall see that each of them may be made by multiplying the pre- ceding by y, and adding a uew power of x. Thus, x^ + xy+y^ = oi^+y(x+y) x^+x^y+xy^+y^ = x^+y(^x^ + xy-]-y'^) &c. So that, if we call* these expressions P,, P,, P3, &c. (we shall seldom use large letters except as the abbreviations of other expressions), we have P, = x^+yF^, P3 = a;3+j^P2, P4 = ^^+y^3y &c. or generally Pn = a:**+yPn-i But we shall also find that the same expressions may be made by multiplying by x, and adding powers of ^, as follows : sfi-^xy-^-y^ = y^ + x{x+y) x^-^-af^y+xy^+y^ = y^ + x{x^ + xy +y^) &c. * The figures underwritten most not he confounded with exponents. They are used as the accents in page 38, and are read P one, P two, P tlvree, &c. 104 [law of continuity.] or Pj = y«+xPi P, = y»+a:Ps Ft=y*+xV»kc. or generally, P» = y"+JjP«-i The theorem we are now upon may be thus expressed : af'^y*' = (a;— y)Pn-i and it may be proved as follows: General Theorem. (— ) = j:«— y»— (j— y)Pn-i j:»«— y»=s(j: — y) Pn- 1 Particular Case. P, = j:*+yP3 P,=y+j:P3 (-) = a:^-y-(x-y)P, Let us now examine n/iO and v 10 4-»»> where m may be made as small as we please. Let y and x be approximate values of the first and second, so that (pages 94, 95), a*^ = (10 -f wi) 4- r ■[ where t; and to may be made y = 10 +W } or as small as we please, (a: — y) (a?« + xy +y^) = w + i? — ti? m -\-v — to Now X and y are both greater than 2, since 2' := 8 (less than 10) : therefore the denominator of the preceding fraction must be greater than 12, while the numerator can be made as small as we please. Hence the fraction (which is ^ x — y) can be made as small as we please, or x and y as nearly equal as we please. But x and y are the approximate values of v 10 + wi and v 10. The student may try to prove the following theorem : 3^ — if' = (x-^y) (x— y) a:* — y* = (x -fy) (^oc^ — afly -{• x y^ — y^) ofi — y^ = (a; +y) {s^^af'y -{-x^y^-^x^y^ +^y*-~^) &c. &c. x3 -f y = (ar +^) (^ — xy -f y) x^ +y^ = {x +y) (a?* — a;3y ^x^y^ — xy^ +y*) &c. &c. We shall now proceed with the general theory of exponents.] ON BXP0KBNT8. 106 To 9^€sdse a power qfxto any power, multiply the exponents of the tiDO po'^^^crs together for an exponent ; for instance, (ofl' == a^x*= or" for (a:^)* = a?.x^.x^.x^ = a^+a+a+s In ^ similar manner, -^ poioer o/* a product u the product of the powert of the f acton. Thus, {ahcy = abc.abc.abc = aaahbhccc = a^fc^c* T ) == TT 5 for the first is t X r X r> or ttt* which is the second (page 91). bob boo A root of a root is that root whose index is the product of the inHees of the first mentioned roots. Thus, the fourth root of the cube (third) root is the twelfth root. To prove this, let the fourth root of the third root of x be called y. Then, or y = V ^* but y is also y v a; We have shewn, page 89, that x can have but one arithmetical cube root, or twelfth root ; and that the cube root can have but one arithmetical fourth root. Hence the above process is conclusive ; it shews that a fourth root of a cube root of jt is a twelfth root of x ; and there is but one arithmetical root of each kind. But when we come to consider all the algebraical symbols which are roots of jt, both those which have arithmetical meaning and those which have not, the student must remember that the preceding does not prove that every fourth root of every third root of jr is a twelfth root of x. This may be the case, but it is not yet proved. In a similar way it may be proved that y y/^ = ^x ; y \/x = \/x = y y/x 106 ON EXPONENTS. The root of a product » found by multiplying together the roots of the factors. Thus, y/abl ^s/axy/lxs/c (A) for these two have the same fourth power, namely, ahc. For by definition (page 87), (^y/abcf = ahc and by page 105, That is, each side of the equation (A) is a fourth root of abc. But a be has but one arithmetical fourth root; consequently, each side of (A) must be that root; and therefore the two sides are equal. Similarly it may be proved that \/abc = \/a X \/b x >/c s/aV- = \/a x \/^ = h\/a t/^;«F? = v/^xv/^x v/c^ t/32 = t/l6xt/2 = 2t/2 - =s 5-7=; for both of these will be found to have the same cube, namely, t-* If a power qfxbe raised, and a root of that power extracted^ the result is not altered if the order of the operations be changed. That is, 1^ is the same as {^i}* To prove this, observe that (page 105), \/^ = \/xxxx = \/xx\/xx\/xx\/x = {v^^l* Similarly, ^/7 = (V^)' ; V^ = (v/i)' In the expression ^x^,ifiL and b be both multiplied or divided by the same number y the value of the expression is not altered. That is. For it has been shewn that "X/^^ = y V^ which is y V(W = V^ because 'V (p^T = !^ Similarly, V^ =V^* =V^ = 'X/^ OK BXP0VBKT8. 107 To extract a root of a power, divide the exponent of the power by the index of the root, if that diviiion be possible without fractions. Thus, V?« = x?z=: X*. For x» = (*»)*; therefore V?« = x». Simi- larly, V?« = X*, n/j* = jr'* ; and so on. When the expoDent of the power is not divisible by the index of the root, as in the case of v jr^, we have (at least as yet) no alge- braical mode of operation by which to reduce v^jt^ to any form in ^hich the sign V does not appear.* It only remains, therefore, to 6od what number or fraction x stands for, and then f to calculate '^x'' or JT* Vx by the rules of arithmetic. The only question that remains is about a mode of representing ^x^; and this question we have anticipated in page 86, where we have found that it would be highly convenient in one respect to let J^t ^} &c. stand for >/jr9 V jr, &c. But we stopped our course there, because we had no direct reason to know that all the complicated relations of roots might be obtained from that notation, K;i^Aou^ the necessity of applying rules to fractional exponents different from those which are applied to common fractions, or of treating the fractional exponents by rules different from those which apply to whole exponents. We write in opposite columns instances of the rules which we have proved in the case of whole exponents, and those about which we • We may proceed as follows. Since x^ — a'.ar, we have >/x7 si y/x^x a: =: Va* x >/x = x'>/x ; in which, however, the symbol V still remains. t There is a certain distinction to he drawn between the processes of algebra and those of arithmetic. We cannot be properly said to Jind results in algebra, but only to put them into the form in which they can be most easily found by arithmetic. For instance, " What is the sum of a and b V Of this question a + 6 is not properly a solution, but a repre- sentation, and the proper answer to the question must be deferred till we know what numbers a and b stand for. But in the question, " what is the sum of 8 a and 5 a V* we can go one step further ; for though 8 a + 5 a is an algebraical representation, it is not the most simple one which the language of the science admits. The latter is 13 a ; but we are still without the answer until we know what a stands for. When we come to the step at which we must pass to arithmetic to get any nearer the answer, we shall therefore say we have arrived at the ultimate algebraical form. Tbusa + 6is an ultimate form; 8a + 5a is not. Again wx^, or at most a^ V X, is an ultimate form ; v«*' is not. IX)8 OK BXPOKBKTS. wish to inquire as to fractional exponents; the question being, are the theorems in the second column true, upon the supposition that a:** represents ofixa^ ^ a;^+* = X 10 {sfif = a:^^* = x^ \/^ s=z sfi ss: 3fi Jxx^=x^^^ = x'l -f J^x^=x^''^=xh In the first place we observe that we come by the extension from the last rule in the same way as by others. We have found that when b h is divisible by a, ^ is a correct representation of ^/x^. But when b b is not divisible by a, j^ has no meaning. We give it a meaning ; that is, we say, let it still represent Vj*, whatever that may be. We now proceed to investigate the rules which this new symbol requires. The first column is the general case, the second a particular case. The references ( ) are to the pages in which the rules are contained. m p What is x^'x af'l m means (106) which p iP"* means \/ ^ nq (106) which = V ^'^ m p Therefore a;"xx« (106) ='*\/a;"*« X af*P (84) ='*\/a:'"« + ''^ Which is represented by mq + np X nq But ""l + np ^m p_ nq n q m p ^4.£ Therefore :r''xa:« = a;'' « What is a?' X a:* ? x^ means y/a^ (106) which = v/^ X* means \/x (106) which = ^x^ Therefore x^ X x* (106) =\/x* X X* (84) = \/^ Which is represented by I But X 7 _ 2 t 6 3 "^ 2 Therefore X^X X^=^X 4_ J + 4 ON EXPOKBNTS. 109 The next rule will be more briefly deduced, and without references. m Whatis a^ -h 3fit or or or -np mq'^np or But ^9—np _m p nq n q m p m p Therefore af^ -^ ofi = o^ « Whatis (a;^)« ? '^is means \ | \/^ }' or (106) V V(^^ w (105) '*v/!x^ What is a;' -r- a;* ? This is ^Hfi-T-s/x or or or or x^ 6 2 3 1 2 But Therefore a;'-f- x^= x^ or But Tberefi mp Xnq mp m p nq n q :ore (ar«)« = What is (a;*)* ? This means V Iv^} or (106) or (105) or But 15 — 5 ^ 3 Therefore {xi)i^xi^i The last process contains the answer to both the third and fourth inquiries in page 108. By looking at page 86, and remembering that the fundamental rules there used have now been proved to be applicable to fractional exponents, the meaning of, and rules relating to, negative fractional exponents may be established. Thus, a:""» stands for —- or r-r^s and also for 4/ ( 1^ We shall now proceed to inquire how many algebraical roots there may be, and of what kind, in the case of the square, cube, and L / I. 110 ON BXPONBNTS. fourth roots. To go further would be difficult for the beginner at present. First, as to the square root. It is evident that +1 and — 1 are both square roots of -\-if and -j-a and — a both square roots of + aa. For — Ix —1 = 4-1 —ax —a = +aa + lx +1 = +1 -fax +a = 4-aa The question now is, can there be more than two square roots to +1? Let X be any square root of -f-1, then xx must (by the definition of the term square root) =: 1, or xx — 1 = 0. But jtj: — 1 = (jT +1) (jT — 1) ; therefore {x +1) (jt— 1) = 0. Therefore,* either x-^\ or j: — 1 is ^ 0. To jt+I =0, the only answer is X = — 1 ; to X — 1 := 0, the only answer is x=i -f-1 ; therefore +1 and — 1 are the only square roots of 1 . The same process may be applied to xx = aa, or {x — a) (j: -fa) ^ 0. Therefore a negative quantity can have no square root which is either a positive or a negative quantity ; for either of these, multiplied by itself, is a positive quantity. We will not therefore say that *s/ — 1 is no " quantity," because we have agreed to give that name to every symbol which results from the rules of calculation. But *s/ — 1 (whenever it occurs) will be what — 1 was in page 47, the evidence of some misconception of a problem, for which the problem must be examined, and altered, extended, or abandoned, as may be found necessary. But if we look at the steps by which we established the meaning of — 1, we shall find them to be as follows if 1. We met with such combinations of symbols as 3 — 4, &c. proposing operations which contradicted the meaning which the symbols 3, — , 4, then had. 2. We examined the problems which gave rise to such combina- tions, and found out how to make the correction without repeating the process ; so ascertaining what was to be understood by such expressions as 3 — 4, &c. that we could either predict their appear- ance, or explain them when they appeared. 3. We examined what would arise from applying common rules ♦ When a product aft = 0, either a or 6 = 0, for if both have a value, the product, by common rules, has a value. f The student may make bis understanding what immediately follows a test of bis having understood all that precedes. OK BXPONBNTS. Ill to 3— 4, &c.y and what would be the effect of deferring the correction of the misconception till any later stage of the process. 4. From all that preceded, we extended the meaning of the terms commonly used, and in such a manner, that what were till then simply the results of misconception, became recognised symbols with a definite meaning, and used with demonstrated rules, not differing in practice from those with which they were used in their limited signification. 5. And we found that in all cases in which the result produced was simply arithmetical (that is, consistent and intelligible when the terms had their limited significations), that no error was lefl in the lesult by the unintelligible character (with the limited meanings) of the preceding steps ; but that the result was the same as it would have been if we had retraced our steps and made each step arithmetical. Thus we observed that +, which before a number, 3, means addition, before — 3 is equivalent to a direction to annex — 3 to the preceding part of the expression; and that though we could not dis- pense with the extended meaning of + and — in -f (^6) — (+4), yet that -|-6 + 3 admitted of arithmetical interpretation, even though it were the result of several of the more extended forms of operation. From this we are at liberty to conjecture^ that a further extension of the meaning of -)- and — might, by precisely the same train of operations, give a rational method of using and interpreting v^ — 1, >/— 5, &c., which at present are wholly unmeaning and contradic- tory. We say conjecture, because it by no means follows that a method of the success of which we have only one instance, will be universally applicable. Such a method has been given, but it is not our intention to explain it here. We shall simply shew that a field has been lefl in which the explanation may be looked for. P If we suppose a person to set out from A, and stop at B, stopping first at some other point, and always keeping in the line A B or its continuation ; and if we suppose distance measured towards the right to be positive, and towards the left negative, we can by our rules ascertain tha distance -f-AB through which he goes altogether from his first position, as follows : 112 ON EXPONENTS. 1. Ifhestopat C (-I-AC) +(+CB) = +AB 2. Ifhestopat C (-f AC) + (-C'B) = 4-AB 3. Ifhestopat C" (-AC") + ( + C'B) = +AB Now observe that if he should leave the line AB or its con- tinuation, if, for instance, he should go through AP, PB, we have no. symbols so connected with AP, &c. that (let If simply denote that some yet uninvented symbol is to be in its place) f (1[AP)1[(irPB) = +AB Therefore we find that in the application of algebra we may yet have new symbols to employ, and we also fall upon unexplained symbols such as v — 1, &c. May not such extensions be made as will make v — 1, &c , with an extended use of + and — , supply the place of the yet-to-be-invented symbols ? This is for the student of this work a point for conjecture only, but it will make the following course advisable. 1. Apply the rules of algebra to such expressions as n/ — 1, &c. merely to see what will come of using them, without placing any confidence in the results, or at least more than the experience of a great number shall render unavoidable. 2. Whenever, in the course of a process, it appears. that such expressions as v — 1, &c. have disappeared, examine the result and see whether it is true. We now pass to the cube root. Let x be any one of the cube roots of 1. Then x'ssl or jr»— 1 =0 ic«— 1 =(.r— 1)(j?«-|-j:-|-1)=0 (see page 103, and make y ^ 1) ; therefore either x— 1=0 or a;*-fa:4-l = The first gives j: = 1, and 1 is evidently a cube root of 1 . The second cannot be solved till the student has read the next chapter ; but its solutions (for it has two) both contain the yet unexplained symbol >/ — a. They are r and 2 2 and we shall shew of the first of these (leaving the second to the student), 1. That it does satisfy the equation ar^'\'X -^-ly if common rules be considered as applicable to n/— 3; 2. That it is a cube root of 1, on the same supposition. k OK BXPOKBNTS. 113 Ifar= a:«= ^ _ 1— 2^^^ +(—3) _ —2 — 2^/^ _ — 1— Vila 4 4 "^ 2 Therefore Again ar s= a;* x a; = „ X 5 ^ ^-i?-W^^* _ 1-(-3) _ 1^ ^ 4 4 4 . — 1— •>/:^ — i+V=l l*t !> = i 9 = 2 Then the three cube roots of aaa or a' must be a, pa, and ^a. For first aXax a=sa^. paxpakpa = p^a^ = a^ because p^ — i qaxqaxqa = g'^a* = a* because q^ = I and the same might be deduced from the equation jr'— a'= 0, so soon as we know how to solve x^-^-ax-^-a^ ^=0. Let X be one of the fourth roots of 1. Then we have j:* = 1, or «♦ — 1 = 0; that is, (a;«-«l)(a:«4-l) =s and either a;«— 1 = or x^ + 1 = the solutions of a:' — 1 ^ are — 1 anfl +1, as before ; and the solu- tions of jr*+l =: are either x = -f^ — 1 or j: = — v — 1. There- fore 1 has four fourth roots, -|-1, — 1, -f- v^— ^, and — v^ — 1. This will be found true upon the application of cotaoAaon rules; for instance, (vc:t)»=-i (>/i:T)«=(N/iir/.vc:T=:->/=r The only use which we can logically make of such expressions as V— a?, previous to any further inquiry, is the following : Let a, b, c, and d, be positive or negative quantities. Then l2 k 114 OK EXPONENTS. cannot be true unless a=zc and b=zd. For suppose a ^ c di e, that is, is difTerent from c, then c±e + b\^^^ = c + dV — x l/ZT^— ^1 that is, V — X is a positive or negative quantity, which is absurd. Consequently (± e) H- (c' — b) cannot be a common algebraical quan- tity. Now if c = 0, and d is not equal to 6, we have >/-«-jr = -f- (d — 6) = 0, which is not true ; if c be finite and £^ = 6, we have >/ — X ^ :t « -T- 0, which does not agree with page 25, since no quantity multiplied by itself is negative because it is great, or nearer to negative the greater the quantity becomes. The only supposition remaining is that e = and d — 6 = 0, that is, a = c and d = b; and the only form at which we have here arrived for >/ — x is --. But this simply indicates that the equation from which it is derived is always true ; which is the case (so far as such an equation can yet be said to be true at all), when a =z c and b =^ d. Observe that we do not lay much stress on the preceding ; it only proves that the equation cannot be true unless a =i c and b =zd; but it may be matter of dispute as yet whether the above is true if a = c and bz=d. For we may as yet reasonably refuse our assent even to the equation X j^ X unless x represent magnitude of some sort ; we may say that ideas are contained in the meaning of the sign = which do not apply except to magnitudes. But if any one should say this, we refer him to the extended definition of =, page 62, though the beginner must recollect that he never will comprehend the force of that definition as applied to >/ — x, &c. .^til he has more experience of such symbols. But there are algebnd^l quantities analogous to the preceding to which we must now/[^«t attention. They are such as >/3, V5, V2, &c. which ca^j^rbe exactly found, but only approximately, pages 92, &c. w/j^rfJ'^S^t cannot be true (if a, 6, c, and d be numbers or fractions) unles^; a z=c and b ^ d. The same reasoning applies, word for word, substituting n/s for >/ — X, the absurdity dieduced being that we cannot have 1/3 = -^ "^ d^b where rf, 6, e, are whole numbers or fractions. ON EXPONENTS. 115 In a similar way it may be proved that if all the letters stand for definite numbers or fractions, and (x and y not being square numbers effractions) a + 6 Vx = c + dVy (A) Then a must = c, and therefore b 's/x ^ d Vy. For if not, let (i = c-±.ei substitute, and ( — ) c ± e + bVx = dVy Square both sides, which gives (± ef + 2(±e)J \^x + (J V^i)' = (rf Vy)* or e«±2eiV^+i^ar = d«y therefore ^^x = ^"". /^^ tbat is, vjr, which cannot be expressed in a definite fraction, is so expressed, which is absurd. The only way of making the equation A possible is, therefore, by making a = c and b s/ x = d s/y. This principle may, in certain cases, be applied to the extraction of the square roots of such quantities as 4-f-2>/3, 21+4 >/5, &c. Take such a quantity, say 2 + Vz, and square it. (2 + Viy = 22+ 2 X 21/7 + {VlJ =:4 + 4V^7 4.7= 11 + 41/7 Now, suppose such a quantity as 11 +4"/ 7 to be given; how are we to find out, 1. That it has a square root of the same form;* 2. That that square root is 2 + >/?? As follows : if 11 +4 n/z have a square root of the same form, let it be x + ^y, so that V 11 + 4 1/7 = a: + Vy ^.^(square both sides) 11+41/7 = a;2+2a:l/y + (V^' = a;« + y + 2a; Vy Hence x'^-\-y = 11 and 2a: Vy = ^Vl Therefore (-) a:^ — 2a; Vy +y = 11- 4 V^ • Observe that there is no essential difference of form between ll + 4«s/7 and x + n/^ for 4^7 = ^(4)^x7 ssV^Tli; whence 11 + 4n/7 *ii+>/ nir 116 OV EXPONENTS. but the first side is the square of jr— -V^, or (a:-. V^« = 1 1 -4 V^ lliat is, x- Vy = \/\\ZaV^ But a: + Vy= \/ll+4t/7 Multiply the last two equations together, which gives or a:«-y=\/(n+4l/7)(ll-4V^)= 1/121 -112 = 3 Buta:*+y= 11 (+) 2a:«=14 a:2 = 7 a; = l/7 (-) 2y = 8 y = 4 V^ = 2 Therefore 1^11 ^-^v'? or r + \/y is '^7 + 2, as we saw in the method by which 11 + Wj was obtained. We shall apply the same process to the formation of ^a + 6>/c. Let this be x -|- ^/y. Then a + bVc = (a; + Vy)* = a:* + y + 2a: Vy Therefore a = ar^+y and Jl/c = 2xVy Therefore a— 6 V^ = a:2+ y — 2a: V^y = (a;— V^)^ or x— Vy = V a — b V~c But a: + l/y = V^a + fc V^ (x) a:*-y = \/(a-6l/cXa + 6l/c) = V^a2-i«c But a:* + y = a ( + ) 2a:« = flf + Va2— l^c X = v/ja + Jl/a2— 62c (— ) 2y = a—Va^^lf'c and this is the square root of a + 6n/ c. ON EXPONENTS. 117 Verification. Let } a + J \^a^—b^c be called p Let ia-^i^a^—b^c be called ? pq = (Ja)«-(jV'a«-6«c)' = ia«-4(a«-J«c) = ia«— ia« + 4J«c = 46«c; therefore Vp^ = Jjv7. According to the preceding theorem, But i^ + ? = ia4-i« = a+2Vj5^= Jl^c Therefore |> + y + 2 ^/pq is a -f * '^c ; which shews the preceding theorem to be true. This theorem is of little practical value, but is very good exercise in the use of such expressions as 6vc, &c. It is a simplification only when a* — b^c has a real square root; otherwise, it is the reverse, for a square root of a square root occurs only once in *^ a-^b Vc, but twice in the value found for it. Thus it simplifies the first of the succeeding expressions, but not the second, though both are equally tnie. 1/13+21/55 = vTo + v^ \/T3+2Vlf = v/ V + Jl/IF 4- v/^'-JV^ Anomaly. Apply the preceding result to a case in which 6^ c is greater than a*, or a' — 6*c a negative quantity. For example, to 2 + \/8(a = 2 6 = 1 c = 8), \/2+v^8 = v/r+ji/^+\/i3ji7z% .... (A) Is the square root of 2 -j- '^S, therefore, of the same unexplained character as V — 1, &c.? Certainly not: for it may be found quam proximty by the rules of arithmetic, lying somewhere between the square roots of 2 + ^^4 and 2 + n/q^ or between the square roots of 4 and 5. Are we then to conclude that the expression (A) is in reality arithmetical ? On this we must observe, that a really arithmetical expression may, by rules only, be made to appear impossible. For instance^ i 118 ON BXPOMBMTS. X + y = (ji:-\-cV—i) + {j/—cV—\) 3* + if = x«-(-j(r2j= (a:)*-(yV^)* To investigate the expression (A) further, extract the square root of each term by the rule. Let a = li=Jc=— 4 The second sides of the two preceding equations still contain the square root of a negative quantity ; because, since 1 is less than ^2, i is less than 4^2, or J — ^^/2 is negative. Add the two last: v/l + JV^ + \/l-Jt/Z4 = 2\/i + iV^2 But this is only the quantity with which we started in another form ; for it is V^4(JH-JV^2) or \/2+2vl or \/2 + vTx2 We have, then, by following an applicable rule, simply committed the inadvertence corresponding to the intentional alteration made in X -\-y above ; and y2-\- Vs, or generally ^a -f b >/7, if a' be less than b^c, cannot be expressed in a result of the form unless 9 be a negative quantity. The extraction of l^a -f-6 Vc is of greater difficulty and less use. We shall, therefore, omit it. Exercises. Verify the following theorems : 1. The three algebraical cube roots of — 1, are — 1 and the solutions of the equation x^ — x + l =0, which are i + i >/— 3 and 2. The four algebraical fourth roots of — 1 are J \/2(l 4- V^ITT) J |/2(1 - V'^i) jV^2(-1+VI:T) j\/2(-1-.VZT) 3. The eight eighth roots of 1 are ±1, ±v^^, ±jt/2(i+vcn), ±ji/2(i-vcri) ON EXPONENTS. 119 Give the reason why this set includes all the values of >/— 1 ? Having given a quantity which contains radical* terms of the second degree (that is, square roots) to find a multiplier such that the products shall be free from radicals. 1. A simple radical term, such as v 3. Here >/3 is the multi- plier, or aVs^ where a is rational ;\ for v 3 x fl'^S = 3a, which is rational. 2. A binomial, one or both terms of which are radical, such as V3H-V2. Since (a'j-b)(a — 6) = a' — b^, if a and b are simple radical terms, a' — 6' is rational; therefore a — b is the multiplier for a + 6, and vice versd. For instance, V^3 + >/2 multiplied by \/3— s/2 gives 3—2, or 1 ; 2>/3— i V? multiplied by 2 \/3 +i V? gives 4 X 3— i X 7, or 10^. 3. A trinomial, containing two or three radical terms; such as V3 + >/5— Vt or 's/a+N/^+v'c. Multiply by V'«+\/6— \/c, which gives (\^a + v 6)^ — W cY or a •\- 2 '^ ab •\- b — c or a + ft — c + 2>/a6. Multiply now by a-\-b — c — 2*^ab; which gives (a + 6 — r)«— (2 '^'abf or (a + 6 — c)^— 4 a 6. Therefore the multiplier required is the product ofva+V6 — vc and a + 6+c — 2>/a6. (1 + 21/15) (1- 2 1/T5) = 1-60 = -59 It will seldom or never be requisite to consider more than three terms. The preceding can be applied to find the value of a fraction which has radicals in the denominator. Thus to find l-f-Cv's +l) instead of extracting the root of three and forming the denominator, multiply both numerator and denominator by v 3 — 1 , which gives _J ^3"^ _ >/3-l _ , /w^ , v/3 + 1 " (V3-M)(\/3-l) "" "Sirr " 5^'''^-^ the second side of the equation is evidently the more easily found : • Radix, Latin for root ; radical quantities, those which contain roots, t Rational, a term used in algebra, meaning, free from radicals ; for inBtance, a common number or fraction. Thus 2 is rational, and also v 4) though in a radical form. But V 3 is irrational. t 120 ON EXPONENTS. Ve— V5 (V6— V5)(V6+V5) The only case of higher roots which is worth consideration is where there is a simple radical term^ such as v 8, a V b» The mul- tiplier in the first case is (Va)*, or 8^ for 8* X 8* = 8'= 8. Thus the following results are obtained : Va V2.V3.V3 Via V3 V48 vi - V3.V3.V3 3 ' V2 "^ 2 Vb 1 or ^ =. n— 1 w—\ 1 n-l 1 n-1 «" X 6 ** o^ft » 1 n-l ^ 6 6" X6 " 1 q n J, w qr 2 2 V9 V64 1 1 — V3V4 ^ 12 The following miscellaneous examples on all the matters con- tained in this chapter should be carefully verified. a X J"* X a"^ X i' = «"*&"* = — r m*— m m -ybe * OK EXPONENTS. 121 • \/a = a^j v/a^ = a^ (never used, but might be, why ?) n/i60 =n/i6x10=4n/'io; VT60=V8x20 =2^20 \/3332 ssHn/Tt V3348 = 3 Vl24 V32 = 2V2 "V 7 f ■" \/2T "V ^ f v^^ a : t^aft : : V^ab : b a^ : a^ :: a"* : a"^ 1 firi/T 4/"^ 1 1 + ^^^ va+jr-|-va — j: 2j:\ / N/tf+J + v^a— -g 2a + 2'\/a»— x« a /«« T / / = ^-4-V 1 v/ va+x — vfl — jr 2j: x ^ x^ ^dr—x^ = av 1 — ^ = ^V ~2 — 1 == \/ax\ - — ~ v/a4-^ = V «V 1 + - = \/x\ ^ + 1 = \/ax\ - + - v/2ax-a;2=W2---l=v/x>/2^^==a</2--.-' ^ ^ X ^ ^ ^ a or a-\-h'J — 1 aj: + 6yH-(6j: — ay)s/ — 1 (H-VZIl) = \/ZT(l— V— 1) \/ir7 = \/7VlIT >/— .4 = 2n/^ V "-J = i>/2V^ . (a - 6) = (a* - M) (a* + i*) ^ (a* - 6*) («' + a* i* + 6^ / 4 M 122 ON EXPONENTS. =z \a ^o )\a +a b -j-a 0+0/ a +6 = \a + ^ ;\a —a 6 +a b —a o 4-^ / (a'+a* + l) =a*+2a + 3a'+2a* + l \a } ^ a \ab c / = a c [N.B. It is usual to call quantities of the forms aV — l or v — a*, a -jr V — 6, orfl + v6v — 1, impossible quantities. This they are. at pre^iient, as not having received any interpretation ; in the same manner 10 — 14 was impossible in Chapter I. But, considering that they will in due time (if the student proceed so far) receive their interpretation, though not in this work, we shall call them purely sj/mbolical. AH the phrases of algebra are symbolical; but all which contain a letter or numeral, which we have yet met with, have an interpretation connected with numbers, making them representatives of magnitude. But v — 1 has received no such in- terpretation ; it is therefore a pure symbol, as much so as -{- or — , or more so, inasmucfr as ^et it indicates neither magnitude nor operation. Hence, in performing operations with^pure symbols, we can be guided only by experience, or where that foils, we have new conventions to make. Since it is understood that such symbols will finally be rejected altogether, unless an interpretation present itself which brings them under the dominion of common rules, these rules only should be applied to them. The only case which requires notice is that of forming the symbol which is to represent >/—= a X \/ — b. This, by comnaon rules, may be either v — ax — ^ or ^/ab, or y/a X "^ — 1 multiplied by '>/b X '^ — 1 or ^/ab X — 1 that is -^^ab. For reasons hereafter to appear, let the student always take the latter, that is, let x/ZTa X V~b be « V^ not 4. |/^] Having two symbols to indicate the nth root of a, Damely^ _ 1 Vaanda«, we shall employ the fii*st in the simple arithmetical sense, and the second to denote any one of the algebraical roots, that is, any one we please, unless some particular root be specified. ON EXPONENTS. 123 Thus >/4 is 2, without any reference to sign ; but (4)* may be either -h 2 or — 2. Thus Va is the cube root found in arithmetic, while (fl) is either V a, ■ va, or Va (fl)i Stands for Vfl, — Vo, V — l.\/fl, and — V— 1 Va Similarly a-j-^ has two values, namely, either a-^-'vb or a — n/6. Hence v 2 (when b is positive) always stands for a positive arithmetical quantity. Suppose we wish to represent merely the MHmertcal value of b, without reference to its sign ; we may abbre- viate the following sentence : '^ the number contained in b, taken positively, whether b be positive or negative," by VS*, which* is the same thing. Thus b = ±'^b* according as 6 is positive or negative. We shall now proceed to the general consideration of expressions of the second degree. * I have seen a + '9 or what is here signified by a 4- (a^)^> denoted by a -f* V a', in which the ambiguity of sign was referred tov . But this was only in one place, and though the want of some express atipulation as to the distiuction between radical signs and fractional exponents, has led to some variety of usage, I think the conventions in the text will best agree with the majority of writers. At least, though I do not pretend to have made any research expressly on this point, :dl>/a is very familiar to my eye, and dt. a^ not at all so. e 124 EXPRBS8IONS OF THB CHAPTER V. GENERAL THEORY OF EXPRESSIONS OF THE FIRST AND SECOND DEGREES ; INCLUDING THK' NUMERICAL SOLU- TION OF EQUATIONS OF THE SECOND DEGREE. The view taken in the First Chapter of equations of the first degree simply amounted to their numerical solution; that is, having given two expressions not higher tlian the first degree with respect to jr, required that value of x which will make the two expressions equal. We there saw that all equations of the first degree could be reduced to others of the form ax ^ b; thus, in page 3, we reduced to 13a; = 12 W It is most convenient to bring all the terms of an equation on one side ; thus ax — 6^0 is in a more convenient form for investigation than ax = b. In this manner the whole theory of equations is considered as involving two fundamental inquiries. The first is; — Having given an algebraical expression which contains x, required, that value, or those values of x, which make the expression vanish, that is, become equal to 0. We here (in compliance with common custom) use the term root, in a manner different from its use in the last chapter. Every value of X which makes an expression containing x equal to 0, or, as the phrase is, makes it vanish, is called * a root of that expression. Thus, * This might be considered an extension of the former meaning, as follows. Let root have the meaning above assigned, then the square root of 3 (of last chapter) is the root (as here defined) of x^— 3, the cube root of 3 is the root of jr^— 3 ; and so on. But we do not make this as an extension, because there is no corresponding extension for the correlative term power. And we must confess, that we u^ this new meaninjg^ of the term root with some repugnance, in spite of its shortness and convenience. Would not the nulUJier do as well? If we were inventing algebraical terms anew, we should certainly say that 7 is the nuUiJier of 2 j— 14, and that the latter is nullified when x ■=» 7. But it is not advisable to introduce words or sybmols which the student will not afterwards see in the best writers on the applications of mathematics. FIRST AND SECOND DEGREES. 125 in page 2, we used language which we may now modify as follows : "The root of 2ar— 1 — 5j: + 19 is 6;" "the roots of 16 or— jr*— 48 are 4 and 12;"" the roots of a:*— 6 j:'+ 11 jr— 6 are 1, 2, and 3.** The second fundamental inquiry is as follows : — Having given an algebraical erpression which contains x, what values of x make that expression po itive, what values make it negative, what values make it purely symbolical (See page 122) ? We shall proceed to answer these questions for expressions of the first degree. We first make the following remarks. 1. As we wish the student to keep in mind that we consider yarious values of <r, and the consequences deduced from them as to the sign of the expression, we shall (whenever we may think it necessary) use some modification of this latter to denote the rout. Thus, instead of saying that 2d7— 14 vanishes when jr ^ 7, or that X = 7 is the root, we shall call the root x/, the second root, if there be one, x^,, and so on. 2. We shall always suppose that the co-efficients, a, 6,&c. in such expressions as ax -f-6, a-ac^'\-bx + c, 8cc. are either positive or negative algebraical quantities; unless the contrary be specially mentioned. Thus, we shall treat of cases where a is 1, 2, — 1, — Jv 3, &c. but never, without special mention, of the case where a is v — 1, or 1 ^ V — 3, &c. But we make no such limitation with respect to x. 3. We shall suppose the student to be familiar with the use of the transformations in page 73 ; for instance, that he can make ax '\-b coincide with 2x — 3 by writing the latter as 2a: + ( — 3), and sup- posing- a := 2, 6 = — 3. The general form of the expression of the first degree containing xis ax -{- b.' For instance X — 5 X — 2 , . X 5 X , 2 , — --ar+^» 5-2-3+5 + ^ which is (i _ 1 + l) a; - g - I) which coincides with ax-\-bf by supposing a = 1-1+1 *=-(£-?) 2 3^ \2 3/ The root of ax-\-b is readily found ; for let ax -|- 6 = 0, then a; = call this x\. ' a ' M 2 126 EXPRESSIONS OF THB When ax-\-b vanishes, it may be written ax^-^-b, and x^ denotes . Fronj jr, = we get ax, = — b or 6 = — ax,. Write a ' a ' this value instead of 6 in ax-\-b, which then becomes ax — ax, or fl (j — xj. Consequently we have this theorem. If x, be the root ofax-^-bf then ax -f ft = a{x — X^ for all values of x, . The last is not an equation of condition (See introduction) but an identical equation. It implies that the two sides are absolutely the same, but in different forms: indeed it may be thus immediately traced from ax-^-b without any alteration except of form, ax -f ft = a\x -{■•-] = a ]x — ^ j> = a{x — x) because it has been laid down that x, stands for . a The preceding will seem an unnecessary repetition, but, on coming to expressions of the second degree, the reason of it will be seen. Exercise. Point out, by inspection, the roots of the following expressions 3a: + J, —4a; — 3, Ja;— § roots reduced roots altered ex- pressions 3 — 3 — 4 _ 2 3 1 6 3 4 ^1 3{-(-y}. -"{-(-!)}. \{'-% Theorem. The exprension SL\-\-hisofthe same sign as a, when x « greater than the rooty and of a different sign from a when x is less than the root. For, ax -^-b is a{x — i-,); if j: be greater than x,,x-^x, is positive, (page 63), and a x positive quantity, retains the sign of a (page 64) ; but if x be less than x,, x — x, is negative, and a x negative quantity changes the sign of a. Examples. 3 or -{--is positive for every value of jp greater than At ; for instance for — - : this we shall try. If j? = — - 6 8 8 FIRST AND SECOND DEGREES. 127 The same is negative for every value of x less than — - ; for example, for jr = — -. For then 5 Q , 1 O 1,113 1 3^ + - = 3x-5+5 = 5-^=--. Similarly — 4x — 3 is negative (that is, the same as — 4) for every 3 TRlue of X greater than — -, and positive for every value of x less 3 12 4 than — -: but -x — - is positive for every value of x greater than -; 4 and negative for every value of x less than -. o This is sufficient to render our notions of expressions of the first degree consistent with what we are now going to lay down concerning those of the second. Lemma 1. Sf x-\-y =/>-j-9> ^^cl xi/ =pq, then x is = one of the two, p or q, and y is = the other. Square the first equation, and from the result subtract the second multiplied by 4, as follows, x^ + 2xy +y^ = jp* + 2pq + q^ 4xy = 4pq ( — ) x^-'2xy+y^ = p^^2pq+ q^ The square root of the first side is either of the two, x — y or y — x; that of the second p — q or q — p. Extract the square root, which gives therefore one of the four following equations : x—y = p—q •••• (1) y—x = p—q •••• (2) ^—y = 9—p "" (3) y—^ = ?—P •'•• (4) But x^y =sj3-f-y; which last combined with the four preceding, separately, gives as follows : with (1) or (4) X = p y =z q y^ which Was to with (2) or (3) X = q y = p ) be shewn. (This lemma will certainly seem most superfluous to the student : but he must recollect that though, " if j: = /? or q, and y = ^ or p, it is most evident that x +y = p + 9> and xy z=.p 9," yet that the con- verse, namely, that "ifj:+^ :^p-\-q and xy =pq, then x cannot f 128 EXPRESSIONS OF THE be any thing but p or 9, and y cannot be any thing but q orp/* is not equally evident. Thus if it is most evident that x ^ b satisfies this equation, but by no means evident that nothmg but j* = 6 satisfies it. In fact x = 2a — b will be also found to satisfy it.) Lemma 2. The product of two expressions of the first degree [say ax + b and a'x+b'] cannot be always equal to the product of any other two expressions of the first degree [say cx-f e and c'x -\- e'] unless the two latter be made fro!H the two former by multiplying and dividing by a quantity independent jqf x [that is, unless ax + b = m(cx-|-e) and a'x-f-b's=:- (c'x -f- e') where m is independent of x]. For {ax + b){ax + b') = aa'x^ + (ab' +a'b)x + bb' .... (A) {cx + e){c'X'\'e) = c(fx^ + {c€^ + c'e)x-^€€^ .... (B) If possible, let these two developements* be always equal, what- ever value is given to x. That is, let px^ + qx + r =i p'x^ + qx-^r' wliere p stands for aa', p^ for cc', &c. (This is merely for abbreviation.) Now, these two cannot be always equal unless they are absolutely identical, that is, unless j? = p' q =^ q' and r = r'. This we prove as follows: — If the two sides of the preceding equation be always equal, they are equal when .7' = 1, and also when j: = 2, and also when j: = 3. Let t^ t^ t^f be the values of the first side of the equation when x is successively made 1, 2, and 3. Then tlie other sides will have the same values, according to our supposition ; that is, when a: = 1 p+q-^r = ^1 p +q'+r' = t^ when X = 2 4p'h2q-^r = t^ 4p' + 2q'-^r' = t^ when X = 3 9p+3q + r =^ ts 9p -^3q +r' = t^ Now, apply the first set of equations to find p, q, and r,^supposing * Developement, any expression formed by giving another expression a more expanded fond. -|- These are distinct quantities ; for the like abbreviation see page 103. k FIRST AND SECOND DEGREES. 129 ^1 t^ and t^ knowD, as is done in page 80. Then apply the second set to find p*, g\ and r'. It is clear that, from the perfect likeness of the equations, p, g, and r, are found by exactly the same operations on the same quantities which give //, g\ and r^.' Consequently, the results will be the same, or we shall have p =p' g ^g' r =s r'. As an exercise, we give the three results of the first set, which are [The following proof is more simple ; but it involves the suppo- sition of a letter being made equal to 0, which we do not wish to use till after the discussion in a succeeding chapter. If px^ +qx -^-r = p'x^ -{-q'x + r^ always, it is true, among other cases, when x ^ 0; but it then is reduced to O+O+r = O + O + r' or r = r' Therefore px^ + qx +r = p'xi^ + q'x +r always («-)r px^-j-qx ssp'x^+qx (-T-)a7 px +y ^ p'x +q' This must also be true when x = 0, or + y = H- gr' that is q = q' Tlierefore px + q =z p'x + q (— )7 px = p'x or p = p] . It has been proved, then, that the expressions (A) and (B), in page 128, cannot be always equal, whatever x may be, uuless aa* = cc\ ab' + ab = ce -{-c'e^ and bb' = ee' Divide the second and third by the first, which gives ad '^ ad " cd ^ cd' aa' " cc" 1/ , b e' t V h d e a a c c a a d c , ,T -1-^' ^' b e h' e ,6 d whence, by Lemma 1, either -:=-,,- = -, or -. = -.and- = -. * a d a c a' c a d Suppose the first. But ax + ft = a\x -^ -\ = a f a; +*-) cx + e a. , . = a. = -(cx + 6) f 130 EXPRESSIONS OF THE / Similarly CLX -f 6' = -;- {ex + e) n . • au' -. a a* i # a a' 1 But since — -. = 1 or - x -r = It " - = iw, -7- = — cc • c c ^ c 'dm Therefore ax + b = m(cx-\-e) a'x + b' = -(c'ar-fO If the second assumption be taken, let the student shew that a similar result will be obtained. To proceed with the numerical solution of equations of the second degree, we shall take the most simple algebraical form, ax^-^bx-^-Cy to which any other expression of the second degree may be reduced (page 125). Thus — \ x^-^-^x — 3 agrees with it, if a = — i 6 = 2 cs= —3. Definition. An expression is said to be a perfect square with respect to j:, when its square root can be extracted in a form which does not shew x under the sign v • Thus, as may be found by trial, Vax^+2a^x-i'a^ = Va{x+a) Va^x+2ax^ + x^ = Vx{a+x) Hence ax*-\-2a^x-^a^ is a perfect square with respect to jr, but not with respect to a; while a*x-^2ax*-\-x* is a perfect square with respect to a, but not with respect to x. Observe, that if px^ + gx -^r be a perfect square with respect to x, it remains so after multiplication by any quantity which does not contain x, for tC px^+qx + r = (gx-hhy then mpx^ + mqx + mr = |V^(5'a:H-A)|* Lemma, The condition which implies that px^-\-qX'\- r is a perfect square with respect to Xy is g^ = 4pr. Let us suppose that gX'{-h is the square root of px*-i gx'\-r (no other form can be, as may be proved by trial). Then (gx + hy = px^-\-qix:-hr or g^x^ + 2ghx + h^ =^ px^-^-qx+r (always) Therefore (page 128) g^ = p, 2gh = J, A« = r k FIRST AND SECOND DEGREES. 131 Here, then, are three equations to determine two (yet) undeter- mined quantities g and h. If the product of the first and third be multiplied by 4, and if the second be squared, we have 4g^ffi = 4pr and {2ghf or 4g^h^ = j« Therefore g* = Apr, which condition must be satisfied, if the three equations between g and h are to be true. The preceding equations give g = v j5, h ^ >/& or Vpx -f V^ 'J^ is (if g* = 4/?r) the square root of px* -{-gx-^-r, ^ Some ambiguity may here arise from Vp and v ^, as (from >- page 110) g* = p gives g either -f>//? or — >//?, and similarly h is either -f n/a or — >/f. CV But here observe, that the equation g^ = Apr was obtained (partly) by transforming 2gh=:g into 4g'A' = y*. But the latter might also have been obtained in the same way from 2gh ^ — y, in which — 9 is written in place of y; consequently, the same equation implies that both the following are perfect squares, px^ -^gx -^r and px^ — g^-^f' And if we take the two values of g and h, and combine them in every possible way in the expression gx -{• h, we shall have the four following expressions : — Vpx + Vr — Vpx + Vr Vjx — \^r — X^px — l/r each of which is either a square root o^ px^-\-gx-\-r or o^px^ — gx-^-r. But, returning to the untmnsformed equation 2gh =^g, which belongs to the former expression only, as 2gA = — g does to the latter, (both being represented in 4g'A'=92) we see that all the four values of gjr-|-A cannot be square roots of pj^-f-yj + r, but only those in which g and h have such signs, that the product gh may have the same sign as 9. For ihstaitce, if g be positive, g and h are either both positive or both negative; because gh must in that case be positive : if y be negative, either g is positive and h negative, org negative and h positive. Thus, tf g be positive, and 9' = 4/)r, the square roots of px^-{\gJ!-\-r are 'vpx-{-wr, and -^wpx — v r; if g be negative the roots of pr^ — gx-\-r are wpx — vr and — >/px -\-'^ r- These agree with page 110, where it appears that the two square roots of a quantity differ only in sign ; for 132 EXPRESSIONS OF THE Examples. 3j;^H-2a: + l is not a square, because (2)', or 4, is not equal to 4 (3 X 1), or 12; but 2x^ — 12j:-f 18 is a square, because ( — 12)', or 144, is = 4 x (2 X 18), or 144. Its square root is either '^2x — >/l8 {q is negative) or — >/2ar-+->/l8. The principal use of the preceding theorem is to complete a sguar€y 2iS it is called; that is, to supply either of the ternas^^j:', ^x, or r, by means of the other two. For instance, to make 2jr*+3j: a complete square. Here j9 ^ 2, 9 = 3, r is not given. But that the above may be a square we must have 9':= Apr, that is 9 = 8r, 9 9 or r = -, and we find that 2i'*H- 3 x + - is a complete square, its roots being 3 _ 3 either \/2x + ^ or ^\/2x-^^^ Generally, Mq^^^pr, r = j-» so ih^i, px^-\-qx is made a complete square by the addition of (co-efficient of x^^ 4 (co-efficient of x^) Thus, ax^-\- ftj -f -— is a perfect square, and so is 4a^x^-{-^abX'{-b^, the roots of the latter being ± (2 a ar -f 6). We now proceed to distinguish the peculiarities of different forms of the expression ax^+bx + c If fe2 -— 4af^ ^e have seen that the expression is a complete square. We shall then look separately at the cases in which 6' is greater than 4ac, and in which 6' is less than 4ac. 1. Let 6* be greater than 4ac, or let* J« = 4ac + e^ or 4ac = J«— e« * Why 4 a c + c* rather than 4 a c + « ? Because we wish to signify that 4ac is really increased. In 4ac + 6 we do not know whether there is increase or decrease, till we know whether e is positive or negative (page 63), But e^ is positive, whether e be positive or negative (purely symbolical quantities being out of the question). Hence the form of a square is a convenient method by which the student may bear in mind that a quantity is positive. k FIRST AXD SECOND DEGREES. 133 Now aa:»+6x+c = ^°'^'+'°^-^+^''^ = -*"'^'+"''''^+^-^ 4 a 4 a _ (2fl3r + 6)«— c^ _ (2gx + ^^ + 0(2ff.r + & — ""4a 4a or, we have this theorem : If €» = fc«— 4ac or e = t/6= — 4«c the two being identically equal. 2. Let 6'^4ac, then aj^-{-bx-\-c is a perfect square, and so it 4a'x'H-4a6jr + 4af, which is 4a'j'+ 4a6j + 6'; and 4a 4a 3. Let ^ be less than 4ac, that is, let i-=4ac — e^ or 4ac = J«H-c2 _^ , . 4aV+4fl6.rH-4ac 4a«J« + 4a6j + 6»-f «• aa:« H- 6a? H- c = = — ; — ' = 4a 4a _ (2aj + 6)'' + g' "" 4a Previously to proceeding further, we shall apply the preceding expressions to particular cases. 1 . Let the expression be 3 j* — 7x + 4. Here a ^ 3, 6 = — 7, c ^ 4. And 6*^ 49, 4ac = 48, whence h^ is greater than 4ac, and ft*— 4ac =: 1 . This is c' ; therefore e = +1 , or —1 . Let c = + 1 ^*2 ry^ . .1 - (6.r--7 + l)(6.r-7-l) _ (6i— 6)(6j-8) oar- /a? i-^ - ^^^-3 ^2 = 6(.-l)xn3.r-4) ^ (^.,)(3^.4) as may easily be verified by multiplication. Let the student shew that the supposition of c = — 1 gives the same result. 3j — 4 a: — 1 3.r'— 4j: — 3J-f 4 3.r3— 7j-|.4 Now, we ask, what are the roots of this expression, or the values of X which make it vanish. A product becomes = if either of its N I 134 EXPRESSIONS OF THE factors becomes =0; that is, let x — 1=0, or, let 3* — 4 = 0, and in the first case 3a:2_7a; + 4 = Ox (3-4) = 0: in the second, 3 j;=— 7a: + 4= (^ — l)xO = 4 But if X — 1 = 0, j: = 1, and if 3j: — 4 = 0, j: = -, therefore 1 o 4 and - are the values of x which make Sj' — 7j: + 4 vanish, or its roots (page 124). We now inquire what values of x will make 3j:«— 7a:4-4 or its equal (x— l)(3ar — 4) positive or negative. It appears that x — 1 is positive when x is 4 greater than 1 , and Zx — 4 when x is greater than - ; while the first o is negative when s is less than 1, and the second when x is less 4 than -, (page 126). Value of X. Less than 1 Sign of J" — 1. Sign of 3 J — 4. Sign of the product (j:— l)(3jr — 4) f Greater than 1 1 less than - + — — 4 Greater than - 3 + + + It appears, then, that the preceding expression is always positive, 4 except when x lies between the roots 1 and -. In this manner we have determined the following points with regard to 3^:* — 7jr-f-4: 4 4 it is + when x is greater than -; when j: ^-•; — when x is less 4 than -, and greater than 1 ; when j; is 1 ; + when x is less than o 1 . Follow a similar process with the following expressions. 2a;2+3a;4-l = (a; + l)(2a: + 1) 3a;2+4a;-7 = (a:- l)(3a: + 7) -2a;2+6a:-4 = (2 - ar) (2 a: - 2) Hitherto we have chosen expressions containing no irrational results : let us now try Zx^-\-bx — 1. Here we have a s=: 3, 6 = 5, c= — 1; h^ or 25 is greater (page 62) than 4flc or —12, and k FIRST A3ID SECOND DEGREES. 135 b^^Aac = 37 = €*; therefore c = ± ^/37. Let c be + -^37, then, page 133, __ _^ 3a-«+5ar — 1 = (^X^-^ + 5-fV37)(2x3.r+"> — ^37) = j^(6x+5+ i/37)(Ca;+6- \/37) Hence the roots of the expression, which call x, and x^, are >/37 + 5 \/37 — 5 a; = : — x =1 . — ' 6 I' Q = -1-8471271 = -1804004 very nearly. It will be found, as before, that the preceding expression is never negative, except when x lies between x^ and x^,, 2. Let us take Sj:*— 6j + 3. Here 6' or (—6)' is equal to 4ac, or 4x3x3. Hence the expression is a perfect square, and we have (page 131) 3a;«-6a;H-3 = (t/3a:- V^)' = 3(a:-l)« This expression vanishes only when v3j: — v3 vanishes, or when dT ^ 1. But, because there are two equal factors, each of which is wZx — ^3, and to preserve analogy with the preceding case, it is said to have two roots, which are equal. Thus this ex- pression has two roots, each = 1. This expression is never negative, for {x — 1)' is positive in all cases. We can only make it negative by giving a purely symbolical ▼alueto x: for example, l-\-s/ — 1. Then {x — 1)* (by rules only, *ee page 122) will be — 1. 3. In no case hitherto taken has h^ been less than 4ac. Now try 2**—* + 4. Here a =2, 6= —1, c = 4; and b^ is 1, 4ac w 32, greater than 6*. Here, as in page 133, let 4ac^^' = e', 'Hiich is therefore 31. Hence, page 133, we have 9^« x\\- (2X2^-1)« + 31 _ (4j-1)» + 31 ^«a: + ^- 4X2 ~ 8 Tiiis expression has no positive or negative root, for (4;r — 1)^ being always positive, so long as j: is positive or negative, must increase 31, and, therefore, (4 or — l)*-f 31 can never =0, but is always positive. We see, then, that 2j?' — x-{-A is always positive, for every positive or negative value of x. The least value of the expression 136 EXPRESSIONS OF THE 31 k under this limitalion is —, for the least value of (4r— 1)« is found 8 by making Ax — 1 = 0, or j = -. Consequently^ the above expression 31 has the following property : its least value is — , found by making 8 jr = - ; for every other value of x it is greater. The following cases may also be tried by the student. x^ + x + l = l{(2xH.l)«H.3 } x^^x+l = l|(2x-l)2H-3 } -2a;2+2a:-5 = - 1 |(4x-2)«H.36} We can give the preceding expressions purely symbolical roots ; for instance, to make 2x^ — x -|- 4 = 0, let us make (Ax--\f+31 = (4a;-.l)« = -31 4ar-.l = 4.l/r3r or 4ar-l = -t/33l Call the roots derived from these x, and x^, i + v^UsT X. = X = 1 — >/— 31 4 " 4 - which will be found to be roots, by rules only, as in page 122. We shall now take the more general cases. 1. ax^-\-})x-\-c = 0, where h^^\ac = e« (page 132) and ai? -\-}) X •\- c = — (2aa: + J-f 0(2aa;H-fi— c) The expression ax^-\-bx-\-c contains eight different forms^ as follows, which we shall distinguish by the eight letters A, B, C, D, A', B', C, D'. Sign of a. f(A) 2a;« + 5a;+l + j(A0-2a;2-5a;-l - f(B) 2a;«-.5a: + l {(B0-2a;«+6a;-.l f(C) 2a^-i-5x^l j(C')-2a:2-.5a: + l f(D) 2a;2-5a;-l |(D')-2a:2+5a:+l + + + Sign of b. + + + Sign of c. - I - I FIRST AND SECOND DEGREES. 137 We shall first consider that whicli is common to all the forms ; and then the peculiarities of each. The roots of ajr'-f tx + c are found by solving the following equations (call x, and x^^ their roots) 2fla;H-6 — e = 2ax + b + e = ^6+c — h — e X = X ^ '2a " 2a But e = Vl^—^aCy therefore — 6+^62— 4ac ^h^'Jh^'^^ac X = ■ X = ^ ' 2a " 2a And, page 126, the expression 2ax-\-h — e is the same as 2a(jr— jr^) and 2ax-^h — c as 2a(j: — x^^. This may also be shewn again, thus, 2ax+b+e = 2a{x + '^) = 2a{x-=^) = 2a{x-x,) '.ax^-\-ox-\-c = — ^^ — -^ = a(a; — a:j(^ — ^/,) Hence, when the two roots of an expression of the second degree are known, and the coefficient of its first term, the expression itself is known. For instance, what is the expression whose roots are 2 and , and the coefficient of whose first term is 4 ? By the pre- ceding formula, this expression must be 4(j-2)(a;-(-J)) or 4(a;-2)(a; + J) or4a;2-6a:-4 If we develope the preceding expression, we find a(x — x^{x — x^ = «a;*— a{x, + x^x + ax^x,, which is identical with ax^-\- h x •\- c\ therefore, page 128, we have h = -a(a;,+ a:J or x,-\' x,, = "" « c = ax,x„ or x,x„ = ^ _ ^ , Coefficient of j? Sum of the roots =r — 7^ — ^-i — r— F-a Coefficient of x* ^ - - , Term independent of x Product of the roots = — 7;; — ^ — r— 7-3 — Coetncient of r N 2 r 1 38 EXPRESSIONS OF THE When a := 1, or the expression is x*-^ bx -{-Cfyre have Sum of the roots = — b Product of the roots = c Verify this theorem on all the preceding examples. We shall denote the preceding forms by placing the signs of the terms in brackets : thus A will be denoted by (+ + +), A' by ( )> &c. This first case, in which 6'— 4ac is positive, in- cludes all possible varieties of (++-) ( — +) (+ — ) (- + +) for in all these, a and c have different signs; ac is negative, and, therefore, b^ — 4ac is positive and greater than 6*. Here then, 6* — 4ac is positive without reference to the numerical value of a, b, and c. This same case may or may not include the following, (+ + +) ( ) (+-+) (-+-) in all of which ac is positive and therefore the sign of 6'— 4ac depends upon the simple arithmetical magnitudes of 6' and ac. We shall now examine the cases which have roots; and re- mark that either of the expressions in any one pair may be reduced to the other, by simple change of sign. Thus — x^ — x -{- 1 = — {jc^-^x — 1) or ( h) becomes (+ H ) by entire change of signs only. And, since, when A = 0, then — A = 0, the expressions in the first of the following columns have roots similar to the corre- sponding expressions in the second, in every circumstance which depends only upon the signs of the terms. (+ + +) (+-+) ( ) (- + -) (+ + -) (+ — ) ( — +) (- + + ) I. Expressions (+ + +) ( ) ; roots not necessarily existing ; and i* — 4ac less than b^. The roots of this expression (when it has them) are both negative. For, since ft' — 4ac is less than 6*, Vb^ — 4ac is less than v 6% or, page 123, the numerical value of b. Therefore — ft + '^ 6' — 4ac and — b — s/b^ — 4ac have* the same sign as — 6, or a contrary sign to b. But the roots are — 6 + n/6^— 4qc ^h'-^/b^'-'Aac 2a 2a * For instance, both values of —S-±_^ must be negative; —3-4-6 has one positive and one negative value. FIRST AND SECOND DEGREES. 139 both of whicli, as to sign, are therefore negative, because b and a haye the same signs in both, and the numerator is of a contrary sign to, and the denominator of the same sign as, a and b. II. Expressions (H 1-) ( j ); roots not necessarily exist- ing; and b' — 4ac less than b\ By a process exactly similar to the preceding, remembering that a and b have now different signs, we prove that both the roots, when they exist, are positive, III. Expressions (+ •] ) ( [-); roots always existing; t« — 4ac greater than 6*. These two expressions have one positive and one negative root, the negative root being numerically the greater. For in this case,* since ^6' — 4ac is numerically greater than b, — 6+ V 6' — 4ac and — b — Vi' — 4ac have different signs; namely, the first is +, and the second — . Therefore, — 6 + >/6' — 4ac (which is +) 2a — b — >/6' — 4flc (which is — ) agrees in sign with a and b. differs in sign from a and 6. 2a If a and b be positive, the second (which is then — ) is numeri- cally the greater (by the preceding note) : if a and b be negative, the first (which is then — ) is numerically the greater. Therefore in both cases the negative root is numerically the greater. IV. Expressions (H ) ( h +); roots always existing; (9-.4ac greater than 6*. Here, by reasoning precisely similar, it may be proved that there must be one positive and one^negative root ; but that the positive root is numerically the greater. Observe that a and b have here different signs. In all these cases we have also the following theorem. The expression flj?'H-fcjp-}-c, when it has different roots, never differs in sign from a, except when the value ofx lies between that of the roots, (Read page 134 over again, with attention.) For we have aar2-f-6a: + c always = a(x—x){x^x,) One of the two roots x^ and j,, must be the gieater; let it be or,. Then, if x be greater than x^^ it is greater than x,,; and x^x, and • Remember that in p + g it is the sign of that which is numerically the greater, which determines the sign of the expression ; and that in p + 9 that one, either p + g or p— g, is numerically the greater, in which both terms +p and i;^ have the same sign. 140 EXPRESSIONS OF THE X — x^f are both positive. ITierefore a (j— j^) (j?— x,,) has the same sign as a. Let x be less than j:^, but greater than x^, (that is, let x lie between the two rools\ then x-^x^ is negative, x — x^, is positive ; and a(jp — 0(^ — 'O differs in sign from a. Let x be less than x^^, then it is less than x,; and j: — x^ and j: — j:^, are both negative; therefore a(j — J^,)(,J^ — J?,,) has the same sign as a. A recapitulation of these three cases gives the theorem in question. 2. ax^ + bx-^-c = where i^ = 4ac or fi*— 4ac = This case requires that a and c should have the same sign, because 4ac must be positive. 4a The two equal roots are derived from 2aX'j-b = or a:, = a:,, = — — which are positive when b and a differ in sign, that is, in (H h) and ( 1 ) ; and negative when b and a agree in sign, that is in (+ -f 4 ) and ( ). The other cases are entirely excluded, since a and c must have the same sign. The expression ax^-\-bx -^c being always a square (a positive quantity) divided by 4a, always has the same sign as a; observe that X cannot now lie between the roots. 3. ax^-^-bx-^-c = 4ac— 6^ = e^ (page 133) Here a and c must have the same sign, because 4ac is positive, being 6' + e', the sum of two positive quantities. (Page 133) ao^ + bx^c = j^ |(2aa: + 6)^H-e2 | and being a positive quantity divided by 4 a, always has the same sign as a. The purely symbolical roots (see page 136) are derived from the equation. (2aa: + J)2 + e« = or (iax^hf = c^x -1 or* 2aa; + i = ±eV^ = ± V^4a^ir6« l/HT ♦ Observe that p^ = 5* or ^:: p » ±5, gives only two distinct forms ; for +p » +q and — p «= — g are the same, as also are +/) «= — g and -p « +q. i FIRST AND SECOND DEGREES. 141 — ft + '^Aac-'b*^'^ — ft— .>/4ac— ft*^/^ ' 2a " 2a These roots, using rules only, will be found to satisfy tlie equation, and also the equations _ _ft _ c but we cannot at present make an extension of the theorem in page 139, because we can attach no notion oi greater or less to x, and jr^. The numerical solution of equations of the second degree is usually performed by a process instead of a formula^ each case by itself, as follows: Let 2a;2-7a:+3 = (-)3 2a:2_7a:-_3 (-)2 ^-|^ = -5 Complete* the square, ^ — 5^"^ W ^ \4/ ^2 ^ 16 7 5 Extract the root, x — - = ± - 4 4 7 , 5 q 7 5 , 4*4 ' 4 4 * But we should, by all means, desire the student to commit the following theorem to memory : If ax^ + bx-^-c = — ft+N/ft*— 4ac — ft_->/69— 4ac ar = either ■ — - or 2a 2a Examples. 1 . What are the solutions of px^ + q^x = qx^--p^x+p^ or (,p — q)x^-\-{p^-\-q^)x^p^ = Here a = p^q b = p^-i-q^ c = --p^ The roots are the two values of the expression ♦ See page 132, where it appears that i' + ftx + - is a perfect square, namely, that of » + -. 142 EXPRESSIONS OF THE — 4(p — y) (— p^) = 4|>* — 4p3y Therefore the roots are coDtained in 2. Let asP' — ahx = b^x^h^ The roots are contained in ah'\-h'^±:'^{ah'\-hy^Aat^ 2a {ab + b'^y-4caP = a^jg ^ 20^ + 6*-4a6^ = a2 6« - 2a63 + 6* = {ab-b'^y Therefore the roots are contained in But 2a ! ! = == b one root, 2a 2a 1 ■ — = — =s — the other root. 2a 2a a Verification ion, 6 + - = = ^ ' a a a \ 5a 53 ( (page 137.) fi X - = - a a J The student should now proceed as follows : 1. To form examples of numerical equations; — choose two roots and a coefficient for the first term, and construct the expression which should have those roots, as in page 137; then find the roots of the resulting expression by the preceding formula, which should be, of course, the roots first chosen. Afterwards take any expressions at hazard ; find their roots, and verify them by actual substitution. 2. To construct literal expressions which shall afford solutions of more interest than those taken at hazard, choose any expression which is identically = 0, in which one letter has no higher power than the second ; such as ^ ab^—abc + abc-'ab^ = write X instead of b in such places as will create an expression, of FIRST AND SECOND DEGREES. 143 which it could not be known at first sight that it is made to vanish by X =: b. For instance, suppose ax^^abc-i-acx^abx = one of the roots of this should be b. Find the roots by the formula. Or take the following method : Choose any two simple expres« sions, one of which only has a denominator; such as — and p. Then n the roots of nx^'-'(m+np)x+mp = should be — and p. For instance, take b and . Tlien n a m = 1— aft 71 = a p =^ b m'\-np = l—ab-j-ab = 1 ; mp = b—ab^ Therefore the roots of ax^-^x + b^ab^ = should be a;,= ft and x,=- Anomaly. In the expression ax^-\-bx'\-c = let a = 0. It then becomes 6j -|-c = 0, giving a: = — -. But if we examine the roots ofaj:*-|-6j-f-c = upon the supposition that a = 0, we find assumes the form - (page 25.) assumes the form (page 21.) 2a ^^ ^ ^ Are we then to say, in conformity to the pages cited, that one root is infinite^ and the other what we please ? Apparently not, m the pre- sent case; we must therefore examine it further. Instead of supposing a s= 0, let us (page 21), suppose it as small as may hereafter be neces- sary. The Lemma which we here lay down will be useful in every part of algebra. Lemma. The expression n/6' + v, may, by supposing t; suffi- ciently small, be made to differ from b by as small a quantity as we please: and, moreover, the same expression may, under the same V circumstances, be made to differ from b +r7) not only by as small a quantity as we please, but by as small a fraction of v as we please. 144 EXPRESSIONS OF THE [In explanation, n/i + v, however small t; may be taken, exceeds 1 by something near the half of v ; but Vl + v may be made to differ from 1 + i V by less than the ten-millionth part of v, if necessary.] Tlie first part of this lemma is evident enough : the second we prove as follows : »» ,„ V* = ^ + "+46^-^*-" = 46. Therefore J -|- iL «. l/fcs 4- 1; = 4 6' 26 6+^^+>/6» + . But the last-mentioned fraction has a denominator, which, when V is diminished, approaches continually to b -|- v 6* or 26. Let it be called 2 6 + 2<;, where, by making v as small as may be necessary, we can make w as small as we please. Tlien will j + jL_i/jq:^=^ XV 26 ^ ^ 46\26-|-w;) 46«(26 + u;) that is, 6 + — 7 differs from v 6'*4-t; by a certain fraction of w, namely, , .o .^, . . of V. But since v can be made as small as we please, 4 6* (2 6 + w) r F and thence w (see what comes before), that is, since 46'(26 + u;) can be brought as near as we please to 46^x2 6 or 86% the fraction of v, by which 6 -f -- differs from >/6' + v, may be thus represented : V (a quantity as small as we please) 8 6' (a given quantity) 4- a quantity as small as we please and may therefore be made as small as we please. Precisely the same sort of demonstration may be given of the following; namely, that ^ — ^r may be made to differ from n/6*— v by as small a fraction of v as we please. FIBST AMD SECOND DEGREES. 145 We shall now proceed to apply this theorem to the consideration of the roots — 6 + >/F^^4flc • — 6— '\/6*— 4flc ■ — s sind — ' on the supposition that a may be as small as we please. Hence, c being a given quantity, 4ac may be as small as we please; and if V ^4ac (by the last lemma) V 6' — 4ac may be made to differ from 6 — -^-r- by as small a liraction of 40C as we please. . 4 A c Let, therefore, «s/^ — 4ac = 6 — tt p X 4ac, in which we may make p (with a) as small as we please. Then the roots are ^b + b j^ 4pac — 6— 6 + -^^H-4|)ac and 2a 2a — 26-1* -T- + 4|? ac or «.-_2pc and I^ow, diminish a more and more, in which case p is diminished in the same way. The first root continually approximates ^o — r-> 2b and the second to the form . But the first is the root derived from the earlier view of the equation a x^ -f 6 j: -f c = in the case where a =: 0, namely, 6jr -f c ^ 0, which gives or = — j. The second is yet unexplained. Problem in Illustration, a, 6, c, and e, are four numbers, the last three of which are increased by a certain number, and the first by m times that number. The results are then found to be proportionals. What is the number ? Let X stand for the number. Then mx-\-a, x-f^, X'\'C and x-f c are proportionals. ^ ^4-6^ "^ 7+e ®^ (»ia?+fl)(a: + e) = (j;+J)(a:+c) Perform these multiplications, and reduce the result to an equa- tion of the form P =: 0, which gives (m— l)a;* + (mc-f-a— 6— c)arH-ae— Jc = i i 146 EXPRESSIONS OF THE The values of j? are contained in — (tne + a — b — c) ji v(me-i-g — ^ — cy — 4(iw — l)(ae — be) 2(m— 1) and therefore, generally speaking, there are two solutions of the pro- blem. But if m = 1, that is, if x must be so chosen that x + a, x -f- 6, x 4- c, and x -^d are proportionals, the case we wish to consider arises : for m — 1 = ; the equation is reduced to (e-f-a — i — c)x -f ae— 6c = which gives only one root; and one of the roots just given takes the form — 2(e + a — 6 — c) The interpretation of this form in page 25 was, that any very great number would nearly satisfy the conditions of the problem, a still greater number still more nearly, and so on. Now, the question becomes, will x -\- a, x -\- b, x -^ c, x -\- e, approach more and more nearly to proportionals as x is increased ; that is, will X -^ tL X "^r C . := approach to truth in that case ? X *j~ X "J" c Divide both numerator and denominator of both fractions by j: ; a c 1+- 1+- X X this gives t- =: — which may be made as near the truth as we 1+- 1+- X X please, by taking x sufficiently great ; for, by so doing, -, -, -, and -, XXX X may be made as small as we please, and the preceding equatio brought as near to - = - as we please. Hence it appears, that when a problem which, generally speaking, has two solutions, has a particular case in which there is only one, we may say that there is another solution corresponding to an infinite value of the unknown quantity, in the sense explained in page 25. But, though we see a confirmation of the interpretation put upon — — in page 25, we also see that --, which is the form of the other root, does not admit the interpretation of page 25, namely, that any value ofx will satisfy the equation ; but it indicates that the rational root is — T, We shall return to this point in the next chapter. FIRST AND SECOND D£(3REES. 147 The case of a = presents new circumstances: let us now' sup- pose only c = 0. We have then ax'+ bx := 0, or x{ax -f 6) = 0; which is satisfied either byj: = orbyaj: + ^ = 0. That is, the roots are and . This would also appear from the general ex- pressions for the roots. Similarly, if 6 = 0, we have a j^-f c := 0. a;*= x=+v or — -i/— i a ^ a ^ a . . which pair consists of a positive and negative quantity when c and a have different signs, and is purely symbolical when c and a have similar signs. This also would follow directly from the general expressions. We choose one from among many instances of the use to which the preceding theory may be put. Suppose we know the sum of two quantities (s), and their product (^). Required expressions involving nothing but this sum and product, which shall give the sum of the squares, or cubes, or fourth powers, &c. of the two quantities. By page 138, these two quantities are the roots of the expression Represent the roots by x^ and x^,; we have then a;»+» _ saT-^' +px'; = , , n+2 n+2 / n+1 n+l\ / » . »\ f\ Let the sum of the nth powers of x, and x^, be called An ; the preceding then becomes An+2 — 5 An+i -f p An = or An+2=«A„+i — pA„ Now Ao = JT,^ + a;,,« = 1 + 1 = 2 (page 85) Ai = a;, H- x„ = s Therefore, by the preceding equation, Ag= 5A1— 2}Ao= s^— 2p A3= 5A2— pAi=5(5*— 2p)— ^5 = ^^Z'ps A4= 5A3-M2=H^-3;)5)-p(s2-2p) = 5*-4p5« + 2p2 and so on. 148 EPBB8SION8 OF THB There are many equations which may be solved 1^ the assistance of the preceding theory : the reason being, that though they are not strictly of the second degree with respect to the unknown quantity, they are so with respect to some expression containing it. For in- stance, we wish to find the values of x which satisfy, j;«-.3ar-f.l = 2- Vx2-3a?+l In order to clear this equation of the radical sign, we should proceed as follows. Va:«— 3a:-f-l = 1 + 3a:— ar« ; square both sides, a:«— 3x+l = l + 6a:+7a;*— ear'-f-a:* or a?*— 6a:5-|-6a?«-f-9a; = an equation of the fourth degree, for which no method of solution has preceded. But, on looking at the original equation, we see immediately that it is of the form v*s= 2— v; for if Vx*— 3« + ^ be V, then jr* — 3* -fl Js v". Let v = Vj:* — 3 x +1, then ,^4.v-.2 = i; = 1 or ^2 First, let t; := 1 Vofi-^Zx^-l = 1 or a;«— 3a; +1 = 1 /. a? is or 3 Next, let V = — 2 V'x«-3a;+l = -2 ar«-3ar+l=4 a: = ^-^-^ 2 Therefore the preceding equation is satisfied by the following values of x ; 3 3 + v^gT 3 — \/2T 2 2 Again, suppose 2x«— 3 = ^. Here a* is {si^f\ let i; = jr», and the equation becomes 21;*— 3 = v, the roots of whidi are —1 and f . Hence, 3?*= — 1 or 0:*= |^; that is, any values, real or purely sym- bolical, of VHT and >/| are roots of 2j*— 3 = ^. We shall close this chapter with some instances of the process of clearing an equation of the radical sign. Let it be the following Vic -f- Var-f-l -f- V^a; + 2 = 2 VJT V^JTT = 2- V7+2 • • FIftST AND SECOND D£C(RE£S. 149 Square both sides x + 2V^V'a7 + l-f.a:-f-l = 4-4l/jcT2 + x + 2 Square both sides again, 4«(a: + l) + 16V^a;(a; + l)yJT2 + 16(a:4.2)=25-.10a:+a:« «' 16l/^<^TTj(iT2) = - (7 + 30a; + 3»«) Square both sides again, 266a:(a;4.1)(a; + 2) = (7 + 30ar +3a:«)« which contains no radical sign, and may be developed. The following are more simple instances, which we leave to the student. The equation Vx + d + Vx — 3 = 4 gives or — 4 = ^ The equation \/x +a + Vx-^- b = c gives 4c2a7 + 4a6 — (c^— a--by = But we must observe that (x + a)* -f (a: + 6)* = c (see page 123). gives the same result as the last, and admits of the four following forms : — Va;+a + Vx+h = c — Vx + a — V^a: + 6 = Vx-\-a + V)c-^b = c V^ar + a — Vx+b = c The value of x above obtained, namely will only satisfy one of these. Consequently, when we obtain one of the preceding equations, we cannot be sure but that the problem has been misunderstood and requires an extension of form which will give another of the preceding. We give the following as exercises : 1 1. Shew that a-|-- cannot be numerically less than 2. Prove this by shewing that the roots of a + - := 2 — p are purely symbolical o2 i 150 IBXPKESSIOKS OF DEGREES. ^hen p lies between 4 and 0. It may also be shewn from (a — 1)* being always positive. 2. Shew that a*+ ^ °^^t he greater than 2 ah, 3. Prove that if a -f- = »» a • fl» * a* a 4. If *, and" x^, be the roots of the expression «*• + 6 jr -f c> then will ±Vg534^ i' = ^=iif :t: — ^6^=4; ' " a Xff 2ac 2ac 5. In the expression ax'4- ^' + c, supposing it previously known that one root exceeds the other by m, find the roots without the assistance of the formula. Do the same on the supposition that one root is n times the other. 151 CHAPTER VI. OK LIMITS AKD VARIABLE QUANTITIES. Wb have already had occasion to observe the effects of particular Oppositions, which make what in other cases are intelligible quan- c tjties, assume the forms -, -, a^ &c. To these we shall now add the ^rm itself, as requiring investigation on account of the circum- stances under which we may have to use it ; for since we have found it convenient to reduce every equation to the form P = 0, we might, Vrithout proper caution, be led to such inferences as the following : X.(ab =i and ac = 0, then a6 = ac or 6 = c. [We* shall give ^ striking instance of this, as follows: If J7 — 2 = 0, it follows that ^ — 4 = 0, and that a?*— 2jr = 0. Are we then to equate a?* — 4 «md j'— 2j:, and proceed in any manner, previously explained, 'With the results? If we do so, since jf*— 4 = (j — 2)(jr + 2) and or*— 2* = *(*— 2), we have (ar-2)(x + 2) = (a?-2)a? (-r-) (ar-2) ar+2- = x But a?— 2 = .-. a? = 2 or 4 = 2 an absurd result, which indicates some absurdity in the process. The suspicious step is the division of both sides of an equation by x — 2, which is 0. If we go through the preceding process without the con- cealment of which takes place by making the supposition ^—2 = and then using j:— 2 instead of 0, we shall find a most evident &llacy, amounting to the following : axO = JxO = .-.0x0 = 5x0 (-f-)0a=6 that is, we have used as a quantity, have asserted = 0, and have divided by 0. Returning now to the principle in page 21, we shall suppose X — 2 instead of being =: 0, to be very small,9nd shall put in * All that comes between the brackets [ ] is vaguely stated ; the object being nothing more than to shew the student how liable he is to error in using such terms as nothing, small^ great, nearly equal, &o. 152 ON LIMITS AND % opposite columns the two analogous processes, each containing its own error. Let a;— 2 = a;«-4 = and a:«— 2j: = a;2— 2a: = a;«— 4 Let X — 2 be as small as we please; •*• :r^— 4 may be as small as we please and 3? — 2a7 may be as small as we please /. a;*— 2a; and a;*— 4 maybe as nearly equal as we please and the same of a; (a;— 2) and (a;-2)(a;-f.2) (-f-)(a;— 2), then x andar+2 may be as nearly equal as we please. But X may be as near to 2 as we please; therefore 2 and 4 may be as nearly equal as we please. In the second column there is an error, whichever of the senses in page 24 is put upon the word eqwiL If we call quantities n^ly equal whose difference is small, then we do not know that because «•' — 2x and ar' — 4 are nearly equal, they will still be so after divi- or a:(a:-2) = (ar-2)(a;+2) -r-(ar— 2) X = a; + 2 But a;-2 = a; = 2 2 = 4 sion by x — 2. For if a:— 2 were, for instance. 1000' then divi- sion by X— 2 is multiplication by 1000, or the difference between the quotients x and j7-)-2 is 1000 times the difference oi x^ — 4 or and jr* — 4. And the less x — 2 is, the greater is the real multiplication to which division by x — 2 is equivalent. If it be said that the quo- tients X and x-\-% do not differ by a larger proportion of themselves than x^ — 2j7 and i^ — 4, and that, agreeably to the sense preferred in page 24, a is as nearly equal to 6, as c is to dy when the differences of the first two and of the last two are in the same proportion as a and c: the answer is, that x' — Ix and s^ — 4 must not then be called nearly equal, because they are small, and because their differ- ence is therefore small ; for both may be small, and, nevertheless, one may be many times the other. An elephant and a gnat are both small fractions, if the whole earth be called 1, but they are not nearly equal in any sense. YABIABLB QUANTITIES. 163 From the above we gather^ that, calling a and b nearly equal wheo they only differ by a small fraction of either, we are not at liberty to say that two small quantities are therefore (because they are small) nearly equal.] There are two obvious tests of the abtoltUe equality of a and b : a — 6 = and - = 1, We lay down the following definition. Approach towardi equality is measured not by the diminution of the difference, but by the approach of the quotient towards 1 . Thus 3 is not more nearly equal to 2 than 20 to 25 because 3 — 2 is less than 25 — 20 ; but 3 is not so nearly equal to 2 as 25 is to 20, because - exceeds 1 by - — exceeds 1 by - fless than -) See page 24, for an anticipation of this use of the words ^^ nearly equal,'' and what precedes in [ ] for reasons. Theorem. The value of a fraction depends entirely on the relative, not on the absolute, value of the terms. The following ei^ amples will shew that this is contained in the theorem — r as -. '^ mb 1. Find a fraction whose numerator is 583, and which is as „ 1 . 583 small as r— --. Answer 1000 583000* 1 a 2. Find two fractions, a and b, each less than tttz, so that j may be a million. Answer a = b = 2000 2000,000,000* Here ^ = 1000,000 * ^ 6 * a 1000,000 3. Find two fractions, a and 6, each less than 2, so that -r may be =: m. Answer, Take any two numbers, p and q (only letp be less than 2 9), and let q mq Exercises. (All the letters are positive) p is not so nearly equal to p-^q as p-^m is to p -t q -{• m. If a be more nearly equal to b than c is to e, then a + c is not so nearly equal to b-^-eBS a is k 154 ON LIMITS AND to 6, but more nearly equal than c is to e. Again, mx is as nearly equal to n j as my is to ny. We must now say something upon definite and indefinite terms. A word is called definite when there can be no question as to whether it is proper or not to use it in any particular case which may be proposed. A word is called indefinite when it may be matter of opinion as to whether it is proper or not to use it in any proposed case. Thus, equal is a definite term. No two opinions can exist upon the answer to the question '' Is 4 -f 4 equal to 9 ?'' But great is an indefinite term. ^' Is 1000 a great number?'' The answer to this is, there is no way of answering the question in any case upon which all must agree. We give some examples of each sort. Definite — equal, exact, larger, nearer, smaller, greater, less^ lai;gest, smallest, &c. as large as, as much as, as great as, &c., quite. Indefinite — near, small, large, great, much, nearly, hardly, &c. large enough, small enough, &c. With indefinite terms we can have nothing to do, unless by addition to their meaning, so as to give them a signification which will allow us to use them without presenting as mathematical theorems propositions which contain matters of opinion. We shall take the terms near^ small, and great as instances. Observe that the term tmaller is not to be considered as altered in the same manner as less in page 62. It keeps its arithmetical meaning. '* If x he small, 7+ J^ is nearly equal to 7?^' This is a proposition in which all will agree : and the reason is that ^' small'' and " near" have a connexion which is independent of what fraction the sp>eaker may dioose to think entitled to the term ^* small." A B may be a line which one may call small, and another not small ; but all will agree that in the meaning of the words, *^ small" and *' near" is implied '' If AB be smallf A is near to B." But if we come to ask — 1 1 What fraction is small, is it rrrr, T:rrr, &c.? — The answer must ' 100 1000' depend on circumstances. We reject, therefore, the terms small and near in their common meaning. But the preceding proposition csUi be put in a form which will never render it necessary to inquire what is small or near. '' If x may be as small as we please, then 7 + ^ niay be made as near as we please to 7 ;" or, *' Let me make X as small as I please, and I can make 7 -f ^ as near to 7 as you please ; or, <^ Name any fraction you please, and let it be such a VARIABLE QUANTITIES. 155 one as you choose to call small, I do not ask why : then, if I may make x as small as I please, I can make T+J^ differ from 7 by a fraction less than the one named by you;'' and so on. Having rejected the terms ^mall^ greatf and near, in their common signification, we shall revive them for our own use in algebra, simply as convenient abbreviations of <' as small as we please," '* as great as we please,*' *' as near as we please," or, ** as small as may be necessary," '^ as great as " &c. &c. In this sense we have various demonstrable and definite propositions. For instance, *' i(x be small, - is great;" that is, if we may make x as small as we please, we may make - as great as we please. X When, under certain circumttances, or by certain tuppositions, we can make A as near as we please to P {A being a quantity which changes its value as we alter our suppositions, and P a fixed quantity, which does not change when we alter our suppositions) then P is called the LIMIT of A, A quantity which we are supposing as great as we please is said to increase without limit ; one which we are supposing as small as we please, is said to decrease without limit. The follow- ing theorems will be evidently true. If j: decrease without limit, the limit of a-f^ is a; if ^ diminish without limit, then - increases without limit ; if x approach without X limit towards b, then the limit oi a-\-x is a -|- 6. The first and third may appear but a complicated method of saying that if 2; = 0, a-{-j: = a; and if x = 6, a-fx^a+ft, which are perfectly intelligible. But, " if j: := - = - " has no intel- ligible meaning; in fact, in page 25, we have already anticipated the construction we here put upon that proposition. One object of this chapter is, to put interpretations upon those forms which would otherwise offer difficulties; such as 0, ~, -, and ' (had we not otherwise found a rational interpretation) a^ But we still have the forms 00 0* G)" &c. all of which might occur, if we stumbled upon such expressions as 156 ON LIMITS AND ix-a)'-" {x-a)^' (^y &c. without observing (what might happen) that j: = a. In all these cases, that is, when we get a form which is not a direct representation of quantity, we shall not ask *' What is the value of that form V* or in any way enter into the question whether it is demonstrable that it has a value or not. But the question we shall always ask is this : " As we approach the supposition which gives the unintelligible form, to what value does the expression which gives the unintelligible form approach V For instance, when a; = a = - j: — a But if we examine what sort of change of value takes place in the above fraction when x approaches towards a, we find that value to approach towards 2 a, as will be afterwards shewn. And it will be found that we have the following proposition : '^ If dr may be made as near as we please to a, then can be made as near as we please to 2 a," or, " If x approach without limit to a, then approaches without limit to 2 a." Shall we then say that when X = a — ^^^— = - = 2a or - = 2a (inthiscase)? Whether it will be proper to say so, in the common meaning of all the terms, we leave to the student. But we shall not, in this work, use such a form, except as an abbreviation of one of the preceding propositions. It is usual to make the symbol oc stand for -- ; and this is called infinity. From what has preceded, and page 25, we shall regard j: := oc as an abbreviation of the following : *' Let x increase without limit." Again, '^let j: = 0," it will often be most safe to regard as an abbreviation of '* let x diminish without limit." We shall hereafter return to this. But in equations of the form P — Q = 0, where P and Q are certainly finite quantities, this alteration will not be necessary. Theorem I. If A and B be two expressions which are always equal, so long as they preserve an intelligible form, then the limits of A and B are also equal. • VARIABLE QUANTITIES. 167 To take a case, suppose that when x increases without limit, A has the limit P, and B has the limit Q ; then P must = Q. To prove this, suppose that A = P + a B = Q4-5 then, by increasing x without limit, a and h are diminished without limit. For, if not, and if a had the limit a, then the limit of A or P + fl would be P+«. But it is P; therefore a has not a limit, but diminishes without limit. But because A = B we have P + a = Q + i. If P be not = Q it is greater or less. If possible, let P be greater than Q, and let P = Q + R. Then, since P and Q are quantities not containing jr, R is the same, and P, Q, and R, do not change when x changes. We have then Q-{-R + a = Q + & or R =: 5 — a Here, then, is the following absurdity : R (a fixed quantity) is always equal to 6— a, which can be made as small as we please by in- creasing j:, because h and a diminish without limit as x is increased without limit. Therefore P = Q + R is absurd. In a similar way it may be proved that P = Q — R is absurd. Therefore P = Q. Theorem II. When x diminishes without limit, the way of finding the limit of an expression is to make j: =0, provided, 1st, all the results be intelligible; 2d, that the number of operations be not unlimited. For instance, it is clear enough that 1 -j- 2jr + Sjt*, when x dimi- nishes without limit, has the limit 1 -|-0 -|-0 or 1. And, perhaps, the student may think it clear that the limit of 1 -|. X + x^ + X^ + X* + ^c. continued for ever is 1 + 0+0+0 + 0+ &c or 1, when x diminishes without limit. But here we must make him observe, that when we take x small, though each of the terms ^, j^, ar^, X*, &c., may be small, yet their number is unlimited. And though we know that when a certain number of terms is added together, each of which may be made as small as we please, that their sum can be made as small as we please, yet we do not know the same of an un- limited number of terms. Theorem III. When x increases without limit, it is clear that such expressions as r 158 OK LIMITS AND a + bxj a -f bx + ca^f &c. increase without limit: and that « + -, a + - +-i>&c. have the limit a. But the easiest way, in general, to examine expressions, will be to remember that when x increases without limit, - decreases without X limit. Let, then, t; = - or x = - : substitute this value of x, and, if X V possible, reduce the expression to a form in which its limit will be evident when v diminishes without limit, that is, when x increases without limit. For instance, what is the limit of — ^ — in such a case. 3j:— 2 1+1 (l+i> ^^ __ 1 Let a; — ^ 3 /3 ^\ "" 3 — 2t; V Q-')' When V diminishes without limit, the preceding has the limit -. o Let the student now prove the following cases, which we express in the abbreviated form. ax^-\-bx -^ c fljr'-l- 6.r + c a If X ^ (X. ; =S OC S-, ; = - px-^q px'+qx -^r p aj:'+ bx -\- c ^ px^-^gx -\-r Theorem IV. If a be greater than 1, the terms of the series, ff, a', a^, a*, &c., increase without limit ; or (abbreviated) a* := oc For a2 = a + a^— a = a + a(a — 1) or a becomes a* by adding a (a — 1) Similarly a^ becomes a^ by adding a^ (a — 1 ) Generally «»» becomes a'»+^ by adding a" (a — 1) But because a is greater than 1, a — 1 is positive, and the addition of a (a — 1) is therefore arithmetical increase. And o* is greater than a; therefore a\a — 1) is greater than a(a — 1), or the third power of « exceeds the second by more than the second exceeds the first. Simi- larly, the fourth exceeds the third by more than the third exceeds the second ; and so on. But if to a the same quantity be sodded as many VARIABLE QUANTITIES. 159 times as we please, the result may be made as great as we please j still more if the same number of additions be made, with a greater quantity each time than the last. Whence follows the theorem. Theorem V. If 6 be less than 1, the terms of the series by b*, b^, h\ &c. decrease without limit, or (abbreviated) 6* ^ 0. It 1 Let 6 ^ -, then 6» = — . But because b is less than 1, a or 7- is a a^ b greater than 1 ; therefore a^ may be made (Theorem IV.) as great as we please. Hence, — or ^ may be made as small as we please. 9 1 Find out the first of the powers of —— which is less than ^ ^^ j^^^ ^ 100 looqooo. Am, The sixth. It is hardly necessary to notice, that if a ^ 1 the terms of the series a, a% a% &c. neither increase nor decrease. Theorem VI. If x be positive, and less than 1, the series of terms (1 + a?) {l-^-x+a?) (1 + a; + a;^ + a;5) &c. increases, but not without limit. The limit is ; that is, no term 1 — X of the preceding, how many powers soever it may contain, can be as great as , but may come as near to it as we please. The abbre- viation is as follows : ^ "— I "7" vC "f* X "I" %c» "7" • • • • "f" X 1— jr more generally written = l-f-a;4-^* + ^+ &c. ad infinitum, i^^" X As this series is a most important part of the groundwork of all that follows, we shall try to establish the proposition from the method of its formation. We remark that when x is positive, the terms 1, 1 4- jr, 1 -f j; 4" ^> &c. evidently increase ; and that each term is formed by multiplying the preceding by x, and then adding 1 . Thus, l + *-f** is \'\'X{1-Jtx)y and 1 + x + j:*+j^ is 1 + j'(1 + ^+^'0> and to on. If A stand for any term, and B for the next; then B = 1+Aa? Nowy B is greater than A ; therefore, adding 1 more than com- pensates the diminution which A undergoes by being multiplied by x P 160 ON LIMITS AND (Remember that x is less than 1). But Aar =: A + Ax— A = A — (1— jr)A; or multiplication into x diminishes Aby(l — jr)A. This the addition of 1 more than compensates ; that is, 1 is greater than (1— j:)A. Divide both of these by 1 — x\ and is greater than A. But A is any term we please of 1, 1 + j, 1 -fcT 4-a:', &c.; therefore every one of these, how far soever we go, is less than . 1 X Now we have to prove that, though we cannot find A as great as , we can come as near to this as we please. Remember that the k 1— j' way of forming the next term is always, " Multiply by x and add 1." Let A differ from by p ; so that A == », the next term isl4-Aa: = l4- px 1 — X -^ X 1 *u * * • =: ■ VX ^ ^'VX ; the next term is 1 — X ^ 1. — X ^ X 1 1 -| .^px^ or »Z*; the next term is pa^; and so on. X ^^x 1 Hence we can find a term which differs from r by px% where 1— X n is as great as we please. But /) is a given quantity, and jr» (Theorem V.) diminishes without limit when n increases without 1 limit; therefore /)a:»* may be made as small as we please, or- pj* as near to as we please. But, by continuing the preceding terms 1 — X 1 from A, we shall at last come to par». Therefore, by con- 1 tinning the terms, we come as near to as we please. We shall now try to find whether (j: being less than 1), 1 — X '\'X^ — a;^ -f- JT*-" &c. continued ad infinitum^ has a limit; or what is the nature of the increase or decrease ofl, 1 — j:, 1 — X -\-x^y &c. Here we see alternate increase and decrease : but still under a simple law. To find the next terni, multiply the last term by x^ and take the result from 1. Thus, VARIABLE QUANTITIES. 161 l^x + x^ = 1 — a;(l— a:) 1 — a: + a;*— a;^ = 1 — x(l ^x -{-x^) and so on. Or if A and B be two consecutive terms^ B = l-Aa; or l+A-A(l + a;) That is B = A + 1 — A(l + x) then the next term C = B + 1 — B(l + x) &c. &c. But the results alternately increase and decrease; that is, suppose B greater than A, then C is less than B. Or, suppose 1 greater than A (1 + x)f then 1 is less than B (1 + j) : or is greater than A, and is less than B. So that the results are alternately less and greater than . -i Thus we have 1 is greater than 1 — X is less than 1 +x 1 1 1-f-a: 1 — X -{• X^ is greater than &c. &c. &c. Now, since x^ diminishes without limit as n is increased, we can take n so great that two consecutive terms l—x+x^— he, ±af-^ and 1— a; + ^*— See. ±0^'^ T^c" shall differ by a quantity as small as we please (for they differ by ^x^). But we have just proved that one of these terms is greater than and the other less. And they differ less from any quan- 1 -\~x tity which falls between tliem, than they do from each other; con- sequently, either may be (if n be taken sufficiently great) as near to as we please. 1 -)- j: '^ These two results we express as follows : ^ 1+^4-^ + ^^+ &c. ad infinitum. 1 —X 1 = 1 — X-\-X^ — x^ -\- &CC, ad infinitum. 1 H-j: p2 f /' .V 162 ON LIMITS AND and r is called the sum of the first infinite series, meaning, the limit towards which we may come as near as we please by continual addition of the terms 1, or, x^, x^, &c. We shall proceed with this subject in chapter VIII. Theorem VII. If the numerator and denominator of a fraction diminish without limit, the limit of that fraction may be nothing, finite or infinite : that is, the fraction may diminish without limit, may have a finite limit, or may increase without limit. Neither of these suppositions is inconsistent with the unlimited diminution of both the numerator and denominator. Take the three fractions 3^ — o^ a:'— a' (jr — a^ (■r — ay X — a x^ — a* By supposing j: := a, all the three assume the form -. By sup- posing X to approach as near as may be* necessary to a, we may diminish the numerators and denominators without limit. The reason of this is, that x — a is a factor of every numerator and every deno- minator, and X — a diminishes without limit as x approaches to a. For the three fractions are (■r — a)(a'-f-a) {x — a)(j:-f-fl) {x^^d){x — o) * {x — a){x — a) {x — o) {x — a){x-\'a) Divide both terms of each fraction by x — a, which gives x-4-rt . X — a X -{-a — — X — o x-^a Which are always severally equal to the first, except where a: = a, on which we give no opinion (see page 156). But as x approaches towards a, the first is A quantity whose limit is 2 a A quantity which diminishes without limits and therefore increases without limit. The second is A quantity whose limit is 2a, and therefore approaches without limit to 2 a. The third is A quantity which diminishes without limit A quantity whose limit is 2 a, and therefore diminishes without limit. Consequently, when we see VARIABLE QUANTITIES. 163 a fraction under circumstances in which the numerator and denomi- nator diminish without limit, we have no right to draw any conclusion as to the value towards which that fraction is tending, but must examine the fraction itself to see whether it diminishes or increases without limit, or whether it tends towards a finite limit. Theobem VIII. The same caution is necessary as to a frac- tion whose terms increase without limit, or which approaches the oc A form — . For let -rr be a fraction whose terms increase without a B limit. We know that 1 A __ B_ B " 1 A and when A and B increase without limit, -r- and -^ diminish with- Out limit. Therefore the same circumstances which make -^ approach the form — , make the same fraction (in a different form) approach to -. Whence the last theorem applies. Theorem IX. The same caution applies to the value of a pro- duct, in which one of the terms diminishes withput limit, while the other increases without limit. Let AB be such a product, which ap- proaches the form x oc : that is, while A diminishes without limit, B increases without limit. We know that AB = -^ B and when B increases without limit, -^ diminishes without limit. Hence, as in the last case, AB, under a different form, approaches to the form -. Thus we see that the three forms a rk a 0^« are so connected, that any expression which gives one, may be made to give either of the others. We now take the form a°, considered, not in the absolute and defined sense of page 85, but as the representative of The limit of a" when x diminishes without limit. / 164 ON LIMITS AND If j: = -, then when x diminishes without limit, y increases without limit. Let ^ be a whole number, then 1 a' =^ c^ =• y/a Firstly, if a be greater than 1, all its roots are greater than 1 (for all the powers of less than 1 are less than 1). Let \/a = 1 +w or a = (1 +vy Now, y can be taken so great that i; shall be less than any fraction we may name, however small. For, if not, say.it is impossible that y should be so great as to make v less than k,- Then, v being always greater than fc, whatever may be the value of y, 1 + v is always greater than \-\-k. But, Theorem IV., y may be taken so great that {X+ky shall exceed any quantity we may name, and shall there- fore exceed a. Still more, then, will (1 -f v)* exceed a (u is greater than k). But (l+v)y eqtmh a: here then is a contradiction. Con- sequently, the supposition that v can never be made less than a given fraction k is not true: that is, v can be made less than any given fraction, or 1+v can be brought as near to 1 as we please. But 1-)- v ^ V a, therefore, if^ increase without limit, we see that 1 V^ or a*' or a* has the limit JL Or a^:= 1 where is used in the sense given in page 156. Secondly, let a be less that 1, whence - is greater than 1. By the last case y - can be brought as near to 1 as we please; but this is 1-T-Vfl, therefore Va can be brought as near to 1 as we please. Theorem X. In any rational* integral expression with respect to Xy if X may be increased without limit, the term which has the highest power of x may be made to contain the sum of all the rest times without limit. That is, in the expression ax^-\-hx^-^cx-\'e^ for example, let a be any given quantity, however small, and 6, c, and c, any given * Look at the beginning of the next chapter. k VARIABLE QUANTITIES. 165 quantities, however great, yet x may be taken so great that ax* shall contain 6jr*-|-cjr-i-cas many times as we please. The number of times and parts of a time which ax* contains tjr*-f cr4-c is expressed by the fraction axi* ax^-i~x* ax or .. . . : — : s or X 3r C 6 Let — I — 3^P. Then, by increasing x without limit, p is X X diminished without limit, and will, if x be taken sufficiently great, become less than 1. That is, ax* contains 6j' + ca:-i-c, ax b + p times, or more than -r--- times. But ri—- or rr-r X se increases o-fl 6-j-l 0+1 without limit, when x increases without limit. The same then does the number of times which as^ contains bx^-^-cx-^-e. For example, how great must x be, in order that we may be certain that the millionth part of x^ contains 1000a:*+ 500 j: +1000 more than a hundred thousand times ? one millionth of a-^ ona millionth of j- 1000 j:« + 500 X +1000 "" ,^^^ . 500 . 1000 ^ ^ 1000+ +— 2- X x^ Now, if dp be 1000 or more, 1 -r- is less than 1. There- X ST fore, in this case, the preceding fraction is greater than one millionth of x-r-1001, or than X 1001000,000 If we take j: = 1001000,000X100,000 or 100100,000,000,000, the preceding fraction becomes 100,000. Hence, the millionth part of x* is greater than 100,000 times ( 1 000 x' + 500 j;'+ 1000). We do not say that this is the least value of x which will answer the conditions, but that this, or any thing greater, will do so. Theorem XI. In any integral and rational expression with respect to x, if x may be diminished without limit, the term con- taining the lowest power of x may be made to contain the rest of the expression as many times as we please. For instance, in 1 1 ——j: +1000,1^+100^:3 we may take x so small that x shall contain 1000 r' + 100 x^ as many times as we please: or in k 166 ON LIMITS AND ax*-\-bx^-^cx'\-e, x may be taken so small that e (or cj®, which is the terra containing the lowest power* of x) shall contain ax^'j-bx''\-cx as often as we please. This last is evident in this particular case, because e remains the same when x diminishes with* Out limit, and ax^-\-bx^-^cx diminishes without limit. Therefore, the second may become less than any given fraction of the first. Now, take a case in which there is no power of x so low as j:'' ; such as ax^-^-bx'+cx. Here x may be taken so small that ex shall contain ax^-^bx* as many times as we please. For the number of times and parts of times which ex contains a j:* + ^^ is ex c fixed qiiantity . QJ« — ax*'\-bx* ax'-j-bx one which diminishes without limit which latter increases without limit when x is diminished without limit. Hence it follows, that when x increases without limit, x^y x^^ x*f &c. not only increase without limit, but each of them increases without limit with respect to the preceding ; by which is meant that a^ in- creases so much faster than x^, that x^ will come at last to contain jr* as many times as we please. Similarly, when x diminishes without limit, we find that x*, x^, x^, &c. not only diminish without limit, but each of them diminishes without limit with respect to the preceding ; by which is meant that s^ diminishes so much faster than x*, tliat a^ will come at last to be as small a fraction of x* as we please. These notions are sometimes abbreviated into the following phrases, which it must be remembered are not intelligible, except as abbreviations. Abbreviated Phrases. 1. Of two infinitely great quantities, one may be infinitely greater than the other. Rational Meaning. 1 . Of two quantities which increase without limit, one may increase so much faster than the other, as not only to increase without limit absolutely speal^- ing, but to increase without limit in the number of times which it contains the other. * The algebraical series of whole powers of x is .... x-^ x-^ x"^ x^ x^ x^ x^ . . answering to 111 "^ ^ X ^ xar'a:^ (see page 85.) VASIABLB QUANTITIES. 167 Abbreviated Phrases. Rational Meaning. 2. Of two in6nitely small 2. Of two quantities which ^^^tities, one may be infinitely diminish without limit, one may ^ than the other. diminish so much faster than the other, as not only to dimi- nish without limit absolutely speaking, but to diminish with- out limit in the fraction which it is of the other. Let the student now try if he can explain the following Problem. B Q Id If A and B move together towards the line CD, and if A move ^^1 such a way that A Q is ^ of an inch when BQ is i an inch ; ^bat AQ is J of an inch when BQ is | of an inch ; or generally that -^Q is a:' inches* when BQ is j: inches: and if a microscope be 1)Iaced over the figure which grows in magnifying power as A moves towards Q, in such a way that the increase of magnifying power just compensates the real diminution of AQ, so that AQ always appears of the same length ; then B, instead of appearing to move toward Q, will appear to move away from Q. * It is usual to say x inches, when x is less than 1, or when x inches is really a fraction of an inch ; in which case x of an inch would be more agreeable to analogy. Returning to the consideration discussed in the note to page 40, it will be useful to observe that the idiom of our language makes the connexion between multiplication by 4 and multi- plication by ^, less obvious than it might have been. We only say 4 of before an article or pronoun, " four of the men," " four of them." But we always say, " one fourth of six," " one fourth of an inch." If it had been idiomatic to say ** four of six," or ** a four of sixes," for 24 ; and " four of an inch " for '* four inches," the propriety of extending the term multiplication to fractions would have been much more obvious. 168 CLASSIFICATION OF ALGEBRAICAL CHAPTER VII. i CLASSIFICATION OF ALGEBRAICAL EXPRESSIONS AND CONSEQUENCES. RULE OF DIVISION. Previously to commencing this subject, we shall make a classi- fication of the expressions we have obtained. All the terms in use are usually relative to some particular letter; in what follows we shall suppose this letter to be x. We shall proceed to explain the following table. Functions. Common Algebraical. Transcendental. r- Rational. Integral. Frac- ' » tional. Irrational. -*■ Monomial. Binomial, Trinomial, Quadrinomial, &c. Integral. Frac- * » tional. Monomial, Binomial, Trinomial, Quadrinomial, &c. Exponential, Logarithmic, Circular, Inverse Circular, &c. Any expression which contains a: in any way is called a Junction ofx: thus a-^-Xf a + 6r^ 8cc. are functions of x; they are also functions of a and b, but may be considered only with regard to x. All expressions which contain only a finite number of such ex- pressions as are treated in the preceding part of this work, are called common algebraic* functions, except only where x is an exponent. Thus s/a-\-x^, a^4-6, &c. are common algebraic functions, but a' is not. And we do not know whether 1 -j- a: -j- j;*' -f- &c. ad in- finitum (page 1 59) is a common algebraic function of x or not, until we have found that it is the same as l-f-(l — x"). All other functions of j: are called transcendental functions; such are a' and all functions containing it; such will be (when we come to define them) the * Usually, algebraic functions ; but transcendental functions are certainly also algebraic, that is, considered in algebra. SXPBE88IONS AND C0NSEQUEKCE8. 169 ^^^garithm of Xf the sine and cosine of x in trigonometry, and many ^^^thers. A function which contains a* is called an exponential* ^^m^inction of Xf one which contains a logarithm, a logarithmic func- ^- ^on, &c. Common algebraical functions are divided into rational, which mtain only whole powers of j:, as a+^j ax-^-j-ft, &c. ; and irro- ^ionalf which contain roots or fractional powers of Xy as ax^-\'hy "^Vo'-j-J^* &c. Rational and irrational functions of x are both divided into "^integral, which contain x only in numerators, as , x^ . a 4- wx X A — and r- : ^ a a + 6 ' and Jractional, which contain x in denominators, as 7 — ; — 5 and i-r=^ bx-j'x' c + Vj* Integral functions are divided into monomiaUy which contain only one power of x, as x^y ax*y 's/bxy {a-\-b)x*; binomialsy which con- tain two distinct powers of x (j^ included) as a-{-bx or ax'^-^bxy cjr'-f-vx, mx*-}-nx^, &c. ; trinomialsy containing three distinct powers; quadHnomials containing four, &c. The two latter terms are little used : all expressions of more than one term are called polynomials. Integral and rational functions are divided into those of the first, Second, third, &c. degrees, according to the exponent of the highest power which is found in them. Thus Ct -h 6 a: is a rational integral function of x, of the first degree. U'\-hx-\- ca^ of the second degree. &c. &c. The term a, if written ax^y is of no degree with respect to x. rp, . . n-f V^ log c-4-a'c* The expression t — ■ ^^^r-^ m-j-wn * The letter principally considered is an exponent, f The meaning of log. c, or logarithm of c, will be afterwards explained. Q I 170 CLASSIFICATION OF ALGEBRAICAL is a rational integral trinomial function of €t .... rational fractional ^ .... irrational integral O .... irrational fractional ^ .... exponential ........ ^ .... logarithmic C Rational and integral functions are generally arranged, so that the powers of x may rise or fall continually in going from left to right. Thus, ax + 6 — cx^ is never so written, but either -^cjd^-^ax + b or b + ax—car^ in the first case it is said to be arranged in descending^ in the second in ascending, powers of x. Thus a—bx^ + cx—x^—x^ should be a + ca;— (& + l)x^— ar* or — a;^— {b-{-])x^ i-cx + a The most important class of functions is the rational and integral, contaming those which appear rational and integral, but of which it cannot be known whether they are algebraical or transcendental, owing to their containing an infinite number of terms. Such are the forms a + bx + cx^+ -^-paf'^-^qx^ where a, b, c are not functions of Xy and n is a whole number ; and a + bX'\'CX^+ ex^ + + Sec od infinitum. The reduction of expressions to such forms is one of the principal branches of the subject. We shall call the first generally a polynomial, the second an infinite series. Definitions. In multiplication of polynomials, the several pro- ducts formed in the process may be called subordinate products. Thus, in multiplying a-\-x by b'\-x, the subordinate products are ah, ax, bx, and x^, A term of a polynomial is all that contains any one power of a:; thus, the preceding product at+aar + ^.r + j:* is not said to be of four terms, but of three, namely, abjia-^- b)x, and x'. Theorem. In the product of two polynomials, there must be at least two terms, which are subordinate products, and not formed by two or more subordinate products. Suppose we multiply ax-^bx^-^cx^ and px*-\-qx^. It is plain *. EXPRESSIONS AND CONSEQUENCES. 171 that no other subordinate product can contain so high a power of x as cj*xg^9 or cqj^f nor so low a power of a? as axxpj^i or apjc^, because, in these, both exponents are the highest in their expressions, or the lowest. Consequently, these must be terms of the product, which is, in fact, apar^+{aq + bp)3fi+(bq + cp)x'' + cqafi having four terms, two of which are the simple subordinate products already noticed. Algebraical division differs from arithmetical in this, that in tlie latter we wish to ascertain whether a whole number P can be made by taking another whole number Q a whole number of times; in the former we inquire whether a polynomial function }f x, P, can be made by multiplying another polynomial Q by any third polynomial. For instance, to divide Bx^-^1 by 2x4-1 > is the following: To reduce 8jr*+l *- — --— if possible, to a simple polynomial. The way of treating this iw X "^ X question will also give that of treating any other. If possible, let So^ + l be made by multiplying 2x'\-l by «i4-6j;4*cjr' + ej?*+&c» Now, firstly, this latter expression cannot go higher than ex* ; for, if it did, say to ex^, we should have, by the last theorem, ex^x^x or 2ex* in the product. But that product is SjF'-i-l, in which x* does not appear; consequently, ejr^ and higher terms are not in the polynomial required, which is therefore of the form a-\'bx-\-cx^. We have then, if our question be possible. We have proved that 2xxcx^ must be a term* of this product; but it can only be 8 a?*, therefore 2 j: X c j?' := 8 x^, or c j' = 8 x^-~2 x = 4 x*. Consequently, Bx^-\-i = {2x +l){4x^ -^ bx + a) = (2x+l)4r' + (2x+l)(6x + a) 8^4-1— (2x+l)4x« or — 4ar«4-l = (2xH-l)(6x4-«) of the latter product, 2xxbx must be a term; but it can only be — 4*', therefore bx = — 4x^-7- 2x = — 2x, or -4ar^+l = (2x + l){--2x+a) = -^2x(2x + l) + (2x + l)a -4a;2 4.H-2a:(2a:-f 1) or {2x + 1) == {2x +l)a * This being a subordinate product, which cannot be altered or destroyed by any other subordinate product. 172 CLASSIFICATION OF ALGEBRAICAL This last equation is made identical by a=l ; therefore 4 jr' — 2x+l is the polynomial by which ix-^-i being multiplied^ the product is 8 j' + l : as will be found by trial. The steps of the preceding process may be arranged after the manner of division in arithmetic ; the only difference being, that in- stead of finding a new term in the quotient by trial of the left hand figures of the divisor and dividend, it is found by dividing the left hand term of the dividend or remainder by that in the divisor. As follows, in which the same question is solved in the two different arrangements. 2ar + l)8a;3 + l(4x«-2a;+l 1 + 2a;) 1+8x^(1- 2a; + 4a:« 8a;» + 4x2 l-i-2a7 — 4a;«— 2a7 — 2a?— 4x« 2a: + l 4a;2 + 8a;* 2a; + l 4a?«+8a:» Great care must be taken to preserve the same order of arrange- ment throughout, either in ascending or descending powers of x. The following is the general theory of this process : First, it is evident that the sum, difference, and product of rational polynomials, are rational polynomials. Let P and Q be two rational polynomials, from which it is desired to obtain V in such a way that P ^ QV. Here P is the dividend, Q the divisor, and V the quotient to be found. Assume any convenient polynomial or monomial A, multiply it by Q, and subtract the product from P, which gives P— AQ. Call this R, so that P-AQ = R (1) Assume any other polynomial A' ; repeat the process with R (instead of P) and Q. Call the result R'. R-A'Q= R' (2) Assume a third polynomial A", and let R'-A"Q = R" (3) k BXPRESSIONS AND CONSEQUENCES. 173 The object is to simplify the remainder at every step, so as to reduce it at last to a form in which we may see one of these two things ; either how to find a new polynomial which shall reduce the next remainder to 0, or that this is impossible. Suppose, first, that a new polynomial or monomial A!" can be found, which will reduce the remainder to 0. R-«A"Q = (4) We have, then, from the different equations P = AQ + R = AQ + A'Q-hR'=AQ+A'Q + A"Q + R'' = AQ + AQ + A"Q-i-A"Q = Q(A + A'-f A'+A"0 so that A -f A'-j- A"4- A''' is the polynomial required. Suppose that instead of (4), we have and suppose it to be evidently useless to attempt to continue the process further. We have then P = AQ + A'Q + A"Q + A "Q + R" (-f-)Q g = A + A'+ A"+ A"' + J- , , . , . V a more simple = rational polynomial 4- < ^ , p ^ ^ ^l fraction than ^ Example. To reduce « . ^ to a more simple form x«+2a?*= AQ -2ar*Hrl = R, A = ^=4^ = - 2j:« -2a;*-4a;» = A'Q 4x^ + 1 = R', A"=^= 4x x' 4a^+8a^=A"Q, -8a;« + l=R", A"'=-^=-8 16a: + 1 = R q2 /// ^ 174 CLASStFICATION OF AL6BBRAICAI. It is useless to carry the process further, and we have From the preceding, we may deduce the following theorem, which is useful in many parts of mathematics. If P and Q be two rational polynomials of which P is of the p higher degree (or dimensionf as it is frequently called), then jz can be reduced to the form O -f -pr where G and H are rational polynomials, and H of at least one dimension less than Q. £xERCiSE. If, in the preceding process, the remainders be severally multiplied by B, B', B'', &c. before using them, then Q " ' B ^ BB' ^ BB'B' ^ BB'B"Q The preceding process may be used in an infinite number of different ways; for though it is only convenient to employ it as in the preceding example, yet in the reasoning P, Q, A, A', &c. may be any quantities whatsoever. As in the following example, P = 1 Q = 1+a: l + x) I (let A = ar x + x^ 1 — ar — j;«= R, let A'=a^ x^-^x^ l-'X^2x^—x^ TT = = X + X^-{ -j: — 2x»— j:* But this would in most cases amount to no more than an arbitrary method of adding or substracting fractions. When, however, the process of dividing the left-hand term of the remainder by that of the divisor is followed, the result will generally be a symmetrical, and often a useful, developement. For instance, we thus obtain ^ ^^l — x + x^—x^+x^— ^ l + x ' ' 1-f JC --1- = l + ar + ar^ + or^H- -^ 1 — j: 1 — jt EXPBSSSIONS AND CONSEQUENCES. 175 _L. = 1_1+J._J. + ±._L jr + 1 X X* x^ x^ x^ X'\-\ ^ r= 1 j-2a?4-3a;g+4g^+ ^^'""^^ By this method we can tell whether either of the preceding series of terms continued without limit will approach a limit or not. For instance, we see that \-\-x^3t^-\-a^+ ^3if (A) becomes when : is added to it. If then x be less than 1, 1 — X 1 — X since j^+^ diminishes without limit (page 159) when n is increased without limit, the sum of the terms in (A) continually approaches to as was shewn in page 1 60. Let us, for the present, denote by (P) that P is a rational poly- nomial ; and by (P) + (Q) = (P + Q), that P and Q are rational polynomials, whence their sum is a rational polynomial. We have then, always, (P) + (Q) = (P + Q), (P)-(Q) = (P-Q), (P) X (Q) = (P Q) ; and ^ = (-^^ in certain cases. Every polynomial which divides (P) without remainder is called 2L factor o( P; thus x* — 1 =(jr + l)(ar — 1) and j: + 1 and x — 1 are factors of j?* — 1 . It is evident, from page 1 71 , 1. That no polynomial can have a factor of a higher dimension than its own dimension. 2. That if the polynomial be of m dimensions, and one of its two factors of ^ dimensions, the remaining factor must be of m — p dimensions. Thus in x*—l = (x—l){a^ + x'^-\'X + \) = (a;2-.l)(a:2 + l) the polynomial being of the fourth degree, its factors are in one case of the ^rs^ and third (1 + 3 = 4), and in the other of the second and second (2 + 2 = 4). In what follows we speak only of rational polynomials, and by rational division we mean tliat the preceding process leaves no 176 CLABSIFICATION OF ALGEBRAICAL remainder. The following theorems are evident consequences of what goes before. 1. Rational division is impossible unless the dividend be at least as high in degree as the divisor. 2. Where the dividend is higher than the divisor, and rational division is still impossible, the remainder is of a lower degree than either the divisor or dividend. 3. If the dividend be of the mth and the divisor of the nth degree, the quotient is of the (m — n)th, and the remainder not higher than of the (n — l)th degree. (For so long as the remainder is as high or higher than the divisor, the process can be continued). 4. The dividend being P, the divisor Q, the quotient* A, and the remainder R, then P = AQ+R or I = A+l 5. Every quantity which rationally divides M and N rationally divides their sum, difference, and product. Let Z be the divisor; then y = (A) -2=(B) — Z_ = (A + B) 51=:^ = (A-B) ^ = ABZ = (ABZ) 6. Every divisor of P and Q (in 4.) divides R, and every divisor of Q and R divides P, &c. so that no two of the three has any rational divisor which the third has not. For instance, let Z divide P and Q rationally, then T " '*"'"' °"= (I) f = (f ) = ( y — j; but this is -=•, which is therefore rational, or Z also rationally divides R. By similar reasoning the other cases follow. 7. The highest common divisor of P and Q is therefore the highest common divisor of Q and R. * Not strictly a quotient, unless the remainder he nothing. It is what comes in the quotient-part of the process in trying this point. ^ EXPRESSIONS AND CONSEQUENCES. 177 8. If one factor of a product be not divisible by Xy then those powers of Xy and those only, which rationally divide the other factor, will rationally divide the product. For instance, in (jr* -f a) (■'' + 6 x*)y since the lowest term is Qax^, and since no power of x higher than that in the lowest term will rationally divide an expression, it follows that j:^ is the highest power of x which rationally divides the product. Bttt jr* is the highest which rationally divides x^-\-Qx*. 9. If an expression be rationally divisible by a power of j:, the quotient is divisible by every divisor of the first, which is itself indivisible by any power of jr. For example, x^ — x divided by x gives 3^ — l,jr— 1 is a divisor of the first, and, therefore (were it not known otherwise), is a divisor of the second. To prove this theorem, let jf*P (for example) be an expression, vvhich is divisible, say by j: + ^ 9 that is, let ^ = (A) ^(P) = (A)(x + l) consequently (8.), (A) is divisible by x^ ; ^r A = (B) that is (A) = X^{B) Therefore, X^F) = x^{B)(x + l) (P)= (B)(a:+1) or ^^ = (B) that is, P (as well as x^F) is divisible by x -f- 1, and the same may be shewn of any other divisor of x^'P, The method of finding the highest common divisor of two rational polynomials is now exactly similar to that of finding the greatest common measure of two whole numbers in arithmetic. For example, required the highest common divisor of x^ — x and 3x^ — 3x*, First separate the monomial factors; that is, put the expressions in the form x{x^^l) and 3j;4(a;4-l) Neglect the monomial factors for the present, and proceed to find the highest common divisor of afi^l = p and a^^l = Q a;4— l)ar^— l(a; Rem. or— l)ar*— l(^a^ + x^-\-x-i-} Rem. 178 CLASSIFICATION OP EXPRESSIONS, ETC. By (7.) the highest divisor of j:*— 1 and j:* — 1 is also that of X* — 1 and X — 1; and, since x — 1 divides the former, and also is the highest divisor of itself, it is the highest divisor common to the two, and, therefore, the highest divisor of .r*— 1 and x* — l. The original expressions have also the divisor x; consequently, j:(j? — 1) is their highest common divisor. Any power of x may be thrown out of a remainder by division, from theorem 9. For instance, in finding the highest common divisor of 1 — j:3 and 1 — x*; the first remainder is x^ — jr* or x^(l — x^); but 1 — x' has all the divisors of x^ — x*, except those which are powers of x. But 1 — j:* and 1 — a:* are neither divisible by a power of X ; consequently, 1 — x* contains all their common divisors, as well as x^ — X*, and the former may be used for the latter in any division. The divisor may be taken any number of times which may be convenient, before using it as a new dividend. For instance, in finding the greatest common measure of x' — 2x4-1 and x* — 1, the first remainder is 2x* — x — 1; before dividing by this,* it will be convenient to multiply x* — 2x + l by 2, and no new common divisor will thus be introduced. The whole process in the latter case may be as follows, wiiich, though not the shortest possible, will illustrate the methods to be applied to more complicated cases. X*— 2x4-l)x' — l(x x^ — 2 x' 4- * 2j.«—jr — l)2x«— 4x4-2(1 2x* — X — 1 — 3x4-3 Divide by —3 x— l)2x*— x— l(2x + 1 2x«— 2x X — 1 X— 1 Therefore x — 1 is the highest common divisor. * The division might be carried one step further before using the remainder; but either method answers equally well. ON BERIES AND INDETBRMINATE COEFFICIENTS. 179 CHAPTER VIII. ON SERIES AND INDETERMINATE COEFFICIENTS. We have already seen (page 160) that the sum of the terms (j being less than 1) how far soever it may be carried, never can exceed or come up to l-r-(l — x). This expression is called an infinite series, and the fraction 1 -f- (1 — x) v^^hich (page 150) might be called the limit of the sum, is called the mm. Definition. By the sum of an infinite series is meant the limit towards which we approximate by continually adding more and more of its terms. A convergent series is one in which such a limit exists, that is, in which we cannot attain a number as great as we please by summing its terms : a divergent series is one in which there is no limit to the quantity which may be attained by summing its terms. The follow- ing series are divergent, and all but the last, evidently so. 1+1 + 1 + 1+ &c. 1+2 + 3+4+ &c. 1+2+4 + 8+ &c. l + ^ + l + i+ *^*^* In an infinite series, we must know the connexion which exists between each term and the next, otherwise we cannot reason upon it. For, as we cannot write down all the terms, it is only from knowing the connexion between successive terms that we can be said to know of what series we are speaking. So that an infinite series with no law of connexion existing between its terms, has no existence for the purposes of reasoning. The student might perhaps imagine that the law is immediately perceptible when the first four or five terms are given, and an obvious connexion exists between them. For instance, he would suppose that the following series 1+1 + 1+1 + 1+1+1+1+1+ &c. * See Arithmetic, article 197. 7 16 22 6 10 9 5 10 11 79 85 94 180 ON SERIES AND i if it be to be continued according to a law actually existing among the given terms, must be a succession of units added together. But this is not the case ; the preceding series might be continued in an infinite number of different ways, each different method following a law which actually exists among the given terms as they stand. For instance, the preceding series might be thus continued : 9th term. 10th. 11th. 12th. 13th. 14th. I5tb. 16th. 1 1 2 3 4 6 7 10 &c. the law of which is, that the (n + 0^^ exceeds the nth by the tens figure of the sum of the first n terms, which requires that the terms should remain equal until their sum has a figure in the second column. The following series of terms have laws which we leave to the reader to detect. 26 3? 36 42 adinfin, 3'^'"^'^^"^'^ 10 9 10 9 a(/f«>.-h^^/,-t'/,-^^/y 15 21 30 39 43 62 61 70 94 103 109 109 109 adinfin. If we attempt to deduce general propositions from a few par- ticular cases, as, for instance, the law of a series from that of a few of its terms, we are liable to error. All that can be derived from observing a few cases is a strong presumption, high probability, or great likelihood, that the law observed is always true. But that which is beforehand very likely, does not always turn out, on ex- amination, to be true : as in the following instance. Take the series of numbers 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, &c. multiply each by the next higher, and add 41 to the product, as follows : 1 X 2 -f- 41 = 43 5 X 6 H- 41 = 71 2x3 + 41 =47 6x7 + 41 =83 3x4 + 41 =53 7x8+41 =97 4x5+41 =61 8x9+41 = 113, &c. On examining the series of results 43, 47, 63, 61, 71, 83, 97, 113, &c. we see that all of them seem to be prime* numbers, and hence we * A prime number is one which does not admit of any divisor except 1, and itself. The series of prime numbers is 1, 2, 3, 5, 7, 11, 13, 17, 19, &c. INDETERMINATE COEFFICIENTS. 181 have a very strong reason for presuming tbat tliis will continue to be the case, tbat is, we suspect the following to be true : if jt be any whole number, i'(jr + 1)-f 41 is a prime number. And on conti- Duing the series, we actually find prime numbers, and nothing but prime numbers, up to 39 x 40-f 41 or 1601. But, nevertheless, the next term, or 40 X 41 +41, is evidently not a prime number ; for it is (40 + 1)41, or 41 X4l. To avoid the continual necessity of expressing the law of a series, we always mean, in future, that, where a simple law appears among the few terms which are written down, that law is to be the law of the series, unless some other law be mentioned. Thus 1 + jr +x' + &c. implies that the succeeding terms are r* + j* + j:* + &c. Definition. The general term of a series is the algebraical expression for the nth term, as will be better understood from the following cases. First few terms. nth, or general term. 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 + &c. 1 1+2+ 3+ 4+&C. n 2+3+ 4+ 5+ &c. n + 1 + 1 + 2 + 3 + &c. n— 1 1+4+ 9 + 16+ &c. n« 4-|.9 + 16 + 25+ &c. (n + l)» * + drJ^r» + jr*+ &c. 47» 1+jr +jr2 + a:»+ &c. j:n-l gm ^ jm+1 _|- ^+2 ^ jm+3 ^ &c. j>m+n— 1 *+i + T+T + '^- n ^ + '+2<3 + *"=- X»»-l 1.2.3....(n— 1) In the last series, the first terra is not included in the g( rm. HR eriven. For if n = 1. the Q reneral term becomes . „ - '"h which is not true. Properly speaking, the general term is n factors of the following product : ^ Su X *Mf X iXjX-X-X- Theorem. The series a + 6 + c + e +y+ &c. is the same as the following: 182 ON SERIES AND i a oa c a e c a ) The student will have no difiSculty in proving this. Let the ratio* of each term to the preceding term be denoted by the capital letter of tl)e numerator. ^ = B i = C - = E ^=F&c. a b c e Then a + b-\-c+e +/+ &c. is a{l+B + CB4-ECB + FECB + &c.} (1) If every one of the ratios, B, C, E, F, &c., be less than some given quantity, say P, then a(l + B) is less than a(l + P) a(l+B + CB) a(l+p + pp) &c. &c. or the sum of any number of terms of (1) is less than that of the same number of terms of a(l+P + P2 + PH&c.) (2) If, then, P itself be less than unity, (1) must be a convergent series; for no number of terms of 1 + P -f P* 4- &c. can then exceed 1 -J- (i«-P), consequently, no number of terms of (2) cfe exceed a -f- (1 — P) ; still less can any number of terms of (1) exceed the same, because the terms of (1) are severally less than those of (2). Consequently, a series is always convergent when the ratio of any term to the preceding term is less than some quantity^ which is itself less than unity. It is sufficient that this should happen after some certain number of terms : for, say that the first hundred terms are increasing terms, yet if no summation of terms after the hundredth will give a result exceeding, say 50, and if the sum of the first hundred terms be, say 1000, then no summation whatever will give a result exceeding 1050, or the series is on the whole convergent, or, properly speaking, begins to converge after the hundredth term. * r- is the algebraical synon3nne for what is called in Euclid " the ratio of a to 6," and the geometrical term, which is a highly convenient one, is frequently adopted. IKDBTEBMINATB COBFFICIBNTS. 183 Exampk. l + l+l+^^+^^ + kc. U coDTergent. For here we have 5- = 1 i=l 1=1 t]^==l&c a b 2 c 3 e 4' 90 that each ratio after the second is less than -, which is less thau 2 unity. [As the limit of this series is an important number in algebra, we shall proceed to find it as fiir as 10 decimal places, using eleven places to insure the accuracy of the 10th. Let the terms be called ^1) f^v &c., then we have 111 1 1 , fli = J fifg = 1 fls = -a£ a^ = -cfs % = -a4 &c. Ojssl 1 00000000000 02=1 1-00000000000 03 = -Oj 0-50000000000 04=^03 -16666666667 Os = icf4 -04166666667 Og = -05 -00833333333 5 Wj =3 iflg •00138888889 1 7 1 Og = -^7 -00019841270 Oq as -^8 -00002480159 8 fllO"* -«9 -00000275573 ail= iflio -00000027557 ai2=5= — «ii -00000002505 ai3= JL^jg -00000000209 kit ai4= r^-aia -00000000016 13, ai5= j^flM -0000000000 1 2-7182818284S 184 ON SERIES AND This is correct to the last place ; in fact, the sum of the series lies between 2-71828182845 and 2-71828182846 but nearer to the latter. The letter c (and sometimes e) is used to denote the limit of this sum ; or we say that 8=1+1+^+ :rT+ ^^' (= 2-71828182846verynearly.) The above series is said to converge rapidly.^ Theorem. The series a + 6 -f c -f &c. is always divergent, when- b c ever its terms are so related that -, 7-, &c., are all greater than unity, a b or continue so from and af^er a given term. As the demonstration of this theorem is very like that of the last, we leave it to the student. Theorem. The series a — 6-|-c — c + fitc. is convergent when- ever the terms decrease without limit ; that is, when a is greater than h, b greater than c, &c., and when some term or other of the series must be less than any fraction we may name. Let a, b, c, e, &c. be a series of decreasing terms, as in the theorem, then (a — i) + (i — c) + (c — e)+ &c. must be a converging series, for the sum of the first two terms is a — c, of the first three, a — e, and so on. Now, since a,b,c,c .... decrease without limit, a — c,a — e, &c. is a series of increasing terms which has the limit a. Consequently, the series made by taking only alternate terms of the preceding, must have a limit less than a. But that series is a — i + c — e + &c. whence the theorem is proved. Hence we know that 1 — - + i — i+ &c. is convergent, with a limit less than 1. Theorem. If any given quantity P be greater than any one of the series of ratios * ^l-^f &c. a b c e J IKDBTBBMIKATE COEFFICIENTS. 185 then the series a'hbx'{-ca^+ex^+fx^+ffr^+ &c (A) is convergent whenever x is less than r^. For, since the preceding series is a f 1 + * a; + ^^ .«« + - . X • -;r» + &«.} \ * a b a c b a^ j b e and since P is greater than -, r, kc, the preceding series will be b c increased by writing P instead of -, ?-, &c. But it then becomes a{l+Pj: + P*a:«+P^a;*+ &c. } or a{l+(Px) + (Par)« + (Px)^+ &c.} which (page 159) is convergent if Pj: be less than 1, or j;* less than -5-. Still more is the original series convergent under the same circumstances, because its terms are severally less than those of the last series. If P be greater than any one of the ratios af^er some given ratio, the series converges from and after the term which gives that ratio, livhenever Pj? is less than 1. Suppose, for instance, that the thou- sandth and following terms of the series (A) are Ax»9+Bar'«» + Ca;i<»'+ &c. or Aj999 |H. |.;P+ ^ |.a;2+ &c.} Then, by the preceding reasoning, if P be greater than any of the 'B C 1 ratios -j-, -^j &c. the preceding series converges if j: be less than ~. For instance, take l+2ar + 3a;«+4a:»-f &c. 2 3 4 5. ratios T « « T fitc. 12 3 4 2 is greater than any of these ratios after the first; consequently, this series converges from the second term if x be less than -. The hundredth and following terms are 100a:^ + 101xi«^ + 102a:^<>^+ &c. R 2 186 ON SERIES AND 101 102 103 p 100 101 102 101 of which — - is greater than any except the first. Consequently, this series converges from the hundredth term, if x be less than 1 "T- rrr: or --— . Similarly it may be shewn that this series is con- 100 101 vergent whenever x is less than 1, though the term at which con- vergency begins may be made as distant as we please, by making X sufficiently near to 1. As a second example, take •I ** x^ X* X -r ^ T 2 ^ 2.3 ^ 2.3.4 ^ ratios 1 x - - &c. 2 3 4 Since these ratios continually diminish, and without limit, a point of the series will come, after which they will all be less than any given fraction m, however small it may be. But if m may be made as small as we please, — may be made as great as we please. Therefore this series is convergent for every value of x, however great; though the greater x is taken the more distant will be the term at which convergency begins. As a third example, take 1 +2ar+2.3a:« + 2.3.4a:3+ &c. ratios 2, 3, 4, 6, &c. and as these ratios increase without limit, there is no quantity which is greater than them all. Consequently, no value can be assigned to X for which this series must necessarily be convergent. The following theorem may easily be proved in the same manner as the last. b c Theorem. If P be less than any one of the ratios - y, &c.; ^ a ' then the series a + 6a; + ca;2+ ^^ must be divergent for every value of x greater than — . In this way the series in the last example may be shewn to diverge from the second term for every value of x greater than -, 3 INDETERMINATE COEFFICIENTS. 187 from the third for every value greater than -, and so on; so that there is no fraction so small that the series shall not diverge from and after some term by giving x that value. [Such necessarily divergent series never will be found in practice : tliey are introduced here as a warning against applying to all series general conclusions drawn from series which may be made con- vergent.] In future, unless the contrary be specially mentioned, in speaking of the series a-f-bx4-cx*-|- &c., we only mean to speak of series which may be made convergent. We suppose all the terms positive. Theorem. Every series of the form a-\- bx-\-cx^'{- &c. has this property, that x may be taken so small, that any one term shall contain the aggregate of all the following terms as often as we please. For instance, by taking x sufficiently small, we may make ex* more than ten thousand times ex^ -\-fx* + &c. Let x^ be the greatest value of X which makes e +fx-{- &c. convergent, and let the sum in that case be S. Then, for every value of x less than x^, e -{-fx + &c. is less than S. Now, cx^ contains ex^ -\-f^* + &c. ,2 ^ cx' or . ^ „ . » — or ex^-\-fx*-\-&cc, ex -\-fx^ -\-^c. x(e -{-fx-^-hc) times or parts of times. Take x less than x^, so that S is greater than e -{-fx + &c., or c - . c c.r* — ^ less than — ; — —r. — r-z — ; or xS x(e -^fx + &c.) ex^ -\-f^* -\- &c. Now, c and S being fixed quantities, x may be taken so small that c ^ xS shall be as great as we please; and still more cx* 'T' {€x^ +fx* + &c.), which is greater than c ^i- xS, Whence the theorem is proved. Example. How small must x be taken, so that we may be sure the fourth term of l+2a: + 3a;2+4a:^ + 5a:*+ &c. contains the sum of all that follow 1000 times at least. The whole of the series after the fourth term may be written thus : 5a:*|l + ja;+^.|a^+&c.J (A) and -r is greater than any of the succeeding ratios; consequently, we o increase the preceding by altering it to 188 ON SERIES AND 6ar*|l-f Tar+ -.-a:*4- &c.| or — (B) 5 (see page 182.) We have then to take s, so that 5x* 4x^ is greater than 1000 5 . , 1 — -a; must be greater than 260 X 5a: or 1260ar, 4jr /' 5 which is certainly true if 1 — 2x be greater than 1250 jr, or 1 greater than 1252 J, or -— - greater than x. In this case 4j:* is greater than 1000 times (B); still more then is it greater than 1000 times (A). Theorem. If the two series ao + ai^x + a2a^+ &c. and 60+^1^ + 62^^+ &c. be always equal for -every finite value of x, then it must follow that a^ ^ Iq, flj = 61, (7, = 62, &c. or the series are identically the same. Let these series be called Aq + A and b^ -j- B, in which, by what has just been proved, we can make A and B less than the mih parts of Oq and 6^. If possible, let Oq and Bq be different numbers, and let Cq = bQ-{-t. Then, since the series are always equal, we have (io-f-A = 6o-f-Bor6o-f ^ + A = 60 + B; that is, t= B— A. But because Oq and 6^ are fixed quantities, their difference is the same ; and we have t, a fixed quantity, equal to the difference of two quan- tities, each of which may be made as small as we please, which is absurd. Hence a^ = 60 + ^ cannot be; and by the same reasoning, OqZs: Bq — t cannot be; therefore Qq ^ 6^. Take away these equal terms from the two equal series, and divide the equal remainders by ar, which gives a^-^-azX + a^x^-i- &c. always equal to ii -[-620:4-^3^*+ &c. from which the same species of proof gives Aj =: 6| ; repeat the process of subtracting equal terms and dividing by x, and the repetition of the proof gives a, = ^2 > ^^^ ^^ ^^' Hence, if one or more terms be wanting in either series, the same must be wanting in the other ; for instance, if a — jt be always equal to aQ-^-a^x -■\-a^xi^-\- &c., we must have a = Aq, — 1 = ap = a,, = a^, &c. [The preceding process amounts simply to shewing that we may INDETERMINATE COEFFICIENTS. 189 make jr = in a series, and take the ordinary algebraical con- sequences, in the same manner as if the expression were finite in its number of terms. For instance, if ff^ + (X|X -{- &c. be always s= 60 -{- 6, JT + &c., we have proved that the consequence of making 4r = 0, namely, a^ = b^y is true. But, as we have sufficiently seen, it is not safe to say that when x = 0, P = Q, except in cases where we may say that by making x sufficiently small (or near to nothing), P may be brought as near to Q as we please. The difficulty which we have avoided is as follows : In the series 1 ■■\-2s '\-2.3jc^ -{- &c. we have seen that, take x as small as we may, the sum of the terms can be made as great as we please. Are we, then, entitled to say, that when x = 0, the preceding becomes 1 + + + &c. or 1 ? If the number of terms were finite, there could be no doubt of the pro- priety of answering in the affirmative; but when the number of terms is infinite, nothing that has preceded will enable us to give an answer. The student will remember that we have confined the demonstration entirely to series which admit of being made convergent. It is usual to prove the preceding* by saying, that when the two series are always equal, they are equal when J7 = 0, and consequently Oq ^ b^y and so on. This is avoided in the present case ; and we may say that we have proved the following theorem. If two series (which can be made convergent) are always equal when x is finite, then they are also equal when jr = 0.] * On this point the student, when he is more advanced, may consult Professor Woodhouse, Analytical Calculations, &c. Preface, p. viii. note. It is there objected that to make x » and thence to deduce a^ = b^, is the same as arbitrarily making a^ — b^. This I conceive to he not the true point of difficulty. All mathematical consequences are necessarily contained in the hypotheses fron^ which they spring : so that to invent any hypothesis is necessarily to invent all its consequences, some of which may be so near as to appear nothing more than the hypothesis itself, others so little perceptible as not to seem necessary attendants of the hypothesis. The real objection to the proof on which this note is written, I conceive, is this, that having frequently found the passage from X as a symbol of magnitude, to x as the symbol not of magnitude but of the absence of all magnitude, to be attended vrith consequences which require a special examination, it is not allowable to enter upon any new ground, without either establishing the accordance of the conse- quences of X as 0, with those of x «= some magnitude, or distinguishing and explaining the discrepancy, if any. fc 190 ON SERIES AND The following are a few instances of the method by which we can obtain the limits of the sums of many series. First, let us take P =r l4.a;-fa:«-i-a;»+a?*+ &c. in which we wish to determine a finite algebraical expression for P. It is plain that 1 +x-fj:«+ &c. arftn/"- = 1 +^{l +* + **+ &c. fldtn/:i that is, P = l+a;P or P = -J- 1— J? a result previously ascertained. Now, let us take V P = l-^2x-\'33fi+4x^+ &c. \ 5^ = 2 + 3a;4-4a;« + 6a;»+ &c. ^^ — P = l+X + X^ + X^-i- &C. =7-^ whence P«j 1> = h - = -.t {x J 1 — X X X 1— J? Next, let P = l+3x + 5a^-^7x^+ &c. — P = 2 + 2a;4-2a;«+2a;»+ &c. = j-^ X 1 +jr whence P = Next, let P == l-\'4x+9a^-i'l6x^'h &c. ^"^ = 4f^9x + l6x^-^25x^+ &c. X p— 1 X — P = 3 + 5a? + 7a;«+9a;*+ &c. r. {^^'P)x + l =l+3a;+6a;«+&c. = ^-l±^ whence P = (1 -*)» The same method might be applied to finding a more simple algebraical expression for the sum of any finite number of terms of the preceding series. For example, let INDETERMINATE COEFFICIENTS. 191 P 5= \+2x+3a^+ +(n— l)a;"-« + na:"-* ?=1 = 2H-3x+4a;«+ +naf"^ X — P = l+a:+j:«+ +a:"-"— nx^' (page 103) = na:"-* = ^^ — -r-^— ■ ^ ^ ' 1 — X 1 — * p _ n.r"+^ — (n + l)3:» + l (l-.x)« The student may endeavour to prove the following : l+3a: + 5a:*+..+(2n— l)a:~-^ = ^q 5- — -i---i-- \\'-^X) The inquiry which we have most frequently to make is the in- verse of the preceding; not, having given the series to iind its sum, but, having given an expression, to find the series of which it is the sum, or to develope it in powers of some one of the Utters contained in it. ' Let us suppose, for example, that we want a series of powers of X with coefficients, &c. which shall be, in all cases in which it is convergent, equal to (1 -j- a:) -7- (1 — x)'. Suppose the^eries to be Oq + a^x -{- a^x* -{- &c., so that we have Multiply both sides by (1— jt)' or 1— 2jr + x' 1+a: = fOo + ai x + az x^+az a;3+ &c. "j — 2^0^— 2aia*— 2a2a;^— &c. \ -i-flfo ar^+fli a;3+ &c. J = ao+(ai— 2ao)^ + (a2— 2ai+flfo)a:*+ &c. The two sides of this equation being equal for every value of x, the theorem in page 188 gives aQ=^\ flfi— 2e/o =1 or ai = 3 ag — 2ai + ao = or og = 5 «3 — 2a2 + fli = or 03 = 7 &c. &c. So that the series is 1 -^Zx •\-5x^-\- &c. as already determined. The first term of the preceding might have been found imme- diately : for, since we have proved that the results of or = may be 192 ON SERIES AKD employed, and since (1 +x) -f- (1 — jt)* becomes 1, and the series is reduced to Oq, when x = 0, we have Oq = 1 . We shall now ask what is (1— j:*) -f- (1— J?) expanded in a series of powers of x. The first term is 1, found as in the last sentence; let us suppose 1 —J* X = l+aiX'\-aaX^'\-as3:^-^a43r-^ &c. 1 X — X— ttio:*— aga:*— as^— fi^4^+ &c. As there is no first power of x on the first side, we must have a^ — 1=0, or a, = 1. Similarly, a^ — a,=0, or a^=saiZ=l ; a^ — 03 = 0, 03 = 1. But the coefficient of x* on the first side being — 1, we must have 04 — 03= — 1, ora^ — 1 =s — 1, thatis, a4:=0; again, a^ — a^zszO, or a^ =s 0, a, — a^ == 0, or a^ = 0, and so on. Hence the series is l+2; + x2 + x34-0xar*+0xar^+ &c. that is l-\'X + x^ + a^ as might be found by simple division, or from page 103. Thus, we see thaA'when we assume an infinite series to represent a quantity which is in fact a finite expression, the method of determining the coefficients of the series will shew the coefficient for every term of the series which does not exist in the finite expression. Again, to develope 1 -7- (1 + a:*) assume o = ao + «i^ + fif2^^ + as^'+ &c- the preceding process will give ^0 = 1 az'\-aQ = OT 0^=^ — 1 04 + flfi = or ^4 = 1 a^ = ^3 + fli = or ^3 = ^5 + 03 = or ^5 = so that the series is l+Oxx—x^ + Oxx^ + x^ + Oxx^Sic. or '^—X^'\-X^^x^+ he. If it happen that, by the preceding process, an equation is produced of which the two sides cannot be made identical by any suppositions as to the value of the coefficients, it is a sign that the expression cannot be developed in a series of the form proposed. If we try to develope 1 -J- (1 -far) a: by assuming k we shall find INDETERMINATE COEFFICIENTS. 193 = aQ + aiX'\-a<iX^'\-asa:^'\- &c. 1 = aoX-^(ai'\-aQ)x^+(a2-^ai)a^'\- &c. the two sides of which cannot on any supposition be made to agree ; for there is no term independent of x on tlie second side which may be made ^ 1 . In fact, we should find T— ; — = 1— a;4-a;*— a;^-i- &c. 1 -f-x (-f-)a: -7tV-n = — l+a;-.a;2+ &c. ^ ^ x{l-\-x) X so that the fraction proposed cannot be developed entirely in whole and positive powers of Xy without the introduction of a negative power (in this case jt-^). The following are given as exercises: 1. If P = ao'haiX+aQX^+ &c. then p p l-^x 2. ^ a = 1— a: + a:3— x*-f^— a:'^+ &c. 3. iif =i_(J^_l)^+a_i);,«_&e. c+jp c \c' J 'Vc* c/ 'p-\-qx p \p^ pi \ jD* p^ i 194 ON EQUALITY IK ALGEBRA CHAPTER IX. ON THE MEANING OF EQUALITY IN ALOEBUA, AS DISTIN- GUISHED FROM ITS MEANING IN ARITHMETIC. In pag6 62, among the extensions of terms, we notified that the word equal was to be considered as applicable to any two expressions of which one could be substituted for the other without error. Hitherto we have only applied this extension to the case of definite algebraical quantities, either positive or negative : the numerical value of the quantity determining its magnitude, the sign determining only which of two opposite relations is intended to be expressed. We now pro- ceed to consider the word equal, or its sign =, not in a sense wider than any which the definition will bear, but wider than any in which we have yet had occasion to use it. Two expressions are said to be equal when one can be substituted for the other without error. The whole force of this definition lies in the answer to the question. What is error ? The answer is, any thing which leads to contradictory results, or which may in any legitimate way be made to lead to contradictory results. Results are contradictory when, both being intelligible, or capable of interpretation, the two do not agree ; but they are not necessarily contradictory merely because one or both are unintelligible, for where the meaning of any part of an assertion is unknown, we cannot say whether it be true or false. For instance, in page 23, the expression c c X ^ •-• was no contradiction of any thing which had preceded, for - had no meaning. Having ascertained this, our object was to give it a meaning which should not contradict any thing deducible from preceding principles. We have shewn that if x be less than unity, the summation of 1 1 -\- X ■\- x^ '\- 8tc. will continually give results nearer to , which however can never be absolutely reached by that process. Hence we used the sign = in the equation AND IK ARITHHETIC. 196 = 1 +x+a:^+a^ + &c. ad infinitum. 1 1— « Arithmeticalfy speaking, we can make the preceding as nearly true as we please, by taking a sufficient number of terms from the second side. Algebraically speaking, the above may be considered as absolutely true ; but it must be remembered that this is only oii a supposition which is arithmetically impossible, namely, that all the terms on the second side, expressed and implied^ shall be considered as included. For instance, we know that the multiplication of the first side by 1 — x* gives 1+^; the multiplication of the second side by the same gives l+X+X^+x^+ai^ + x^+ &c. adinf. — a:2— a;*— ar*— or^— &c. adinf. or l+a? + 0+0 + + 0+ &c. adinf. in which we can prove, if necessary, that every succeeding term shall be 0; not by actually looking at every term, which is im- possible, but by a deduction from what we know to be the law of the series. Similarly, we shew that jr^^xar^ss a!^+f^; not by looking at evexy case, which is impossible^ but by what we know of the meaning of ^. If we proceed arithmetically, taking any number of terms, how- ever great, say as far as a**^ we then have {l+x+x^+ .... +a:^-^ + af»)x(l-a:«) =z a+x+x^+x^-i- .... +af^^ + af' in which, since x is less than 1, n can be taken so great that x*^-^^ ^nd ^+^ shall be as small as we please. Here is algebraical equa- lity whicfi can be made arithmetical equality, guam proximt. Let us now suppose that x is greater than 1 ; say x =i2; the series l-i-X + X^+X^-i- kc. ad infinitum is then, arithmetically speaking, infinite, since there is no limit to the magnitude we may obtain by summing 1 +2 + 4-|-8+ &c- Should we then assert algebraical equality between - and the pre- e 196 ON EQUALITY IN ALGEBRA ceding series? We have no right to do so from pages 21, &c. for tliough it was there shewn how to make it clear that -- is above all arithmetical numeration , the converse does not therefore follow^ that whatever is above arithmetical numeration is properly represented by -. What, then, is the proper algebraical representative of the preceding series ? If it have one, let us call it P ; then, since the series itself is the same as l-i-x|l+a:-fx2+ &c. ad infinitum^ P cannot be used for the above unless 1 +xP may be substituted for P. Or we must have % P = \-\-xV which gives P = the same result as when x is less than unity. And we may shew, in the same way as in the last page, that any algebraical operation performed either upon , or upon 1 +x -f^-h &c. gives but one result: indeed, since there is in algebraical multiplication no stipulation that the quantities employed must be positive, the process there employed is equally applicable in the case where x is greater than 1. But in this case we cannot obtain (as in last page) any approach to arithmetical equality, but the direct reverse ; for j:«+i and j^+3 increase, instead of decreasing, as n increases. The method of expanding algebraical quantities in pages 191, &c. does not require that x shall lie within the limits of convergency : but the process is equally conclusive in all cases. To expand -, for instance, we ask what expression of the form flo + OiJr-l- &c. 1 will be the same as t-- — . All we know of the latter lies in its 1 + x definition, that, multiplied by 1 + jt, it gives 1. The series 1 — .j? -f- X* — x^-\- &c. has this property, independently of the value of x. We shall now ascertain, 1st, that so far as instances can shew it, we may prove that this general use of the sign == will not lead to inconsistent results : 2d, that we are not obliged to depend upon such a species of proof, but that the result is one which necessarily follows from the nature of our primary assumptions. AND IN ARITHMETIC. 197 To try tlie first, let us assume that, in all cases, -i- 3s 1— a: + a;«— x3+a:*+ &c. ad inf. We have then, if x = 1, I r= 1 — 1-f 1 — 1 + 1— 8tc. adinf. a result which is in no sense the expression of an arithmetical equality ; for the above series continued to an even number of terms must be 0, and to an odd number of terms, 1. We shall now try whether alternate addition and subtraction of a quantity to and from itself, ad infinitum, will or will not, when treated algebraically, give the half of the quantity in question. Let us suppose P z= l+x+x^ + x^+ &c. 1 — P = -l-a:— a;«- &c. + P = +1 +x + &c. -P = - 1 - &c. J .% P-P+ P-&C. = l+{x^l)+a^-x+l + kc. x+l :r»— 1 ^•-l-l (pagelOS) =-+^ + __. + ^ + &c. _ jr-i-r'-i-3:» + &c . i— i-fi^&c . X'\-l ■*■ x + 1 But P = -i-,and x+3^+x*-\- &c. = x(l-\-x+x*+^.) =— ^; if, therefore, the preceding process be algebraically equivalent to halving and if 1 — 1+1 — 1 + &c. may be changed into -, we have the following equation : 1 1 _ -1=7 1 1 (A) 2 1— X x-j-1 ' 2 X'\-l 1 1 _ _£_ • 1 ^ ^^ 2 1 — J ^ l-.x«'*"2 x + l which will be found to be true. The above contains the algebraical artifice of writing the series (A) in the form ] '^X-^X^+X^'\- &c. — 1— a:— j;«— &c. &c. &c. s2 I 198 ON EQUALITY IN ALGEBRA instead of l+x + x^-\-a^+ &c. — 1— a:— j;*— x'^ &c. &c. &c. or (1 — r+l4- &c.) + (a:— a; + a;+ &c.) + &c. But it is to be observed, that we do not say that every algebraical use of as will produce arithmetical equalities, but only that when- ever an algebraical use of =s does produce an arithmetical equation, we shall find that equation to be arithmetically true : an assertion as yet uncontradicted. We now proceed to the second point. We have previously so constructed the meaning of the funda- mental symbols of algebra, that algebra, in certain cases, coincides entirely with arithmetic ; and, more than this, the rules which follow from the definitions are so constructed, that when the result only is arithmetical, and preceded by algebraical steps, the alterations necessary to make these steps arithmetical, produce no alteration in the result. This being the case at the outset, and it being shewn that the number of steps through which we pass by algebraical process does not affect the preceding statement, we then know, 1st, that all arithmetical results so deduced may be depended upon, as much as if they were arithmetically deduced ; 2d, that all results which are not explicable arithmetically, are such as are perfectly consistent with the definitions laid down ; and, if not always arithmetically true, cannot produce a result which shall be arithmetical and false. The reason why we have appealed to instances is, that the pre- ceding argument, being general and abstruse, will not be thoroughly understood by the student until he has a degree of exact compre- hension of the words employed, which can only be gained by familiarity with the use of algebraical language. There are also principles of reasoning,* independent of algebra, which are difficult, * Kemember that mathematical reasoning means reasoning applied to mathematics, and is not a different kind of reasoning from any other. The art of reasoning is exercised by mathematics, not taught by it ; nor is the mathematician obliged to use one single principle which is not employed in every other branch of reasoning. In fact, an opposite of this is the case ; there are principles in other branches of reasoning which are not employed in most branches of mathematics. Those who are not AMD IN ARlTH^ilETIC. 199 and which the beginner will therefore not conquer by algebra alone. Such is the following : that if assertions which are not inconsistent with each other are rationally and logically used, the conclusions cannot be inconsistent with each other. But though this, in its full extent, be a very difficult proposition for a beginner to understand, the difficulty is not an algebraical one. We have said, or at least implied, that when an arithmetical result is produced, the steps by which it was produced, if not already arithmetical, may be made so. Under arithmetical equality we in- clude not only the absolute notion of equality which we recognise in 4 + 5 = 9, but what we have called the quam proxime equality,* which we see in -1^ or 2=1+1 + 1+1 + &c. adinf. 1 2 Let us now suppose that a is less than i , but that we may sup- pose it as near to 1 as we please. Also, let x be less than 1 (which aware of this talk of mathematical demonstration as if it were distinct from all other kinds. But this is not the case ; mathematical demonstration is, so far as it goes, the same thing as any other demonstration ; the superior safety of mathematics lying, not in the method of arguing, but fii the reasoner knowing more exactly what he is talking about than is usual in other discussions. The mathematical sciences are concerned in whaterer can be counted or measured ; and whoever talks of mathematical demonstration^ as applied to any thing else, either means merely logical or certain demonstration, or does not know what he is talking about. The opponents of mathematics are, of all men, those who pay this undue respect to mathematical reasoning ; which they invariably do, by asserting as a discovery and a triumph, that those who are only mathe- maticians frequently reason ill on other subjects. We recommend the student to believe this whenever he meets with it, and to act accordingly ; for it is an important truth, though not either a great or recent discovery — having been, in point of fact, ascertained immediately after the fall by our common ancestor, who, having till then been nothing hut a gardener, must have foimd himself but an indifferent tailor. * We are not here stepping even beyond the bounds of ordinary arithmetic. For vlO, v 11, &c. have no other but a quam proxime existence ; we can find fractions which, multiplied by themselves, shall be as near as we please to 10 ; we can sum "^t a> 1* ^^* ^^^^ ^® come as near as we please to 2, 200 ON EQU AlTY IK ALGEBRA is necessary to the arithmetical existence of the final equation), and we have 1 "* > arithmeUcally j-^ = l+ar + x^ + a;« + &c.J ^2) — a — aa; — aa;* — &c. + a^+a^x+ &c. — a*— &c. = 1 — (a — a;) -h (a;* — aa? + a^) — &c. supposing a > a; = — 1^ 1 1 — — &c. a-^-x a-\-x a-j-a? a — a^'\-a^ — &c< x -|- jp* -j- jt* -f- &c. fl + J" O + J? a ^ I ^ 1 l-j-a'o + J^ 1 — x'a-\-x So long as we suppose a less than 1 (no matter how little), the preceding process is arithmetical; but the moment we suppose a = 1, the equation (1) loses all arithmetical character. But still, the last equation reduces itself to the one given in page 197. We have chosen a very simple case, but we might, with operations of sufficient length, and by various artifices, reduce any algebraical equality to an arithmetical one. But methods of doing this, at once short and general, cannot yet be understood by the student. Let X be first supposed positive; let it then become 0, and after- wards negative. The following and similar tables may then be made. Sign of a? + — Sign of - + oc — a;3 + - x* a;« + + i + « + . AND IK ARITHMETIC. 201 These, and other instances, give the following principle: If^ when X changes from a to b, passing through all intermediate values, the sign of a Junction of x change from positive to negative, or vice ▼ersft, the point at which the change takes place is marked by its value being either nothing or infinite; but the converse is not true, that a function always changes its sign when its value becomes nothing or infinite. a The infinite here spoken of is the form - ; but, as we have seen, all methods of obtaining an arithmetical infinite (we should rather say all arithmetical methods of increasing number without limit), are not properly represented by -. If we take the equation — — = l^x+X^+X^-^- hQ.adinf we see that when x is greater than 1, the second side is, arithmetically speaking, only an indication of a method of obtaining number with- out limit, while the first side is negative. There is then a change of sign when x passes, say from ■- to 2, and the change takes place when x=: 1, giving, 2=l. + l+l+l+&c. i = 1+1+1 + 1 +&C. -1 = 1 +2 + 4 + 8 + &C. We therefore see that a divergent series may be the algebraical representative of a negative quantity : but the series T^3^2 = 1 +2x + 3x^+4x^ + ^,0. which is divergent when x is greater than 1, gives a positive result in all cases. From this we see that when an equality specified is purely algebraical, we are not at liberty to compare magnitudes by any arith" metical comparison, if infinite series be in question. For instance, if a be greater than a', b greater than b', &c., we may say that a + b+ &c. is greater than a'+ b'+ &c. : 1st, so long as the number of both is finite; 2d, if a, b, &c. be so related that a + b+ &c. can never exceed a given limit. But we may not draw this conclusion 202 EQUALITY IN ALGEBRA AND IN ARITHMETIC. whan a + 6 + &c. increases without limit ; nor may we say ths algebraical representative of 1 -f 2 +4 -f &c. is greater than tl 1+5 + 5+&C. There is no liability to trangress this rule, because the qus in question must cease to be the object of arithmetic befor reasoning upon it can fail. Let it then be observed, that with r to divergent serieSf we admit no results of comparison except which are derived from their equivalent Jinite algebraical expressio i OH THE NOTATION OF FUNCTIONS. 203 CHAPTER X. ON THE NOTATION OF FUNCTIONS. We have already defined what is meant by a function of x (see page 168): the present chapter is intended to exemplify the method of denoting a function, either for abbreviation, or because we wish to allot a specific symbol to some unknown function. When we have to consider an expression, such as x^ + ax^ only with reference to the manner in which it contains x, that is, to reason upon properties which depend upon the manner in which x enters, . and the value of x, and not upon the manner of containing a, or its value, we call the expression a function of x, and denote it by a letter placed before jt, in the manner of a coefficient. But to avoid confounding this functional symbol with that of a coefficient, certain letters are set apart always to denote functional symbols, and never coefficients. These letters will be, in the present work, F, f, 0, -v^. Thus, by Vx,fx, ipx, ^x, we mean simply functions of x, given or not, as the case may be. By Tt^x we mean the same function of 0x which Fa: is of a: : for instance, if F x =i x -j- x^, F^jr is 0j? + (jp^T' Examples. Let <px = l-^x^ Fx = 1— a:* -Pfx = 1-(1 +0:2)2 = -2x2-a;* <p¥x = 1+(1— a;2)2 = 2'-2x^+x* Let (px = Of then 9(1 +x) = (I +xY <p(2x) = (2xy (p{(i) = a« ^i = J« &c. A functional equation is an equation which is necessarily true of a function or functions for every value of the letter which it contains. Thus, if 0x = ax^ we have ^(6^) = ahx = 6 x <px, or is always true when (^x means ax. Thus the following equations may be deduced: If <px '=z x^ <pxx<py =^ <p{xy) <px = a' <pxx(py ^ 9(^+y) / 204 OK THE NOTATION OF FUNCTIONS. (px = ax'\-h \ ^ = — ^ r ^x — ^Z X — Z (px = ax <px + <py => pC^+y) We can often, from a functional equation, deduce the algebraical form which will satisfy it : for instance, if we know that ^{xy) =x x ^y, supposing this always true, it is true when y = 1, which gives ^{x) zsz XX ^(1)* But ^(1) is an independent quantity, made by writing 1 instead of x in ^(a:). Let us call it c : it only remains to ascertain whether any value of c will satisfy the equation. Let ^x =i cx'y then ^{xy) = cxy, and xx^y =^ xxcy :=> cxy; whence 0(x^) =s x<l>y for all values of c, and <l>x being ex, ^(1) is c x 1 or c, as was supposed. Similarly, if (p{xi/) = (<pxy, by making a: = 1 we have (py = I ^(1) Y = C (px =-c* ^ixy) = (f^^ i(fy ^{<pxr and ^(1) = c* =sc, as was supposed. This, with the following theorem, will be sufficient for the investigations connected with functions which we shall need in this work. We have seen that if ^x = c* we have ^jrx^y = ^(j^ +y); ^"^ we do not know whether there may not be other functions of x which have the same property. We shall now, however, prove this con- verse, namely, that the equation ij>xxi>y = 0(^ H"^) ^^ ^® satisfied by no other function of x, except those of the form c*. Let us suppose ^x to be a function of such a character that whatever may be the values of x and y, the equation <pxx<py = <p{x+y) (A) is true. For y write a + 6, which gives <pxx<p{a + b) = (pix + a + b) But equation (A), as described, gives ^(a + fe) := 0aX0i, whence <pxx(pax<pb = 9(a: + a4-6) For either letter, a, for instance, write c + e, which gives (pxx<p{C'\-e)x<pb = 9(a:4-c4-€ + J) but (pic-\-e) = (pcx(pe whence (pxx <pcx (pex <pb = (p^x+c+e + b) ON THB NOTATION OP FUNCTIONS. 205 and so on : that is, if tliere be n quantities of any value whatsoever, namely, o^^ a^ a^ On-'U ^9 ^^ have Let these f» quantities be all equal to each other and to a, which gives . {fax^ax •••• X pax pa) __ /a+a+ .... +« + a\ ) there being a factors. 3 ^ there being n terms. / or if>ay = p(»a) where n is any whole number.* Similarly, if we had supposed m quantities each equal to 6, we should have had Now, m and n being whole numbers, let us suppose mb z=z na, which gives f (p(jnb) = <p(na) or (pS)** = (pa/* or fb=s (pa)"* but J =* — a, whence p(-^a) = (pa)' n im or the equation ^{pa) = (^a)** is true when p is a whole number, or a commensurable fraction (page 98). In the original equation (A), let jr = and y = 0, whence * -j-y =0. Let ^(0) be called c; we have then cXf== c, or c = 1. Theu let ^ = — x, or j: +^ = 0> which gives pa:xp(-a:) = p(0) = 1 or K"^) = ^' which being true for every value of x, is true if for x we write ;>«,/) being a whole number or commensurable fraction. This gives p(-/'«) = ^ = (^ = (?«)" * We cannot conceive a fraction of the preceding process. (See page 37). t Similar operations performed upon equal quantities must give equal results. J 206 ON THE NOTATION OP FUNCTIONS. or the equation is true Up be a negative whole number or commensurable fraction. Hence, as in page 204, by making a = 1, we determine (f>{p) = c^ where (provided p be commensurable) c may be any quantity whatever. The preceding equation will also be true when p is an incom- mensurable quantity, such as *J2y *>/ Ay &c. ; but the method by which we shall treat the consequences of this equation will render a proof unnecessary. Exercise. Shew that the equation is satisfied by (px = -^y^'+or') for every value of a : and also that <p{x-\-y) = (px + (pt/ can have no other solution than f)X = ax k Olf THE BINOMIAL THEOREM. 207 CHAPTER XI. OK THE BINOMIAL THEOREM. The binomial theorem is a name given to the method of expanding (fl-^by into a series (finite or infinite as the case may be) of powers of a and b^ n being either whole or fractional, positive or negative commensurable or incommensurable. The preceding case may be reduced to that of expanding {i-^x)* in a series of powers of x : for o + & = a(]+y (a + 5)"=a-(l + ^)" Let '=-9 and (1 + dr)* is the function to be expanded. As this theorem is of particular importance, we shall give two investigations of it : the first analytical, inquiring what is the series which is equivalent to (1 4*^)*; the second synthetical, shewing that the series so found is the one required. If it be possible, let (1 + j:)" be a series of whole powers of x of the form (1 + xY = flo + «ia? + ^aX^ + flj^ + &c. in which a^, a,, &c. are functions of n and not of x, a* — ff» Lemma. Whatever may be the value of n, the limit of -, a — ft to which it approaches as 6 is made more and more nearly equal to a, is na*"^. [When a = 6, observe that this fraction takes the form -, page 162.] First, let n be a whole number. Then, page 103, a — as 6 and a approach to equality, the limit of the second side is 208 OTf THE BINOMIAL THEOREM. k or Hid! or a"-'+a"-^ +0**"^ + .... 4-0""' +a" .n-l [That there are n terms in the preceding is evident from this, that there is a term for every power of 6 from 1 ton — 1, both inclusive, and one term independent of 6.] Secondly, let n be a fraction ^ where /) and q are whole numbers. We have then (in?)'' a— 6 a — 6 af — h? a^^b, ai — h^ now, as a approaches to ft, a, approaches to 6,, and as p and q are whole numbers, the limits of the numerator and denominator of the preceding arepo/"* and qaf"^; whence the limit of the fraction i C^or ?<- or Ha)'" or lJ~' or „„— Thirdly, let n be negative, and let the corresponding positive quantity be p, so that nsc~^p. Then a^—h'* _ a-P — b''P aP bP _^ 1 bP—aP a — b "~ a — b a-^b <i'6»'*fl— ft — ^ ^^—^^ ■" aPbP ^ a^b as fl approaches towards ft, the limit of the first factor is or aPaP — a—'Pf and that of the second (/? being positive) is, as already proved, paP-K Hence the limit of the preceding product is --a-'P X paP"^ or — pa-P-^, which, since « = — j9, is na"^-^. We now resume the assumed series (1 + xf^a^ + aix + a^ -f a,^ -i- &c. OH THE BINOMIAL THBOREM. 209 Let ^ be a quantity which may be made as near to x as we please ; the above series being supposed true for all values of jc, we may put^ in the place of x, which gives (1 + y)" = a© + fliy + Ost/^ + 8tc. (l + ^y-(l+y)'*=eii(a;-y)+a2(a;'-y«) + &c. Divide both sides by x — y, or (1 +x) — (1 +y)» (i+jf) — (i+y) * j^—y •r— y vrbich two sides being always equal, the limits to which they approach, as s and y approach to equality (in which case 1 +' ^^^^ 1 +y approach to equality), are equal ; or w(l + ar)"-^ = ai + 2a2X + Saj^x^ + 8cc. Multiply both sides by 1 + x. n(l + xy = fli + ^OicX + Sasx^ + 4a^x^ -f &:c. + aix + 2afiX^ -f 3a^x^ + &c. But w(l + x)*" = woo + nuiX + nusx^ + na^x^ + &c. therefore, page 188, «i = noo, 2a2 + «! = wai or a^ = -— — Oi = w ^- Qq 3. rt n — 2 fi — 1 »i — 2 a^-\- ZOi^nOi or a3= —— a2 = 7i. -——.——, ao o 2 3 A , o « — 3 n — \n — 2n — 3 4a4 + oa3 = wa3 or 04 = — j— a3 = w-^ ^ ^ a^ from which, by substitution and observing that a^ is a factor of all the terms, we have (1 +a;)"=ao(l +«a: + w'^a;« + w^-^'^a;3^g^ \ In which a^ is not yet determined. To determine it, we must first see whether the preceding series is ever convergent. But previously, we must observe that what we have proved is not, properly speaking, the truth of the above equation, but only that, if {\ +x)° can always be expanded in a series of whole powers qf\, the preceding series is the one. For we have assumed that (1 +x)* is flo + ^i^+^a^ + ^c., when, for any thing we know to the contrary, it might be a series of fractional, or negative, or mixed powers which t2 % 210 ON THB BINOMIAL THBOBBM* should have been chosen. 'Whenever, in our previous investigations, we have made an impossible supposition, we have always been warned of it at the end of the process by the appearance of some Dew and unexplained anomaly. As we have not, before this one, made any assumption of the form of an expansion other than we had either reason or experience to justify, and as we have neither for the one we have actually made, we know neither whether we are right, nor what is the index of our being wrong. It may be that die appearance of an always-divergent series would follow from a mistake, if ^ere be any. We therefore examine the preceding series. The ratios of the several terms to those immediately preceding are ,1—1 fj— 2 fi— 3 , nx ~17~^ a? X &c. 46 o 4 the general form of which is (/?-t-2)term ^ n— /? (/) + !) term p+1 First, we observe, that if n be a positive whole number, the series is finite : for the (n + 2)th term will contain n — n or as a factor, and so will all the following terms. We therefore take the case where n is fractional or negative. When p has passed n, the preceding ratio will be always negative, shewing that the terms become alternately positive and negative ; for that the ratio of two quantities is negative indicates that they differ in sign. Neglect the sign of the preceding, and make it positive. This we may do, as our object is to see whether the series can be made convergent, which a series of terms alternately positive and negative always can be, if the correspond- ing series of positive terms can be made convergent. We have then p — n px nx X nx ' X or -^ — '^^- or ■ » ■ — as we take higher and higher terms, the second term of the preceding diminishes without limit, and the first has the limit x. Consequently, if X be less than 1, the ratio above mentioned will, after a certjaiv number of terms, become less than unity, and wiU afterwards apr proximate continually to the limit ar. Tha( is, the aeries gt^taiQed is always convergeq^ when x is l^s than 1. This bein^ the c^se, we m^y, page 189, use the result of making ON THE BINOMIAL THEOREM. 21 1 jr = 0, winch gives (l)^=c: a^. If ti be a whole number, a^ = 1 ; but if n be a fraction, as ^ we hare (1) • = o^, a: (l**)' = (1)' , or a^ may be any 9th root of 1; see page 113. If we choose the arithmetical root, we find a^ss 1 ; and this series is (if the doubtful assumption be true) the arithmetical nth power of 1 + j*, when x is less than 1 , or the algebraical equivalent of (1 + x)** in all cases. We shall now shew that the series is correct whenever n is a whole number. Suppose it correct for any one whole number, say m. Then (gq being 1), Multiply both sides by 1 + j:. 4- ar + i» x^+m-^^ x^-{- &c. ^ 1 • / . i\ . / ^ — 1 . \^ , f ^ — 1 '" — 2 , m — 1\ - , ^ ^l+(m+l)x+[m-j-^m)jfi+[m— 3- + '^ -"2"/ ^ "^ ^^* n ^ 1 . ^W 1 . l\ WI + 1 , . Ix'W But m-^4-»i = w(^-^+lj=i»-^ = (m + l)2 m — 1 m — 2 . tn — 1 m — 1 /w? — 2 . ,\ , , -,.mm — 1 whence (l+xr+'s !+(>» + l)x + (»M + l)|x« + (m+l)|^^ar'+ &c. which, if we now write w for wi -|-1, or n— 1 for wi, becomes the same series, or follows the same law as /I . \« 1 . ^ — 1 o . w — 1 ^ — 2 • , - (^l^xT^l-tfix + n—^x^+n.— ^^+ &Ct Hence, if this expression be true for any one whole value of n, it is true for the next. But it is true when 9i = 1 ; for (l+a;)'=l+la; + l.^a;«+l.~.~a;»+ &c. therefore it is true when n =s 2 ; but it is therefore true when n = 3, and so on, ad infinitum. If we consider (1 + ^)* as a function of it, and call it 0n, we tee that 212 ON THE BINOMIAL THEOREM. (1 + xY X (1 + xT = (1 + a:)"+'* but when n is a whole number {\-\-xY is the series in question; therefore, calling the above series 0n, we have, when n is a whole number^ <pn X <pm = p(w + m) or ^l + nj:+».^^x»+n.^^ .23_a:«-|- &c. j = 14-(»w+n)j:4.(»i4-n) ^ j:«+(»i+n) 1-_ j»^ gcc. This may be verified to any extent we please, by actual multipli- cation ; for the two first series multiplied together give 1 4-(m + n)x-\- fw.^^ + wm + m^^Ja:* . / n — In — 2 . n — 1 m — 1 . m — \m — 2\ - „ , n — 1 , , m — 1 n' — »i + 2nfii + ni* — m But n.— |-»»i+ »!•— ,7— = ■ ^ — « <6 2 = '—^ = (n + w) ^ n — 1 n — 2 . n — 1 m — 1 . m — 1 m — 2 2 3 2 2 ^ 2 3 w^— 3w*-h2n4-3w*w?— 3n>w + 3 nw*— Znm-\-Tf? — 3m*4-2m 2"x3 2X3 ^ ' ' 2 3 and so on. We now lay down the following principle: When an algebraical multiplication^ or other operation^ such as has hitherto been defined, can be proved to produce a certain result in cases where the letters stand for whole numbers, then the same result must be true when the letters stand/or fractions, or incommensurable numbers^ and also when they are negative. For we have never yet had occasion to distinguish results into those which are true for whole numbers, and those which are not true for whole numbers ; but all processes have ON THE BINOMIAL THEOREM. 213 been, as stated in the introdnctiofi, true whether the letters are whole numben or fractions. There has been no such thing in any process as a term of an equation, which exists when a letter stands for a whole number, but does not exist when it stands for a fraction. If, therefore, ^mx^n will give ^(fii-f-") by the common process of multiplication when m and n are whole numbers, that same process will also give ^(m^n) when m and f» are fractions, and also when they are one or both negative : consequently, the series l+nx + n'-^a^+ &c. has this property, that, considered as a function ofn, and called 0n, it satisfies ^nx<pm = ^(m + n) in all cases. But in page 205, it has been proved that any solution of the preceding equation must be 0n=rc" where c = 0(1), and 0(1) we find to be l + l^ + l^Y^a:*+ &c. or 1 + x therefore 0n is in all cases (1 +!•)*, which is the theorem in question.* * Every proof which has ever been given of this theorem has been eontested ; that is, no one has ever disputed the truth of the theorem itself, but only the method of establishing it. And the general practice is, for each proposer of a new proof to be very much astonished at the want of logic of his predecessors. The proof given in the text is a combination of two proofs, the first part, making use of limits, given (according to Lacroix) in the Phil, Trans, for 1796 ; the second, the well-known proof of Euler. The objection to the first part lies in the assumption of a series of whole powers ; to the second, in its being lynt^tical, that is, not finding what (l+a:)" is, but only proving that a certain given series is the same as (l + x)\ But each part of this proof answers the objection made to the other part ; in the first part analysis is employed, but only so as to give strong grounds of conjecture that l + nx+ &c. is the required series; in the second part this conjectural (not arbitrarily chosen) series is absolutely shewn to be that required. The proof of Euler may be condensed into the following, of which the several assertions are proved in the text. 1» If l + ni + n.— =-«*+ &c. be called ^n, then ^(1) is 1+x, and ^nx^tn is found to be f(n + m), 2. If ^nx^m SB f{n + fn) then ^n must be {^(1)}** S. Therefore, l + nx+ &c. is (1 +x)* In 18^7, Messrs. Swinburne and Tylecote published their d^mon- 214 ON THE BINOMIAL THEOREM. To use the preceding series, the readiest way is to form the several factors n, — — , , &c. previously to proceeding further; for instance, let n = ^, or let it be -n/i +j:, which is to be expanded. — 1 ^— ^ — ^ «— 2 __ 1 n~3 __ 5 ^ ■" 2' "1 4' "T" "■ " 2' "T" 8 ^'^' +(i)(-i)(-5)(-i)^+ ^- ^2 8 ^16 128 ^ If » = — 1, n = «l, -_=-.!, -_=-.!, _-==«i &c. O+X)"' or ^= l+(-l):c+(-l)(-])a;« + («1)(-1)(-1)^+ &c. = 1— a:+<a;*— -2^*+ &c. as has been proved before. stration of this theorem, the last original one with which I am acquainted. It is much too laborious and difficult for a beginuer, but is as unobjec- tionable in point of logic as I conceive the one given in the text to be. Their general objections to the theory of limits are not, I conceive, to its logical soundness, but to its applicability in algebra ; it being more frequently than not a sort of convention that limits shall not be introduced into algebra. But, until \/]0 is explained in arithmetic without limits, I shall hold that limits are, and always have been, introduced into algebra. Nay, until the symbol is well explained in all its uses, with- out limits, the same may be said. With regard to the objections made by the above-named gentlemen to Euler's proof, in their page 35, they evidently hang upon the assumption of a finite number of terms of the series, which is not Euler's supposition, and which he therefore " keeps out of sight,** not " dexterously shuffles out of the way," for it does not come in the way, any more than lines which meet come in the way when we are expressly talking of parallel lines. After quoting the last-mentioned phrase, it is but fair to those gentlemon to state, that, judging by the general tenor of their work, it is not to be presumed that they meant to accuse Euler of intentional deceit, which the phrase " dexterous shuffling '* generally means, and which, therefore, was not the proper phrase to use. OV THB BINOMIAL THEOREM. 215 If f» = 5, f' n — I gy n— 2 I n — 3 1 n — 4 1 w-^5 "" 2 "" 3 — 4 ""2"5"""5 5 =:0 x2 x2 1x2 xl/ xl xl Uj/ 1 xj Uj/ a:)*=l+6ar+/ 6\a:«+/ 6U-«+/ 6\ar*+ / 61ar»+/ 6\a^ + x2/ [x2] x2 x2 |x2' xl Xj xJ \xO/ = l+5x-f 10a;*+10a;*+6ar*+ar^+0+0+ &c. It is usual to prove the binomial theorem in the case of a whole exponent, as follows: Multiply x + a by x-\-b, which gives s*-\'{a-\'b)x-\-ab, and this again by j: + c, which gives a^+{ii+b-\'C)x^-\'{ab'\-bc-\'Ca)x+abc From which it appears, that if there be n quantities, a^a^ a^, and if the sum of all be called Pp the sum of the products of every two, P, &c., that is, if Pi = «1 + «2 + fls + Pjj = ttia^ -^ a^a^ + OiGs -j- Ps = aiOtta^ -i- ttiQ^a^ -\- Pfi-i = it follows that {product of all except ►fall 'I r product of all') a, j \ except Cj J product of all; The number of terms in P^ is n ; in P, as many as there are n— 1 combinations of 2 out of n quantities, or (Ar. 210) n . > ; in P, 18 many as there are combinations of 3 out of n quantities, or f» — -— ; and so on. Hence, if a^ a^ &c. be all supposed equal to each other and to a, we have or 216 OV THB BINOMIAL THBOR£M. (^ containing n factors. J 2 Id which, if we suppose j: = 1, we have (l+a)" = l4.na + »^a2+ &c. See Ar. 211, for the reason why the coefficients are the same, whether we begin from the one end or the other of the series, as will also appear in the following cases. {l+xY = l+2a;4' x^ (] ^xy = l+3x+ 3x^-\- x^ (1+0:)*= l+4a?+ 6a;2-H 4a;»+ a^ (l+a:)*= l+Sx+lOa^-hlOx^^ 5a^+ x^ {l-hxf = l'{-6x+}5a^'h'20x^+i5ai*+6x^-hafi In order to find (1—- j:)% change the sign of x in the series; that is, write — x for x, leave x' unaltered ; write — x* for x®, and so on ; which gives (1— a:)** = 1 — »a: + w-^a;*— &c. We may write the general series in the following way when n is a whole number^ where Pn signifies tlie product of all whole numbers between 1 and n, both inclusive. which shews the similarity of the coefficients above alluded to. We give the following as exercises : 1 . When n is a whole number, 2« = l+w + n-^— + /1-2 J^-^^^' r, I ■ n— 1 n — 1 n— 2 . « OV THE BINOMIAL THEOREM. 217 2"-*= 1 4-n--r- +»-;; ;; :; h &c. 2 2 3 4 2. (a4-i)n— afi4.„an-l64-»l^a«-«6«+ &c. 3. If n be a whole number ' (^ + l)'=^ + l+3(x + l) ending with ya"-l)(2n-2) ■ • ■• (»+l) {x + l)*""* = a*«+> + 1^+1 +(2n + 1) (a*-i + 1^.,) + . . . . ,. .. (2n+l)(2n) (.n + 2) / , t\ ^ —^nx + n-j-- — x^+ &c. 5. ITie student may provide himself with examples and verifi- cations in the following way: choose any exponent n, whole or fractional, positive or negative, and expand (I + jt)** and (l + .r)»»+i by means of the theorem; then multiply the first series so found by l+^> which should give the second series. 6. (f''^l/' + n(a'-b)lf"^+n~-{a^byb*'-^+ &c. The following cases will afterwards require particular notice : (IN*** 1 nx — 11 njT— Inj:— 21 nJ ' n ' 2 n' 2 3 w^ 1 But nx-=^x nx — - — x -. =:a:-T— n 2 w* 2 1 2 nx — 1 nx — 2 1 n n nx — :: , = X — &c. &c. whence u n» 218 ON THE BINOMIAL THEOREM. -. 1 12 X— - ar— - X — (\\ns , X — - ar— - x 1+1) =l+^ + a;-5^ + x^^+&c. In the preceding let ar = 1, which gives But (page 105), (l + 1)"' = |(l + 1)" 1' or the first series is the arth power of the second, and (l+l-f — 2-^ + &c.y = l + a: + a;-^^+ &c. If n = 0, (1 + j)« = 1, or (1 + a:)« — 1 = 0, or the fraction ^ i assumes the form -. We now ask whether this frac- n tion has a limit when n is diminished without limit (page 162). From the general theorem^ n 2 2 3'' and when n is diminished without limit, the limit of the second side is x^ , X^ X* , ^ That is, As n diminishes without limit, *| (H-^)« — 1 u -.u J x^ , x' -J^ . p ^^ ' approaches without ^ x r- + -^ T '^ ^^' limit to J If ar = z — 1, then the limit of (n diminishing without limit) is ('^-'i^)-l(z-if + l(z-iy- &c. ^ Of this series we know no property as yet, except that it is convergent when x or z — 1 is less thani, or z less than 2. We shall proceed to examine the expression from which it is derived. If in it we write z*^ for z, we have ON THE BINOMIAL THEOREM. 219 or m n mn Let m be a fixed quantity and let n diminish without limit : then mn also diminishes without limit. Now, if 0n have the limit N when n diminishes without limit, <p{mn) must have the same limit. The only difference is, that (say m = 6) for any very small valae of n, ^{6n) will not have come so near to its limit as 0n. For the nature of the limit being, that, by taking n sufficiently small, we may make ^n within any given fraction (say A;, which may be as small as we please) of N, we may, by taking the sixth part of the requisite value for n, make 0(6n) within the same degree of nearness to N. Hence the limits of the two^ and n mn 1 are the same. But if the first be called ylz, the second is — -^P (z"^) ; m ^ ^ and we have 1 limit of -d/Z = limit of — -4/2:'* ^ m ^ = —limit of >L 2;'" m ^ or ^-.l-.l(2-l)2+&c. = ^(^'»-l-|(z'«-l)«+8cc.) a property of the series which will serve to verify succeeding investigations. We have not yet included in our results the case in which the exponent is incommensurable, such as but since we look upon \/2 as the limit to which we approach nearer and nearer in the series (obtained from arithmetical extraction in this case), 1 1-4 1-41 1-414 b4142 &c. we must regard (1 + x) "^^ as the limit to which we approach by taking the successive expressions 14 141_ 1414 l-fiT {y^-xY (l + ar)i«» (l-far)»«» &c. so that, whatever approximation k may be used for V2 or the limit for which this symbol stands, then 220 ON THE BINOMIAL THEOREM. l + kx+k^^x^+ &C. is the corresponding approximation to (1 + x)'^. When the series is convergent, it is evident that if each term be found, say within its thousandth part, the sura of the whole series is found within its thousandth part. Suppose k and k-\-m to be two approximations to v2, as in page 101, the first too small, the second too great, and suppose we compare the pih terms of the corresponding approxi- mations to (1 + a") '^^ , or L7i....^-g±£^-iand(A + »»)^±^.... '^ + '"-f+V -i 2 p^l \ ' / 2 p — 1 the ratio of which is k-^m k-j-m — 1 k-j-m — p + 2 k * A:— 1 k^p + 2 Since m can be made as small as we please, it is evident that each of these factors can be made as near to unity as we please, and, consequently, their product can be brought as near to unity as we please. That is, for any given number of terms, the terms of the two approximations may be made as nearly equal as we please. Now, suppose X less than 1, so that (page 210), both approximations are convergent. Hence so many terms (say q terms) may be taken that the limit of the sum of the remainder shall be as small as we please : and as m may be taken so small that all the q terms of one approxi- mation shall be within, say their millionth parts, of those of the other approximation, it follows that we may reduce the two approximations to the following form : {A remainder less than the millionth of the preceding sum. (A remainder less timn the millionth of the preceding sum. where a fi w are severally less than one millionth. Let a-\'b-{'C'jr .. , , -jr z (which we may call the approximation to the first approximation) be called P; aa-f6/3-{- ,,., -}-;?» is less than one millionth of P, and the first approximation complete is ON THE BINOMIAL THEOREM. 221 P + X P (X is less than one millionth) and the second P(1+V)+YP(1+V) (V and Y do. do.) the difference of which is PV+P(Y-X) + PYV which is less than three millionths of P; because V, Y — X and YV are severally less than one millionth of P. But the limit (1 + x) *^ must lie between these approximations, and therefore does not differ from P by so much as the approximations differ from each other, that is, by three millionths of P. It is not possible to shew, by the preceding method, the same result in the case where x is greater than 1, or the series divergent: but it must be remembered that in this case algebraical equality only is asserted, not arithmetical equality : and all that is said is, that 1 + \/2x'b t/2^— a:« + &c. may be substituted without error for (1 -f j:)'^^; so that the proof of this case falls within the general proof, as deduced from the principle in page 212. What is done in the preceding process shews the approximation to arithmetical equality, when the series is convergent. The same arguments might be applied to any other case, with any other degree of approximation. We now proceed to develope some further consequences of the binomial theorem. 222 EXPONENTIAL AND CHAPTER XII. EXPONENTIAL AND LOGARITHMIC SERIES. An algebraic symbol may have different names, according to the relation in which it stands to different symbols, or combinations of symbols. Thus in ab, a, with respect to b, is called a coefficient ; with respect to a 6, it is called a factor. Similarly, in o^, 6, with respect to a, is called an exponent ; with respect to o^, it is called a logarithm,* and a in reference to b is called the base of the logarithm. Thus, in 3^ 4 is the logarithm of 3^ or 81, to the base 3; in a*, X is the logarithm of a* to the base a. This we shall denote by 4 = log^Sl and x := logo a' : the letters log being an abbreviation of logarithm, and the underwritten figure being the base. Examples. lO^ = 1000 3 = logiolOOO If a* = y a: = logoy If p^ = l^z y = logp(]-z) To construct a system of logarithms to a given base, say 10, we must solve the series of equations lO' = 1 10' = 2 10* = 3 10* = 4 &c. and find the value of x in each. This can, generally speaking, only be done by approximation : that is, the logarithm is generally incom- mensurable with the unit. By saying, then, that log|o2 =:-30103, we mean that lO-*®^^^ = 2 very nearlt/, or ^"ow^jQaoioa _ 2 nearly, and that a fraction k can be found such that 10* shall be as near to 2 as we please, to which fraction *30103 is an approximation. [In all the following theorems one base is supposed, namely, a.] Theorem I. Whatever the base may be, the logarithm of \ is 0, This is evidently another way of expressing a°^l, and may be written logo 1=0. * From Xoyc/v u^ififMs, the number of the ratios, an idea derived from an old method of constructiug logarithms, which cannot be here explained. i LOGARITHMIC SERIES. 223 ToEOREM II. The logarithm of the hate itself is 1. This is contained in a^ := a, and is expressed thus : loga a ^ 1 Theorem III. The logarithms ofy and - are of different signs, but equal numerical value. For if ^ := a' or x ss. ^o^y, we have - ^ or-* or — or := log©-; that is, loga- = — loga^. Theorem IV. If ?l be the base, and a number or fraction lie between a™ and a°, the logarithm of that number or fraction lies between m and n. For if a*, the number, lie between a»» and a*» ; then x, the logarithm^ lies between m and n (see page 89). Base 10. Number , Logarithm has its .between between 1 and 10 and 1 10 and 100 1 and 2 100 and 1000 2 and 3 &c. &c. 1 and ^^ and — 1 10 ^"^ 100 — 1 and —2 1 , 1 100 ^" 1000 — 2 and —3 &c. &c. Base -. 2 Number Logarithm between "*^ ^^^ between 1 and - 2 - and - 2 4 4 8 &c. 1 and 2 2 and 4 4 and 8 &c. 1 2 and and and 3 &c. and —1 —1 and —2 —2 and —3 &c. Theorem V. The logarithm of a product is equal to the sum of the logarithms of the factors. Let a be the base, and j9, q, and r, the logarithms of P, Q, and R. Then P = aP Q = a« R = a*- PQR = a^+«+'' or log(PQR) =/> + ?+ r = log P + log Q -flog R Theorem VI. The logarithm of a ratio, quotient, or fraction, is the difference of the logarithms of the antecedent and consequent, dividend and divisor, or numerator and denominAtoi: 224 BXPONENTIAL AND P P For — = a^^^ or log ^ = p—^. = ^^g P^^og Q Theorem VII. The logarithm ofF^ is found by multiplying the logarithm of F by m ; that is, if P =: aP^ P"* := a^P, or log P»» = mp = m log P. Theorem VIII. A negative number has no arithmetical logarithm : nor is a system of logarithms with a negative base within the limits of algebra as hitherto considered. Tliis is rather a definition than a theorem,* and it amounts to this : on account of certain anomalies, of which the explanation cannot yet be understood by the student, we are obliged to defer the consideration of the logarithms of negative quantities, and all logarithms of positive quantities, except only those which have arithmetical meaning. For the equation a* := 6 has not been proved to have only one solution, though it has only one arithmetical solution. Theorem IX. The logarithm ofO is infinite; by which we mean that as y diminishes without limit, its logarithm (being always negative on one side or other of 1), increases numerically without limit. To diminish f -J without limit, x must undergo numerical increase without limit, and be positive : to diminish 2' without limit, X must also undergo numerical increase without limit, being negative. Hence (page 156) the meaning of the proposition stated ; and it must be observed that the symbol oc has either sign in algebra, which may be explained as follows. If 3^ = -, then y and x X must have the same sign : if x diminish without limit, it approaches a form (0) in which it has no sign, being the limiting boundary between positive and negative quantity. Consequently y, which increases without limit, approaches a similar boundary; for since ^ has the same sign as -, if there be any form of x in which either sign may be supposed, the same may be supposed for y. But such a comprehension of this point as can be derived from frequent instances must be reserved until the student has seen more examples of the application of algebra to geometry. * Being usually considered as a theorem, we have stated it as such. LOGARITHMIC SERIES. 225 The following examples will illustrate the preceding theorems. xxl = X loga + logl = logo? (logl = 0) x^ = X 1 X logo? = logo? logaax = logaX + logatt = logaX-\-l \ogxVy = log a:+logy* = loga:+-logy log j^ = log x^ I logy -log;? -2 logy log (^)''= -l{loga:-f31ogy-log;?-(-l)logy} ^ = — logar— 31ogy-f logp— logy We shall now proceed to the series connected with logarithms. In page 218, we have proved the following theorem for all values of n and Xy In which both series, being forms of (l + -} > will (page 210) be convergent whenever - is less than 1, or n greater than 1. Now, n let n increase without limit, in which case the limit of l_i i_Li_l and that of 1 12 or— - X X X* *.3 1 +^+ -2^ + -2^ -3^ + ^^- ^^ 1 +^+ T "^ 2"T3 + *'''• But 1 + 1 + -+ &c. has been calculated approximately in page 183, found to be 271828182 , and called e. Therefore, (page 183), g'= \+x+- + — ^ + &c. Consequently, if i he the base, the number which has the logarithm x x^ is 1 + a: H 1- &c. Hence a system of logarithms, having e for the base, being arrived at in the course of investigation, has been 226 BXPOKBNTIAL AND called the natural system of logarithms ; it is also called the Naperian* system of logarithms, and the hyperholic\ system of logarithms. And here let it be remembered, that in algebraical analysis^ the letters log, by themselves, imply the logarithm to the base c, any except tion being always specially mentioned. The preceding equation being always true, we have But 6** is («*)*; and if we take k to be the logarithm (base c) of a, we have ^ ^:s a, and (g*)* or a* = ] +(loga)a:+ i-^Y — + 2.3 "*" From which we find that will, if or be diminished without limit, have the limit log a. But (page 218) we have already found the series for this limit; whence logo = (a_l)- l(a-l)« + i(a-l)»- &c. or, if a =: 1 -f- bf we have log(l+ft) = J-|'+^-8cc (1) Substitute — b for b, and we have 2 " 3 log(l-6)= -6-.^*-^'-8w5 (2) Subtract (2) from (1) flog (1 + 6) — log (1—6) =log ({3^)]] log(S) = 2{6+f +3 +&0.} .... (3) , ^ 1 + 6 l + x .... . 1 let - — J- := which gives b := - — — • 1—6 X ® 2j:+1 * John Napier, commonly called Lord Napier, though not a peer, or otherwise entitled to the appellation of lord than in the way in which many landed proprietors are lords (of manors), was born in 15.50, at his lordship of Merchiston, near Edinburgh, and died in 1617. He published the invention of logarithms (his method also leading him to the natural system) in 16 14. t So called from a supposed analogy with the curve called the hyperbola, but which analogy belongs equally to all systems of logarithms. k LOGARITHMIC SERIES. 227 l^g rzi = ^^S ^-^ = l^g (1 +^) -logo: The last series gives X = 21og3 = log2+2{i + 1^ + 1 3^5+^ X = 3 log4 = log3 + 2{l + 1 3I3 + 1 ji, + &c.} :r = 4 log5 = log4+2{l + 1^ + I35L5 + &*.} Thus the logarithms of whole numbers may be successively cal- . culared with tolerable readiness, as the first example (which contains the least convergent series), here given at length to ten places (that is to eleven for the sake of accuracy), will shew. 1 3 = •33333333333 1 3 1 3' = •01234567901 1 5 1 3« = •00082304527 1 7 1 3' = •00006532105 1 9 1 3» =r= •00000564503 1 11 1 3" = •00000051318 1 13 1 313 = •00000004825 1 15 1 315 =: •00000000465 1 17 1 3" = •00000000046 1 19 1 319 = •00000000005 •34657359028 2 log 2 = '69314718056 very nearly. 1 228 EXPONENTIAL AND By this means the logarithm of 3 may be found from that of 2, that of 4 from that of 3, and so up to any given whole number. It would be desirable,* as an exercise of arithmetic, that the student should calculate them up to 10 inclusive; the results of which (to eight places) would be as follows : log 1 = 0-00000000 log 6 = 1-79175947 log 2 = 0-69314718 log 7 = 1-94591015 log 3 = 1-09861229 log 8 = 2-07944154 log 4 = 1-38629436 log 9 = 2-19722458 log 5 = 1-60943791 log 10 = 2-30258509 But the series need be employed only for prime numbers, and the first tables of logarithms were thus constructed, as follows. Suppose the logarithm of 59 to be required, or of 58 +1. Now 58 is 2 x 29, both factors being prime numbers; if, then, we have the logarithms of 2 and 29, we have that of 58 from the equation log 68 = log 2+ log 29 and that of 59 from log 59 = log68+2{^-L + 1 _i_ + &C.} Beginning, then, with log 2, we have the following : log 2 = a given series log 6 = log 3 + log 2 log 3 =: log 2 + a given series log 7 = log 6 + a given series log 4 = 2 log 2 log 8 = 3 log 2 log 5 = log 4 -{- B. given series log 9 = 2 log 3 log 10 = log 2 -|- log 5 ; and so on. ♦ HaUey (PhiL Trans. 1695) thus expresses himself, after having described the preceding method. '* If the cariosity of any gentleman that has leisure, would prompt him to undertake to do the logarithms of all prime numbers under a hundred thousand to twenty-five or thirty places of figures, I dare assure him that the facility of this method will invite him thereto ; nor can any thing more easy be desired." Without insisting upon any thing that would take up so much of a gentleman's leisure as the preceding, I should strongly recommend the student always to work one example of every moderately convergent series which occurs. ^ LOGARITHMIC SERIBS. 229 In page 219^ we proved independently that a_l_l(2r_l)«+&c. =-l(a"-l-i(3^-l)«+ «tc.) wliich isy as we now see, the same thing as losz = — log;2'* and in it we also find further elucidation of the equation, Umit of i^!l=i = 2r-l— 1(0— 1)«+ «cc. = logz. The diminution of m without limit, or the supposing of m to be a smaller and smaller fraction, implies the extraction of higher and higher roots of z. By extracting a sufficiently high root of z, we can bring z"^ as near to 1 as we please, or make Z^ — 1 as small as we please; that is (page 187) s'" — 1 may be made as nearly equal to the sum of the whole series as we please. It was from this principle, by continual extraction of the square root of z, that logarithms were once calculated, by means of the formula logz = {^^^^-^^ l) X 140737488355328 very nearly,* the number named being 2^', equivalent to 47 extractions of the square root. The logarithm of any whole number being found, as in the last page, that of a fraction can then be found by the subtraction of the logarithm of the denominator from that of the numerator. We also notice the following result : when x is a large number, 2 log(ar -f- 1) = log 4?+ 5jq-j nearly (page 227). The rest of this subject will be reserved for the next chapter, on the practical use of logarithms in shortening arithmetical com- putations. We now proceed with some uses of the preceding series. Lemma. IffQc) be such a function of jr, thaty*(j:-f-y) can be expanded in a series of the form Ao-hAiy + Aif-h &c, * Halley, in the memoir already cited. Each square root was ex- tracted to 14 places, X 230 EXPOKBKTIAL AND where Aq, A^, &c. are functions of x onfy, then /(a + bVT-i) +fia - J V'^D treated by common rules, will always represent a quantity, either positive or negative, that is, all purely symbolical or impossible* quantities disappear ; while, on the other hand, /(a + 61/3T) _/(« _ ftl/TT) will be of the form (possible quantity) x ^ — 1 Write the value ofJ'{s-\-f/) and afterwards that of /(x — y)y made by changing the sign of ^; fix+y) = Ao + A,y + A2y+A3y^+ &c. fix^y) = Ao-Aiy+A2y«-A3y3+ &c. ivom which we find, f(^ + y)'hf(x^y) = 2Ao +2A2y«+2A4y*+ &c. /(a:H-y)-/(x-y) = 2A,y+2A3y«+ 2A53/^-f- &c. for X write a, whence A^, A,, &c. become functions of a only ; for y write b >/ — 1, that is, suppose y = 6VCT y^ = i^l/HT /= -J3l/ZTx 6V=1 j^= 68 &c. = -.64x_i= i* whence /(a +i VHT) +/(a_5 v'lIT) = 2 Ao-2 A^ft* +2 A*^*- &c. which is a possible quantity : and /•(rt+ jV':rr)«/(a-6V'^)==2Ai6l/3l--2A36^vCT+ ^ = {2Ai6-2A36*+ &c.| VCT which is (a possible quantity) x \/— 1. * We shall now begin to make use of this common phrase : to the •tudent it must mean " impossible till further explained/* See page 110. LOGARITHMIC SERIE9. 231 EX.MP..S. L_+ ' 2« o + Jn/—! 0—6^—1 a' + b* (a+J^/— l)»_(a_JV'=T)» = As the preceding theorem is true for all values of a, it is true when fl = ; that ii, for Examples. Let n be a positive whole number. r + 2 6" when n is evenly even.* (61/171)'*+ (— 6 vCn)'* = < when n is odd. [^ — 2 6" when n is oddly even.f (0 when n is even. 2 6- n/Z:! when n is 1, 5, 9, &c. — 2 6" \/^^ when, n is 3, 7, 11, &c. If we apply the same process to €* ^^ and c"* , we find 2 2.3 2.3.4 2 2.3 2.3.4 i^ = i-.^+--4— - ^ . . . ^ +&c (A) 2 2 2 .3.4 2.3.4.5.6 ^ ^ €* '''^ — e-' "^^ x» ;r» ,. 2>/Z4 2.3^2.3.4.5 ^ ^ We have left the use of the symbol n/— 1, in this work, to be justified by experience only (see page 111); we have now an oppor- * Divisible by 4 ; 4, 8, 12, &c. are evenly even, f Divisible by 2, but not by 4 j as f , 6, 10, &c. 232 EXPOKEKTIAL AND tunity of examiDing the result of a loDg series of deduction, with a view of ascertaining how far we shall produce consistent results. The algebraical sign of equality is placed between the two sides of the preceding equations ; the question is, Will any relations we may discover to exist between the two first sides also exist between the two ucond sides ? £ "r ' Let = 2 ^ called ^X and 7== be called -i^X we have then {(ftxj = J (4,x)' = ' -^' ^, +' {fxf + (>|.ar)* = t^— -J = ,• = 1 (pa;)* - (.^a;)* = ' ^ = <f (2x) of which three relations, namely, 2(pxX'>^x = 4(2a:) it is asked, are they true of the second sides of (A) and (B) ? The multiplication of a series by itself will be found to amount to using the following rule : square each term, and multiply all that follow by twice that term. Thus, the square of the series in (A) is +2»- 271:4 +««=• + &c. LOGARITHMIC SERIES. 233 that of the series in (B) is ^- 3 +37*75 -*'<=• — &C. The first square increased by the second is = !+{ } -{ } +&C. The first diminished by the second is •* ^l3.4^2«^3i^ 13.4.5.6 ^2.3.4 ^3. 4X5 ^2«3«)**' ^ 2 ^ 2.3.4 2.3.4.5.6 ^ The third relation may be similarly verified by multiplication. The following results may also be proved in the same way both of the first and second sides of equations (A) and (B) (f>{x+y) = (f>x<py'-^x-^y 4(a:+y) = '^x<py-\-(f>x^y ^(^— y) = <px(py + '^x^y -^(x^y) = -vl/orpy— ^ar-^/y Let c*'*^-* be called d, and let -^-- be called a; ^9 then (equations X A and B) , T- = -^ = yX or ^-TTT S= V — 1 YX whence p* = -^^ and, page 226, 1— V— l;t;J^ But ^=: g2*V^ QP logp* = 2a; V^^l, therefore x2 234 BXPONENTIAL AND LOGARITHMIC SERIES. The series A and B are always convergeDt, as may be proved by the test in page 1 85 ; but the convergency may be made to begin at any term, however distant, by making x sufficiently great. Thus, if X were 1000, the first series would not begin to converge before the term 1^ <6«0«4«0 •••••••••• <60O t <w04 but, notwithstanding the magnitude of the first terms of the series (which it must be remembered, are alternately added and subtracted) the actual value of ^j: and ^x can never exceed 1 ; for if either were arithmetically greater than 1 (positive or negative), the equation (0 x)' -\- (ypx)* ^ 1 could not be true. In trigonometry, the properties of the preceding series are con- nected with geometry in the following way. Let a circle be drawn ; and from A let the point B set out until it has described an arc equal in length to x times the radius OA, going round the circle again if necessary. Draw BD perpendicular to CA; then it will be proved that BD is the fi'action ^j: of O A, and OD the fraction ^j^ of OA. Exercise 1. By means of the equation ,- s= X, prove the equation 3. Prove the following, j-xv^^ par- V^ 4-0; (pa;+ Vdl4'a:)'" = (p(mx) + V^'^imx) ON THE USE OF LOGARITHMS. 236 CHAPTER XIII. ON THE USE OF LOGARITHMS IN FACILITATING COMPUTATIONS. The natural system of logarithms, already explained, has ibis defect as an instrument of calculation, tliat there is no method of finding the logarithm of a fraction more simple than subtracting the loga- rithm of the denominator from that of the numerator. For instance, the logarithm of *3 can not be more shortly found than by taking log 3 — log 10 or 1-09861229 — 2-30258509 = — 1-20397280 We proceed to find another system in which there shall be some more obvious connexion between the logarithm of 3 and those of -3, -03, &c. The fundamental definition of log«;r gives 1 ar = a a = a; * We have then x = a ^ o But b^a'""' .'. X = a"^''"^'' Similarly x = ^"'^•'^"^•^^"e" log« e log* c log« b logb X = a which last result may be also thus verified : loga e log« C lege b logft X ( ^^STa «llog« C loge b logft X a = la 3 log« c log« b log6 s logc b \0%h X ,logft X = e ^ c =6=a; Now, there is but one arithmetical exponent which applied to a will give x; for, if possible, let there be two, p and g, and let aP ^ a:, a? = x, whence aP = fl«, and aP— «= 1 ; therefore j? — y = 0, or p = g, that is, p and g do not difier, as was supposed. Hence, since loga X loga b log& X a? = a = a , we have 236 ON THE USB OF LOGARITHMS log;, a; = loga* log^x = logaC lege 6 log^x 8cc. these results may be remembered by means of the identical equations X xb X X b c a "^ b a a b c a g;iving the following theorem : the series of equatiom a a c a e c afec „ b c b e c b J" e c b remains tme, if for each fraction be substituted the logarithm of its numerator to the denominator as a base. As an example, by means of T - = - we remember that log^a loga6 = logout = 1 We also have or; to convert a given system of logarithms having the base a, into another which shall have the base b, divide every logarithm given by the given logarithm of b. Seeing that in practice it is convenient to reduce all fractions to decimal fractions, the base chosen should be one in which the logarithms of 10, 100, &c. are whole numbers, that is, it should be 10. For in that case we have loglO = 1, loglOO = 2, loglOOO = 3, &c. And if we call/) the logarithm of any number, say 25, we have log 2-5 = log25— log 10 = ;?— 1 log -25 = log26-log 100 = p-2 log -026 = log26— log 1000 = p—3 &c. log 260 = log26-hlog 10 == p + 1 log2500 = log26-hlog 100 =p + 2 &c. So that, when the base is ten, any alteration of the place of the decimal point in the number requires only the addition or sub- traction of a whole number from the logarithm. IK FACILITATINQ C0MPUTATI0K8. 237 The system of logarithms to the base 10 U deduced from the natural system by the following equation, •<«.-^ = Itro = JlSsS = '°S'^ X -4342944819 This system oriogarilhms is called the common, tabular, decimal, or Brigg't sjaten, and -43429 .... is called its moduluM, aod gene- rally l-i-1og, a, or logs t is called the modulus of the system whose All the logarithm! in the reminder of this cAopter art c l(^aritkmi. The folloning aie examples of the arrangements of some tables of logarithms, for the purpose of eKpIaiiiing how to find the logarithms of given numbers, or vice veri6. 1. Lalaade.' Logarit. D Nomb. LogahE. D 3.03342 1110 3.04532 3.03383 3.03423 40 40 nil 1112 3.04571 3.04610 39 40 3.03463 1113 3.04650 3.03503 1114 3.04689 &c. &c. fee. Blc. 8«j. S. Sherwin, Hutton, Babbage.-\ Num. 1 a 3 4 6 6 7 e 9 Diff. 5150 Tlie072 8157 8241 8325 8410 8494 8ST8 8663 8747 8831 ~84" 1 8915 9000 9084 9168 9253 9337 9421 9506 9590 9674 ^ 17 2 9759 9843 9927 OOIl 0096 0180 0264 0349 0433 0517 I 25 3 7120601 06B6 0770 0854 0939 1033 1107 1191 1376 1360 n 07 4 1444 1528 1613 1697 1781 1865 1950 2034 2118 2203 kc. &c. &c. &C. &c. &c. 8«. &:C, &c. &c. &c. * Tabtei dt Loptrithtaa, &c. pat J4rame de li Lahdi, Edition slirf- Otyp«, pw FiHMiH Didot: Paris, chez Finnio Didot, &o. Rue Jacob, No. 34, 1805 (tirage de 1831). This work ia sufficient for most pur- poses, but those who order it should remember to insist on having one of the later liroga. t All these works are well known in this country. The first (an old work) is fieqoently to be found with second-hand booksellers. Hie last two oan b« obtained in the nsnsl way fron any bookaeller. 238 ON THE USB OP LOGARITHMS A logarithm usually consists of a whole number, followed by a decimal fraction, both or either of which may be negative : but in fviot^ tables nothing is put down but positive decimal fractions. We proceed to shew how this arrangement includes all cases. 1. Take a negative logarithm, such as — 3*16804, which is — 3 — -16804, or — 4 +(1 —-16804), or —4+ -83196. This is usually written 4*83196, in which the negative sign over the four means that that figure only is negative. [According to analogy, 13 would mean — 10 + 3, or — 7 ; 136 would mean 106 — 30, or 76.] Thus, every negative logarithm may be so converted as to have a positive decimal part. 2. When the number corresponding to the decimal part is known, that corresponding to the whole can be immediately found by the following table, ^ or log 10-3 ^ _3 log 1000 1 100 log '^g To or log 10-* = -2 or log 10-^ = —1 log 10 or log 101= 1 log 100 or log 102 = 2 log 1000 or log 10* = 3 &c. Thus, the number to *30103 is 2 very nearly ; that is, -30103 = log 2 : therefore, 1-30103 = log 10 + log2 = log 20, 1-30103 = 1 2 log— -h log 2 = log— = log -2, and so on. If D simply stand for a decimal fraction less than unity, we have (page 223) the following table : The log. of a No. lying between Must lie between And must there- fore be of the form Instances of such numbers 1 J 1 1000 ^" 100 —3 and —2 — 3 4- D •0013, •0098 100 ^"^ 10 —2 and — 1 — 2 + D -014, 0738 To "°^ ' —1 and -l+D •103, *4296 1 and 10 and 1 -h D 2*56, 7*99 10 and 100 1 and 2 1 +D 11*03, 45*96 100 and 1000 &c. 2 and 3 &c. 2 -+-D &c. 159, &c 159* 108 IN FACILITATING COMPUTATIONS. 239 Definition, The whole part of a common logarithm, whether positive or negative, is called the characteristic of the logarithm. The decimal part is called the mantissa,* We now give some theorems which obviously follow from what precedes. 1. No alteration in the place of the decimal point (in which is included the annexation of ciphers to a whole number) alters the mantissa of the logarithm, but only the characteristic, 2. When the decimal point of the number is preceded by signi- ficant figures, the characteristic of the logarithm is positive, and a unit less than the number of these figures. Thus, the logarithm of 12345-67 is 4 + mantissa ; that of 6*9 is -(- mantissa, 3. When the decimal point of the number is not preceded by significant figures, the characteristic of its logarithm is negative, and a unit more than the number of ciphers which precedes the first significant figure. Thus the logarithm of '00083 is ^-^^^ mantissa, that of '83 is — \'\' mantissa, Lalande's table first mentioned gives the characteristic, on the supposition that the number mentioned is a whole number; thus, the logarithm of 1081 (as given in the preceding specimen) is 3*03383. But, to take the logarithm of 1*081 from this table, the mantissa '03383 is all that must be taken, and the characteristic applied. Thus, the logarithm of 1*081 is 003383, and, from the rule laid down, we have the following table : log 1081000 =s 6*03383 log 1-081 = 0*03383 log 108100 = 5*03383 log •1081 = r-03383 log 10810 = 403383 log •01081 = 2-03383 log 1081 = 303383 log •001081 = 3-03383 log 108*1 = 2*03383 log •0001081 =s 4-03383 log 10-81 = 1-03383 log' 00001081 = 5-03383 The second table gives the logarithms of numbers of five places of figures. From the first table we might have found the logarithms of 5153 and 5154, or (the diff*erence being only in the characteristic) of 51530 and 51540; from the second specimen we can find the * This word is now seldom used, though there is not another single word which means the same thing. 240 ON THE USE OF LOGARITHMS logarithms of 51531, 51532, .... 51539, intermediate to the two numbers j ust cited . . Now we must observe, that when a figure is changed in a number, the first figure which changes in the logarithm will be nearer to or further from the left hand, according to the figure changed in the number. This amounts to saying that the smaller (in proportion to the whole) the change of the number, the smaller the change in the logarithm, and is shewn by the following theorem. Since (pages 227, 237) the common logarithm of 1 + ' is (M =r -43429 . . . •) logO +x) = logj:+2M ( + 1 1 2x + l • 3 (2jr-+-iy + &C.) the greater x is, the less the addition to log x by which log (j: +1) is formed. The following instances will ■ illustrate this, in which the figure undergoing change is marked with an accent. The columns succeeding shew, 1st. By how much of itself the number is changed ; 2d. By how much of a unit the logarithm is changed (nearly). flogl' '.log 2' = 00000000 = 0-3010300 log 10' I log 11' = 1-0000000 = 1-0413927 ' log 100' log 101' ^=: 20000000 5= 2-0043214 ' log 1000' log 1001' ;= 30000000 ^ 30004341 log 10000' ' . log 10001' = 4-0000000 ^ 4-0000434 flog 100000' Clog 100001' = 60000000 = 6-0000043 Proportion to the whole of the change in the Number, 1 Absolute change in the Logarithm, 1 3 1 10 1 25 1 100 1 250 1 1 1000 2500 1 1 10000 25000 1 1 100000 250000 Hence, roughly speaking, the absolute change in the mantissa of the logarithm is something less than one half of the relative change in the number. Let the student try to ascertain this from the series given above. Thus, if a number increase by its thousandth part, IN FACILITATING COMPUTATIONS. 241 the increase in the logarithm is less than the absolute fraction , and so on. Hence we can ascertain with sufficient precision to how many places of logarithmic figures it will be necessary to carry any table. Let us suppose, for instance, our table is to give every number of five places, from 10000 to 99999. At the end of the 1 table the relative increase of the number is about r, the 100000 absolute increase of the logarithm is therefore about -— -, or ^ 250000 •000004. Consequently six places of logarithmic figures are abso- lately necessary. With less than six places distinction would b^ lost; for instance, log 99846 = 5-9993307 log 99847 = 5-9993350 which only differ in the sixth place. In the first part of the table, 1 where the relative increase is little more than r— --,, the absolute 10000 increase of the logarithm is nearly -00004, or five places only would be sufficient. But the tables must, for reasons of practical con- venience, be of the same number of figures throughout, and, therefore, must be at least of six places of figures. In the second specimen,^ve places of figures in the number are accompanied by seven places of figures in the logarithms. But, as the three first places of the logarithm continue the same for some time, even in the most changeable part of the table, they are placed by themselves in the first column, at the point where a change takes place : which saves much room, but is subject to this inconvenience, that as a change in the third figure of the logarithm will seldom take place exactly at the beginning of a line, the new third figure cannot be shewn till after it has really made its first appearance. The fol- lowing instances, taken out of the second specimen, will shew both the arrangement of the tables and this new difficulty, better than ny verbal explanation. I 242 ON THE USE OF LOOABITHMS Number. Mant of the log. Number. Mant. of the log 51520 •711 9759 51526 •712 0264* 51521 •711 9843 51527 •712 0349* 51522 •711 9927 51528 •712 0433* 51523 •712 0011* 51529 •712 0517* 51524 •712 0096* 51530 •712 0601 51525 •712 0180* 51531 •712 0686 In this list it will be observed tliat each logarithm differs from the preceding either by -0000083, 0000084, or -0000085. In fact, the whole diflR?rence between the logarithms of 51520 and 51520+10 is '0000842, giving for each increase of a unit an average increase of -0000084. We have then, at and near 51520, the following equations : log (5 1 520+1) = log 51520+ -0000084 log (51520 +2) = log 51520 +'0000084 x 2 or, if h be not greater than 10, log (51520 + A) = log 51520 + -0000084 X ^ (A) or, for a small part of the tables, the logarithms of numbers increasing by a unit increase in arithmetical progression very nearly. Now (M being -43429 .... pages 226 and 237), Cm.log(l+i).M(i-l(!)Vl©--»..) = M - very nearly, when - is small (page 187) or log(a? + A) = logo? + M-, very nearly, an equation of the same form as (A) ; whence it follows that (A), which is nearly true when h is 10, is even still more nearly true when A is a fraction of a unit. Hence we have In this case x = 51620 and ^ or *i51?£l£ = .0000084 X 51520 * In all these, the first three figures of the mantissa must be looked for below. There are various devices in different tables for reminding the reader of this, which we need not explain, as tbey are evident on inspection. IN FACILITATINQ COUPDTATION8. 243 log51260i = log51520 + -0000084 x i log51250-36 = log51520 + -0000084 x -36 The column marked Diff'. (for difference) is meant to expedite the multiplication which the last equation shews will become neces- sary when the logarithm of six or seven places is sought. It consists of the tenths of 84 to the nearest whole number : thus, one tenth of 84 is 8'4, nearest whole number g two tenths .,.. 16'8, 17 three 26-2, 26 and so on. The hundredths of 84 may be got by striking off one figure from the corresponding tenths (adding 1 where the figure struck out is 5 or upwards), thus, one hundredth of 84 is about *8, nearest whole number 1 two hundredths 1*7, 2 three 2*5, 3 and 90 on. Hence by inspection of the column of differences we can immediately determine the tenths or hundredths of the difference in question. And now let us determine the logarithm of 51*53946 from the second specimen in page 237. The mantissa is the same as that of the logarithm of 51539*46 and log(51639 +-46) = log61639 +-0000084 x -46 = log51539 + -0000084 {± + 4) but •0000084 (± + 4) = -0000001 (± x 84 + ^ x 84) (from the table) = -0000001 (34 + 6) But multiplying a whole number by *1, *01, '001, &c. is the same as removing its unit*s place to the first, second, third, &c. place of decimals : from which we have Mantissa of log 51539 from the table = '7121360 Addition on account of the 4 which follows the 9 = 34 Ditto on account of the 6 which follows the 4 =s 5 Sum -7121399 244 ON THE USE OF LOGARITHMS This sum is the mantissa of the logarithm of 51539*46, which has tlie same mantissa as that of 51-53946; therefore, taking the proper characteristic for the last, we have log51-53946 = 1-7121399 The following are other instances derived from the same rule, and falling within the limits of the specimen. log- log -51527 4 8 5152748? V7120349 34 7 log 5 150008? log 5-1500 8 0-7118072 00 7 log -5152748 1-7120390 log 5-150008 0-7118079 log 5152768000 log -00005 154899 log5152700000 9-7120349 log000051548 5 7122118 6 50 9 76 8 7 9 8 Iog5l52768000 9-7120406 log -000051 54899 5-7122202 The inverse of this question is done as follows : Suppose it required to find from the table the number corresponding to the logarithm 1*7118366. Rejecting the characteristic we look in the table for the mantissa which is nearest to 7118366 (but below it). This we find to be 7118325, which is the logarithm of 51503; so that the number required is (as to its significant Bgures) within a unit of 51503. Let it be 51503 -f-^y then we know that A is to be so taken* that log (51603 + A) = 4-7118366 But (page 242), log (51503 + h) = log 51503 + -0000084 X h very neariy. = 4-71 18325 + -0000084 x h * We neglect the characteristic, or rather we make our logarithm 4-7118366. But au alteration of the characteristic is only an alteration of the place of the decimal point. IN FACILITATING COMPUTATIONS. 245 __ 4-71 18366 — 4-7118325 _ -0000041 _ 41 " -0000084 "^ -0000084 "" 84 Now, from the table of diflferences we see that 34 is ^ of 84 nearly, 76 is ^ of 84, or 7 is — — of 84 nearly; 1 00 so that 34-1-7 or 41 is — -+- -^ of 84; that is, ^ =a '48 = A: whence 51503 -f-A = 51503*48 and 4-7118366 is the log of 5150384 1-7118366 -5150384 But the readiest method of putting this into practice is by making an inverse process to the method of finding a logarithm. We take an instance from another part of the table. What is the logarithm of 217483-6 ? log 21748 (*) 5-3374193 3 60 6 (t) 12 log 217483-6 is 5-3374265 What is the number whose logarithm is 5*3374265 ? •3374265 Nearest log in table, belonging to N© 21748 '3374193 Difference 72 Nearest N'^ in table of Diff. belonging to N° 3 60 120 Annex a cipher, because a figure was struck off, and therefore a figure (we do not know what) must be annexed. (See subsequent remark). Opposite to this we find 6. * Observe that we pat in the right characteristic at ouce. f Here, as before, we look opposite to six, and find 120, from which we strike off one figure. y2 J 246 OK THE USE OF LOGARITHMS Tlierefore the number to the logarithm required is (making six places before the decimal 'point, on account of the characteristic 5) 217483-6. The student will better understand, by forming a number of logarithms and inverting each process: 1. Why a figure must be annexed to the last difference, which comes after the table of differ- ences has been used once. 2. Why that figure cannot be known. 3. Why is most likely to be right. The above 12 might have been the result of any tabular difierence between 115 and 125, the mean number of which is 120. The following are examples of the process, without explanation : What are the numbers to the logarithms 2*1183214 and 1-9648317? 13131 1183214 •1182978 236 232 40 33 Ans. -01313171 92221 •9648317 •9648298 19 J9 Ans. 92*22140 The only unusual circumstance with which the student will now meet is in the multiplication and division of such quantities as 2*9. To multiply this by 5, carry to the negative term according to the common algebraical rule of addition. Thus, five times 9 are 45, set down 5, and carry 4; five times —2 are —10, and 4 are —6. The answer then is 6*5. Or 6(-9-2) = 4-6-10 = 4-.10 + -6 = 6-5 To divide 2*9 by 5, make the negative term divisible by 5, and correct the expression by a corresponding addition. Thus, 2*9 is 5 + 3*9, and 2*9 __ _5_ 3*9 5 " 5 "^ 5 14-. 78= 1-78 The following are further instances : IN FACILITATING COMPUTATIONS. 247 3-46 T-417 8 10 6)21-68 5)6-170 4 613 .. 2-834 The following is an example of the use of logarithms in multipli- cation and division, &c. What is the result of -5729578 multiplied by 20-62648, and the product divided by 7853982, after which the tenth root of the ninth power is taken ? or what is 10 r -5729578x 20-62648 T I 7853982 J log -5729578 T-7581226 log 20-62648 1-3144251 log 7853982 Add 10725477 6 8950899 Subtract 6-1774578 9 10)53-5971202 6-7597120 57505 -7597056 64 8 60 40 5 38 Answer -000005750585 Tlie student should furnish himself with examples for practice by verifying such equations, for instance, as a (a + 6) = «• + a 6, where a and b n^y be any given numbers. The logarithms of a and a + 6 being added together, and a^a-^-b) thus found, a' and ab should be separately found ; and if the whole be correct, the sum of the two last will be equal to the first. 248 ON THB USB OF LOOABITHMS. The following equations may be thus used : (a + ft) (a— 6) == a«— 6^ l/^ = V^x Vft (aft)" = a" X ft" Nothing but practice will enable the student to work correctly with logarithms, and most treatises on that subject contain detailed examples of all the cases which arise in practice. THE END. LONDON ! PRINTED BY JAMES MOYE8, CASTLE STREET, LEICESTER SQUARE. ADDENDA ET CORRIGENDA. Page viii, line 9, The mistake alluded to is the saying tbat a multiplied by nothing is a, X, ... 11, omit the word a/ti;a^«. zii, ... 16, for that 1 contains, read that is, 1 contains. XX, ... 7i for shews, read shew. 3, ... 4 from the end, /or added, read added, &c. 21, ... 8 from the end, to on each share, add which he holds. 24, ... 1 1, 12, and 14,/or 1988 and 6988, read 1998 and 6998. 3d, ... 4, for as, read as often as. 36, ... 20, for right, read left. 47, ... 9, for (a + 6), read (a + c). 60, ... 6, for 9, read A. 89, ... 13 from the end, /or square root, reac^ square. 103) Though the student omit what is said on the law of eontinuily^ he should not omit either this page, or what immediately relates to it in the next. 109,- ... 4, for n/^, read V^, 109, ... 10, /or d?i, read J^~^. 131, ... 7) /o** 9) read r, in both places. 131, ... 9 and 11, for g, read r, 1 V 144, ... 7 from the end, /or b + g^, read h + -^, Upper Gower Street. MATHEMATICAL WORKS, PRINTED FOR TAYLOR AND WALTON, BOOKSELLERS AND PUBLISHERS TO THE UNIVERSITY OF LONDON. I. The Elements of Arithmetic. By Augustus De Morgan, Professor of Mathematics in University College, London. Third Edi- tion, royal 12mo, 4s. cloth. way, that he is not fit to encounter any question unless he sees the head of the book under which it falls. On a very moderate computation of the time thus bestowed, the pupil would be in no re- spect worse off, though he spent five hours on every page of this work. The method of proceeding which I should recommend, would be as follows : — Let the pupils be taught in classes, the master exphining the article as it stands in the work. Let the former, then, try the demonstration on some other numbers proposed by the master, which should be as simple as pos- sible. The very words of the book may be used, the figures being changed, and it will rarely be found that a learner Is capable of making the proper alterations, without understanding the reason. The experience of the master will suggest to him various methods of trying thu point. When the principle has been thus dis- cussed, let the rule be distinctly stated by the master, or some of the more intelli- gent of the pupils; and let some very simple example be worked at length. Tlie pupils may then be dismissed, to try the more complicated exercises with which the work will furnish them, or any others which may be proposed." — Preface. ** Since the publication of the first edi- tion of this work, though its sale has sufficiently convinced me that there exists a disposition to introduce the principiet of arithmetic into schools, as well as the practice, I have often heard it remarked that it was a hard lxx)k for children. I never dared to suppose it would be other- wise. All who have been engaged in the education of youth are aware that it is a hard thing to make them think ; so hard, indeed, that masters had, within the last few years, almost universally abandoned the attempt, and taught them rules in- stead of principles ; by authority, instead of demonstration. 1 his system is now passing away ; and many preceptors may oe found who are of opinion that what- ever may be the additional trouble to themselves, their pupils should always be induced to reflect upon, and know the reason of, what they are doing. Such I would advise not to be discouraged by the failure of a first attempt to make the learner understand the principle of a rule. It is no exaggeration to say, that, under the present system, five years of a boy's life are partially spent in merely learning the rules contained in this treatise, and those, for the most part, in so imperfect a II. The Elements of Algebra, preliminary to the Differential Calculus, and tit for the higher classes of Schools in which the Principles of Arithmetic are taught. By Professor De Morgan. Second Edition, royal 12mo. 9s. cloth. III. Elements of Trigonometry and Trigonometrical Ana- LTSis, preliminary to the Differential Calculus : fit for those who have studied the Principles of Arithmetic and Algehra, and Six Books of Euclid. By Professor De Morgan. Royal 12mo. 9s. cloth. IV. The Connexion of Number and Magnitude : an attempt to explain the Fifth Book of Euclid. By Professor De Morgan. Royal 12mo. 4s. cloth. • • This Work it incktded in the Elemente qf Trigonometry, V. Lessons on Number, as given at a Pestalozzian School at Cheam, Surrey. By Charles Reiner. Second Edition. The Master's Manual. 12mo. 4*. 6d. cloth. > /« u i x The Scholar's Praxis. 12mo. 2s. bound. J ^^***^ separately.) i / / • -. ' - ;l / Published by Tdylor and Walton^ Upper Gower Street. VI. Lessons ok Form, at given at a Pestalozzian School at Cheam, Surrey. By Charles Reiner, Author of '^ Lessons on Number.*' With numerous Diagrams. 12mo. 6s. doth. VII. Principles of Oeome-try, familiarly illustrated, and applied to a variety of useful purposes. Designed for the Instructitm of Young Persons. By the late Rev. William Ritchie, LL.D., F.R.S. Second Edition, revised and enlarged. l2mo. with 150 Wood Cuts, 3«. 6d. cloth. ** The practical applications which are added, must render the study very delightful to the young, since the Exercises on the Principles will be found as amusing as the ordinary sports of ch\]dhood."—Athetiaum, Sept. 28* 1833. <* Dr. Ritchie's little elementary work is excellently well adapted to its object. It is brief, plain, and full of all that is necessary ; curious and useful in its application; and beyoim any other of the kind now existent in its familiar and distinct explanation of some of the instruments re(|uired in the practical application of the principles laid down and demonstrated."— Spectof or. Sept 7* lt^> An Instrument for teaching Geometry, convertible into a Theodolite, Spirit Level, Hadley's Sextant, and Wollaston's goniometer, Las been prepared, and may be had of the publishers. Price 21. 12«. 6d. VIII. Principles of the Differential and Integral Calcu- Lus, familiarly Illustrated, and applied to a variety of Useful Purposes. Designed for the Instruction of Young Persons. By the late Rev. Wil- liam Ritchie, LL.D., F.R.S. With Wood Cuts. 12mo. 4s. 6d. cloth. IX. The Elements of CSuclid, with a Commentary and Geometrical Exercises. By the Rev. Dion r si us Lardner, LL.D. Fifth Edition, 8vo. 7«- boards. X. An Analytical Treatise on Plane and Spherical Tri- gonometry. By the Rev. Dionysius Lardner, LL.D. Second Edition. Corrected and improved. 8vo. I2s. cloth. XI. An Elementary Treatise on the Differential and Integral Calculus. By the Rev. Dionysius Lardner, LL.D. 8vo. 2ls. Xll. DARLEY'S SCIENTIFIC LIBRARY. 1. A System of Popular Geometry. Containing in a few- Lessons so much of the Elements of Euclid as is necessary and sul^cient for a riglit understanding of every Art and Science in its leading Truths and general Principles. By George Darley, A.B. Fourth Edition. 4^. 6d. cloth. 2. COMPAI^ION TO THE POPULAR GEOMETRY. In whicll the Elements of Al»stract Science are familiarised, illustrated, and rendered practically useful to the various purposes of Life, with numerous Cuts. 4^. 6d. cloth. 3. A System of Popular Algebra, with a Section on Propor- tions and Progressions. Third Edition. 45. 6d. cloth. 4. A System of Popular Trigonometry, both Plain and Spherical ; with Popular Treatises on Logarithms, and the Application of Algebra to Geometry. Second Edition. 3^. Bd. cloth. *" For Students who only seek this limited knowledge of these Sciences, there are, peih ps, no Treatises which can be read with more advantage than Darle/s Popular Geometry and Algebra."— Lt&ran^ qf Ust^ul Knowledge, Artide ** Me<^anic8," 7'' -fi^i.' / f MAmSTAT IBRAlHtySI ^,^J 7^ 3 6105 033 238 366 !_- MATHEMATICS, NATURAL PHILOSOPHY, &c. ELEMENTS OF EUCLID, with a CommeDtarf and Geometricnl Eierdm s to which ire anneied a TreetUe on Solid Geometry, and Short Esaays on the Ancient Geometricul Aoaly ua and the Theory of TnairerMls. By Dr. Lakdnbb. Eighth Edition. 8va, 7(. boards. DIAGRAMS IN WOOD, to iUaatrate Dr. Labdheb's Edclid. Solid Gaometry, Book I. The Set of 9 in ■ Box, price It. &d. PRINCIPLES OF GEOMETRY, famUUrly Illoetrated, and qiplied to a Tariety of naefnl purpoaes. Deaigned for the Inatniction of Young Peraona. Seiiand Edition, reiiaed and enlarged. By Dr. Ritchie. I2mo, with 150 Woodcnts, 3>. Bd. doth. AN INSTRUMENT FOR TEACHI^ ": GEOMETRY, convertible into a Theodidite, Spirit Level, Hadley'a Seitant, and Wol- laston'a Goniometer. Price 21. 12>. Sd. NATURAL PHILDSnPHS BrtB J II' TWEj THE. Stanford University library Stanford, California Id order that others may use this hw please return it as soon as possible, I not later than the date due.